Copyright: © 1999 by QUALCOMM Incorporated


Payment and Registration

To change modes of Eudora after you install Eudora, to pay for Eudora, and to register Eudora, do the following.

1.	From the Help menu, choose Payment & Registration. The Payment and Registration dialog box appears.

2.	In the Which Eudora is for you? section:

To use Eudora Email in sponsored mode, click Sponsored Mode (free, with ads). Eudora will display the ad window.

To use Eudora Email in paid mode, click Paid Mode (costs money, no ads). Eudora displays the Eudora web site for you to purchase Eudora.

To use Eudora Email in light mode, click Light Mode (free, fewer features). Eudora changes to Eudora Email in light mode by turning off certain features.

3.	In the Keeping Current section:

To register Eudora, click Register with Us. Eudora takes you to a web site where you can register Eudora. It’s good to register because if you are using Eudora in sponsored or paid mode, you will be eligible for technical support. If you are using Eudora in light mode or have not registered, you are not eligible for technical support.

To customize the ads, click Customize the Ads You See. Eudora displays a web site where you can provide information about yourself to help in customizing which ads should be displayed to you.

To find the most current version of Eudora, click Find the Latest Versions. The Eudora web site displays where you can retrieve the latest version of Eudora.

In the Your Registration Information section, click Change Your Registration to change your registration when you change from one Eudora mode to another. The Registration dialog box appears.

Enter the information and click OK.

If you cannot find your Eudora registration code, click I Lost the Code. The Eudora web site appears for you to search for your registration code.

4.	To exit the window, click the X in the right-hand corner or the window.


Link History

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Link History is an option on the Tools menu that displays Internet web site URLs and ads that have appeared in Eudora.

To display your link history, do the following.

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Link History. The Link History dialog box appears.

2.	To view a link in the list, click to highlight it, then click View, or double-click the item. To remove the link from the list, click Remove.

If you right-click in the Link History window, a context menu appears.

Copy—copies the link item to the clipboard.

View—displays the link item’s web site page.

Remove—deletes the link item.

Change Date Display—displays a submenu allowing you to set reminders when to see the link, bookmark the link, or sort the link items by date.

Note. The items in this window expire and do not appear after 30 days.


Personality (New Message dialog)
Personality

Select a personality. This menu includes your <Dominant> personality and any additional personalities you have defined for you to select for this message.


Stationery drop-down list

Selects a stationery file for the new message.


Retrieve new mail (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Retrieve new mail

Transfer new mail for the personalities that have the Check mail option turned on in the Personalities Options. Or, as specified in the list on the right.


Include Headers (Save As dialog)
Include Headers

If this is on, the message’s (or the first of multiple messages) header information is included in the saved document. If this is not checked, only the body of the message is saved.


Guess Paragraphs (Save As dialog)
Guess Paragraphs

If this is on, extraneous carriage returns are removed from the message(s), leaving returns only at the ends of paragraphs and converting multiple spaces into tabs.


Stationery (Save As dialog)
Stationery

Save as a stationery file.


Send Queued messages (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Send Queued messages

Send all the queued messages (marked “Q”) in your Out mailbox.


Delete messages marked for deletion (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Delete messages marked for deletion

Delete the messages on the server that are marked Delete in Eudora. This is for messages that were left on the server with the Leave mail on server, Skip messages over _ k, or Fetch all message headers option.

To mark a message Delete, either click on the Trash icon in the message toolbar, or select Delete from the Server Action drop-down menu of the message summary.


Retrieve messages marked for retrieval (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Retrieve messages marked for retrieval

Retrieve the messages on the server that are marked Fetch or Fetch & Delete in Eudora. This is for messages that were left on the server with the Leave mail on server, Skip messages over x k, or Fetch all message headers option.

To mark a message Fetch or Fetch & Delete, either click on the icons in the message toolbar, or select an option from the Server Action drop-down menu of the message summary.


Delete all messages that have been retrieved (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Delete all messages that have been retrieved

Delete all the messages on the server that have already been transferred to the computer you are on.


Delete all messages on server (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Delete all messages on server

Delete all of your messages on the server. Be absolutely sure this is what you want to do because there is no way to undo it.


Fetch all message headers to In mailbox (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Fetch all message headers to In mailbox

Retrieve the header and the first few lines of every new message. If you select this option, the messages are filtered but Copy and Transfer actions are not done (the message won’t leave the In mailbox). Set the Server Action in the message summaries to specify what you want to do with the messages the next time you check mail.

Important:  If you delete the message header, and you have the Delete from server when emptied from Trash option on in the Checking Mail Options, the message is gone completely from Eudora and the server.


Apply Options to Personalities (Mail Transfer Options dialog)
Apply Options to Personalities

Specify the personalities that you want to use with this mail transfer (hold down the Shift key to select multiple personalities in sequence, or the Ctrl key to select them out of sequence).


Find dialog

Use this dialog box to find a character string within one message.


Find

Initiates a new search in a current message.


Next (Find command)
Next

Continues a search until the character string is found in either the same message or one of the other messages in the current mailbox.


Next Message (Find command)
Next Message

Begins a search at the next message following the current message.

Eudora continues the search even if it has to open more than one message or a new mailbox.


Next Mailbox (Find command)
Next Mailbox

Begins the search at the next mailbox following the current mailbox.

Eudora continues the search among all messages in that mailbox and any subsequent mailboxes, including the In, Out, and Trash mailboxes.


Character String (Find dialog)
Character String Field

Specifies the character string to be found.

You can type the string into this field or highlight the character string you want (somewhere in Eudora), then select Enter Selection from the Find submenu. This automatically inserts the highlighted string into this field.


Match Case

When this is checked, Eudora searches for exact matches of the character string, including any capitalization.


Summaries Only

When this is checked, Eudora searches only the Sender and Subject fields of message summaries as they appear in mailbox windows. (This is much faster than a full search).


Checking Spelling dialog

Use this dialog box to check for misspellings in the body of current message composition windows, text files, and signature files. It includes a built-in dictionary and also allows for the creation of a custom user dictionary.

You can set the spell checker to ignore capitalized words, words with numbers, and mixed case words, to report mixed case and doubled (repeated) words, and to suggest alternative spellings.


Unknown (Checking Spelling dialog)
Unknown

The unknown word is one that is not found in Eudora's  dictionary or your own custom dictionary. You can act on an unknown word using the buttons in this dialog box.


Change To (Checking Spelling dialog)
Change To

Gives a suggestion for the correction, and lets you enter your own text if the suggestion does not work. You can also click on a suggestion in the Suggestions field and it will be entered in the Change To field.

To change the unknown word to the text in the Change To field, click on the Change or Change all button.


Suggestions (Checking Spelling dialog)
Suggestions

Lists suggestions for the correct spelling of the unknown word.

If the Always Suggest option is turned on (click on Options to see what options are on), all suggestions are listed here by default. If the option is turned off, click the Suggest button to display the suggestions.


Ignore (Checking Spelling dialog)
Ignore

Leaves this occurrence of the unknown word as it is and continues the spelling check.


Ignore all (Checking Spelling dialog)
Ignore all

Leaves all occurrences of the unknown word as they are and  continues the spelling check.


Change (Checking Spelling dialog)
Change

Changes the unknown word to the text in the Change To field.


Change all (Checking Spelling dialog)
Change all

Changes every occurrence of the unknown word to the text in the Change To field.


Suggest (Checking Spelling dialog)
Suggest

Displays in the Suggestions field all the suggestions for the correct spelling of the unknown word. If there are no suggestions in the dictionary, then none are listed.

If you want the suggestions displayed automatically, click on the Options button and turn on the Always Suggest option.


Add (Checking Spelling dialog)
Add

Adds the unknown word to your custom dictionary.


Edit Dictionary

Displays the User Dictionary dialog box so that you can add or delete words or clear your dictionary.


Edit Dictionary dialog

Use the User Dictionary dialog box to add words to or delete words from your dictionary, or to clear the entire dictionary.


Word (Edit Dictionary dialog)
Word

Specifies what word is to be added or deleted from your dictionary.

You can type this into the field, or select a word from the dictionary.


Dictionary (Edit Dictionary dialog)
Dictionary

Lists the words in your dictionary.


Add (Edit Dictionary dialog)
Add

Adds the word in the Word: field to your dictionary.


Delete (Edit Dictionary dialog)
Delete

Deletes the word in the Word: field from your dictionary.


Clear (Edit Dictionary dialog)
Clear

Clears the dictionary so that it is left empty.


Options (Checking Spelling dialog)
Options

Displays the spell checking Preferences dialog box so that you can set your spell checking options.


Check Spelling Preferences (Checking Spelling Options)
Check Spelling Preferences

Lists the six spell checking options. A check mark in the box next to the option name indicates that it is turned on.


Ignore capitalized words (Checking Spelling Options)
Ignore capitalized words

If this is checked, words that start with capital letters are ignored.


Ignore words with numbers (Checking Spelling Options)
Ignore words with numbers

If this is checked, words that contain numbers are ignored.


Ignore words with mixed case (Checking Spelling Options)
Ignore words with mixed case

If this is checked, words that contain both upper and lower case characters are ignored.


Report words with mixed case (Checking Spelling Options)
Report words with mixed case

If this is checked, words that contain both upper and lower case characters are reported and identified as Mixed case.


Report doubled words (Checking Spelling Options)
Report doubled words

If this is checked, words that appear twice in sequence in text are reported and identified as Doubled words.


Always suggest (Checking Spelling Options)
Always suggest

If this is checked, Eudora's suggestions for the correct spelling of an unknown word are displayed  in the Suggestions field by default.


New Mailbox dialog

Use this dialog box to create a new mailbox.


Name the new mailbox (New Mailbox dialog)
Name the new mailbox

Enter the name of the new mailbox.


Make it a folder (New Mailbox dialog)
Make it a folder

If this is checked, the new mailbox is created as a folder.

The New Mailbox dialog box appears again so that you can create a mailbox that goes into the folder.


Don't Transfer (New Mailbox dialog)
Don’t Transfer

If this is checked, the new mailbox is created but the selected messages are not transferred into it.


Change Queueing
Change Queueing...

Use this dialog box to queue the current messages, unqueue messages, or set a time for queued messages to be sent.


Send Message (Change Queueing dialog)
Send Message:

These options specify when the selected messages should be sent.


Right Now (Change Queueing dialog)
Right Now

Sets the message to send immediately when you click the OK button.


Next Time Queued Messages are Sent (Change Queueing dialog)
Next Time Queued Messages are Sent

Sets the message to be sent the next time queued messages are sent.


On or after (Change Queueing dialog)
On or after

Sets a time and date for the message to be sent.

The message is saved in the Out mailbox with a clock icon in the status column, just as if it were a normal queued message. However, the message is not sent until the specified time. For the message to be sent at the correct time, Eudora must be running at that time. If Eudora is not running then, the message is sent when Eudora is opened.


Time (Change Queueing dialog)
Time

Specifies what time the message will be sent.

Change the default time if you want the message to be sent at a different time. The message is saved in the Out mailbox with a clock icon in the status column, then sent at the specified time. For the message to be sent at the correct time, Eudora must be running at that time. If Eudora is not running then, the message is sent when Eudora is next opened.


Date (Change Queueing dialog)
Date

Specifies what date the message will be sent.

Change the default date if you want the message to be sent at a different date. The message is saved in the Out mailbox with a clock icon in the status column, then sent on the specified date. For the message to be sent at the correct time, Eudora must be running at that time. If Eudora is not running then, the message is sent when Eudora is next opened.


Don't Send (Change Queueing dialog)
Don't Send

Changes the message status from queued to saved.


Filters command
Change Password

Change the password for the selected account (personality).


Change Password

Enter the password for the selected account.


Filters

The Make Filter dialog box lets you create quick, simple filters that perform one operation—a mail transfer based on one match condition—a piece of header information. The Filters window lets you create more complex, powerful filters that use multiple match conditions and perform multiple filter actions. (You can also use the Filters window to create simple filters such as those created by the Make Filter dialog box.)

Note: To toggle from the left and right window panes, press F6.

To create or modify a detailed filter, do the following:

1. 	Click the New button or select an existing filter.

2. 	Choose the options for how you want the filter to be used, as an automatic filter to be invoked on any Incoming and/or Outgoing mail, and as a Manual filter that can be invoked when you choose Filter Messages from the Special menu. Any combination of these options works.

3. 	Define the criteria for the filter; use the header item pop-ups and the text fields to specify which header items should include a particular string of text. You can define two related terms for the criteria so that your filter is as specific as possible.

4. 	Define the action or actions to be taken on messages that fit the and save the filters.

Some filter actions have an associated icon. For these actions, Eudora places the action icon next to the filter in the filters list. Up to five icons can appear per filter.

The Actions options are as follows:

None — No action.

Make Status — Assigns the selected status to message summaries.

Make Priority — Assigns the selected priority level to messages. If you select a set level, messages are set to that priority. If you select Raise or Lower, messages are raised or lowered one priority level based on their pre-filter level.

Make Label (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Assigns the selected label to messages. Label colors and names are set in the Labels options panel.

Make Personality (Sponsored and Paid modes only) — Assigns the selected personality to messages. For outgoing messages, the message is sent from the assigned personality. For incoming messages, all your responses to the message will be from the assigned personality until you change the personality associated with the incoming message or your response.

Make Subject — Assigns the new subject to message summaries (does not affect the subject in the message itself). If you choose this option, the entire subject of the message is replaced with the new subject. Use the “&” symbol to stand for the old subject if you want to add the new subject to the old subject. For example, entering New Subject [was &] results in New Subject [was Old Subject].

Play Sound — Plays the selected sound when messages are filtered.

Speak (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— A voice makes you aware when a certain email message is retrieved. The voice can read the name of the sender and the subject line of the message, if you so choose. Also, you can select the type of voice you prefer from a drop-down list that appears. After you select Speak, the Who and Subject fields and a drop-down voice list appear. If these fields are grayed out, you must install Microsoft’s Text to Speech Engine applications. Click www.microsoft.com/IIT/download/speechengines.htm

Open (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Opens the Mailbox and/or Message when a message is received. If you set a previous action to filter messages into a mailbox, then that mailbox is opened.

Print (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Prints one copy of each message.

Notify User (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Notifies you As Normal and/or In Report when messages are received. The As Normal option notifies you based on the options you have selected in the Getting Attention options panel. The In Report option notifies you by opening the Filter Report window and displaying in that window a filter report that details what filter actions have been done.

Notify Application — Notifies the selected application when messages are received, and provides information from the message. Specify the application to use and the part of the message to be included.

Use the Browse button to select an application, or enter the command line yourself. The command line should include the path to the executable, any options, and the following substitution variables, all separated by blank spaces:

%1	Date
%2	To
%3	From
%4	Subject
%5	Cc
%6	The entire message

For example, the command line to send the subject of a message to a pager might look like this:

C:\apps\pager.exe -c %4

Forward To (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Forwards messages to the email address given. Forwarded messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Redirect To (Sponsored and Paid modes only)—  Redirects messages to the email address given. Redirected messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Reply with — Replies to messages with the selected stationery message. Replies are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages. One typical use of this action is to reply to specific senders with stationery telling them that you’re on vacation: “I’m out till the 10th. I’ll reply to your message when I get back.”

Server Options (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Sets the message’s server status to Fetch and/or Delete (incoming server only). The Fetch option specifies that the entire message be transferred from the server the next time mail is checked, and the Delete option specifies that the message be deleted from the server the next time mail is checked. If you select both, the message will be transferred and deleted.

Copy To — Copies messages to the selected mailbox.

Transfer To — Transfers messages to the selected mailbox.

Skip Rest — Stops filtering for the message (the message is not matched to the rest of the filters in the filter list).

When the filters are invoked (automatically or manually), each message is matched against each filter in order from top to bottom. If the message meets a filter’s criteria, the actions are done as specified until there are no more actions, then the message is matched against the next filter. If at any point a Skip Rest action is done, nothing else is done with that message, and the next message is filtered.

You can change the width of the filters list to create more or less space for your list. To do this, put the arrow over the bar to the right of the list and drag the line to the left or right.


Filter List

Displays the filters you have defined.

Filters are invoked from top to bottom. This order may be important when overlapping matches exist.


Up (Filters window)
Up

Moves the selected filter up in the filter list, changing the order it is invoked.


Down (Filters window)
Down

Moves the selected filter down in the filter list, changing the order it is invoked.


New (Filters window)
New

Adds a new filter named “Untitled” to the filter list. The filter is named automatically based on the information you enter in the Header and Matching Text fields.


Remove (Filters window)
Remove

Removes the selected filter from the filter list. The filter is deleted when you save changes to the Filters window.


Incoming (Filters window)
Incoming

If this is checked, the filter is invoked on all incoming messages.


Outgoing (Filters window)
Outgoing

If this is checked, the filter is invoked on all outgoing messages after they are sent.


Manual (Filters window)
Manual

If this is checked, the filter is invoked only when you select Filter Messages from the Special menu.


Header (Filters window)
Header

Specifies which section of the message the filter will search. You can select an option from the drop-down menu or enter one yourself. This is helpful if you want to use a header item that does not appear on the menu, such as X-Persona (for an alternate personality).

The «Any Recipient» option searches all possible recipient items (To, Cc, Bcc), the «Any Header» option searches all message headers (including hidden headers that are shown with the Blah Blah Blah option), and the «Body» option searches the message body.


Match Type (Filters window)
Match

Specifies the type of match the filter performs when comparing the character string to the specified header.

contains or does not contain
If the specified header item contains or does not contain the text string, filter the message.

is or is not
If the specified header item is or is not a complete match of the text string, filter the message.

starts with or ends with
If the specified header item starts with or ends with the text string, filter the message. The starts with item refers to the first non-whitespace character after the colon, so any spaces after the colon are ignored.

appears or does not appear
If the header item appears or does not appear in the message, filter the message (the text field is ignored). This is useful for filtering messages based only on the types of fields they contain.

intersects nickname
If the text string is included in a nickname (whether it is a full address or a nickname within the nickname), filter the message.

matches regexp (case sensitive) (Sponsored and Paid modes only)

If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters with case sensitivity, filter those messages.

Note. Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text.

Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters. For example, if you are filtering messages sent to you by two people, choose From in the first drop-down options list, then choose matches regexp, then type their usernames between parentheses separated by a vertical slash, for example (bobclark)|(janedoe)in the text box. Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people.  For more information on regular expressions, click http://sansecus.usc.es/unixpages/concepts_regexp.html

matches regexp

If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters, filter those messages.

See Regular Expressions.


Matching Text (Filters window)
Matching Text

Specifies the character string that the filter searches for.

Keep this as specific and brief as possible. The greater the complexity of the search string, the less the likelihood of an exact match.


Conjunction (Filters window)
Conjunction

Specifies how the second criteria is to be used.

ignore
Ignore the second term; if the message matches the first term, filter the message.

and
If the message matches both the first and second terms, filter it.

or
If the message matches either term, filter it.

unless
If the message matches both the first and second terms, do not filter it. (This lets you exclude certain variations of the first term.)


None (Filter Action)
Filter Actions

None (Filter Action) — No action.

Make Status — Assigns the selected status to messages. Select a status from the drop-down menu.

Make Priority — Assigns the selected priority to messages. Select a priority from the drop-down menu.

Make Label (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Assigns the selected label to messages. Select a label from the drop-down menu.

Make Subject — Assigns the subject to messages. Enter a subject in the text field. The new subject is given in the message summary in the mailbox window, but the subject is not changed in the message itself. To include the text of the previous subject in your new subject, use the “&” symbol. For example, typing test message:& in this field results in the subject test message:previous subject.

Play Sound — Plays the selected Sound when messages are received. Select a sound using the file dialog box from the Sound button.

Speak (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— A voice makes you aware when a certain email message is retrieved. The voice can read the name of the sender and the subject line of the message, if you so choose. Also, you can select the type of voice you prefer from a drop-down list that appears. After you select Speak, the Who and Subject fields and a drop-down voice list appear. If these fields are grayed out, you must install Microsoft’s Text to Speech Engine applications. Click www.microsoft.com/IIT/download/speechengines.htm

Open (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Opens the Mailbox and/or Message when a message is received. If you set a previous action to filter messages into a mailbox, then that mailbox is opened.

Print (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Prints one copy of each message.

Notify User (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Notifies you As normal and/or In report when messages are received. The As normal option notifies you based on the options have selected in the Getting Attention Options. The In report option notifies you by displaying a Filter Report that details what filter actions have been taken.

Notify Application — Notifies the selected application when messages are received, and provide information from the message. Specify the application to use and the part of the message to be included. Use the Browse button to select an application, or enter the command line yourself. The command line should include the path to the executable, any options, and the following substitution variables, separated by blank spaces:

%1	Date
%2	To
%3	From
%4	Subject
%5	Cc
%6	Filename (will contain the entire message)

For example, the command line to send the subject of a message to a pager might look like this:

C:\apps\pager.exe -c %4

Forward To (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Forwards messages to the email address. Enter an email address in the text field. Forwarded messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Redirect To (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Redirects messages to the email address. Enter an email address in the text field. Redirected messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Reply With — Replies to messages with the selected stationery file. Select a stationery file from the drop-down menu. Replies are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Server Options (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Assigns the selected server actions to messages (incoming server only). The Fetch option specifies that the entire message be transferred from the server the next time mail is checked, and the Delete option specifies that the message be deleted from the server the next time mail is checked. If you select both, the message will be transferred and deleted.

Copy To — Copies messages to the selected mailbox. Select a mailbox from the drop-down menu.

Transfer To — Transfers messages to the selected mailbox. Select a mailbox from the drop-down menu. If you add a new Transfer To action, a dialog box appears asking if you want to add an implied Skip rest action. If you do not, subsequent actions in that or other filters could cause the message to be transferred out of the first mailbox you transferred it to.

Skip Rest — Stops filtering for the message (the message is not matched to the rest of the filters in the list).


Mailboxes Window

The Mailboxes window lets you create new mailboxes and folders, remove and rename them, and move mailboxes among folders. Mailboxes or folders that are bolded have unread messages.

By default, the Mailboxes window is provided as the first window in a five-window tool group docked vertically to the left side of the main Eudora window.

To open a mailbox or folder within the window, double-click it, or click it once and press Enter. You can move among the folders and mailboxes using the up and down arrow keys, or close or open folders using the left and right arrow keys. You can also start typing the name of the mailbox or folder you want, and it is highlighted when you have typed enough unique characters to identify it (the item must be displayed, so a mailbox that is in a closed folder cannot be selected).

Right-click any item in the Mailboxes window and a pop-up menu appears whose commands let you, depending on the item, create, remove, and rename mailboxes and folders, open existing mailboxes and folders, and empty the trash from the Trash mailbox.

Note: Try not to keep too many messages in your In, Out, or Trash mailboxes  because it can slow down your system’s performance. However, you can transfer messages from your In and Out boxes to other mailboxes and delete messages from you Trash box on a regular basis.

The folder trees displayed in the Mailboxes window, and some of the operations available from the pop-up menu, depend on whether your incoming mail server for one or more mail accounts uses the POP or the IMAP protocol.


 Mailboxes

The Mailboxes window lets you create new mailboxes and folders, remove and rename them, and move mailboxes among folders. Mailboxes or folders that are bolded have unread messages.

By default, the Mailboxes window is provided as the first window in a five-window tool group docked vertically to the left side of the main Eudora window.

To open a mailbox or folder within the window, double-click it, or click it once and press Enter. You can move among the folders and mailboxes using the up and down arrow keys, or close or open folders using the left and right arrow keys. You can also start typing the name of the mailbox or folder you want, and it is highlighted when you have typed enough unique characters to identify it (the item must be displayed, so a mailbox that is in a closed folder cannot be selected).

Right-click any item in the Mailboxes window and a pop-up menu appears whose commands let you, depending on the item, create, remove, and rename mailboxes and folders, open existing mailboxes and folders, and empty the trash from the Trash mailbox.

Note: Try not to keep too many messages in your In, Out, or Trash mailboxes because it can slow down your system’s performance. However, you can transfer messages from your In and Out boxes to other mailboxes and delete messages from you Trash box on a regular basis.

The folder trees displayed in the Mailboxes window, and some of the operations available from the pop-up menu, depend on whether your incoming mail server for one or more mail accounts uses the POP or the IMAP protocol.

To create a new mailbox or folder in the Mailboxes window, do the following:

1. 	Right-click on the folder. A pop-up menu appears.

2. 	From the pop-up menu, choose New. A dialog box appears requesting the name of the new mailbox or folder.

3. 	Type in the new name, check the Make it a folder option if you want to, and click OK. If you chose to make it a folder, enter the name of the mailbox when the dialog box appears again, and click OK. The new mailbox or folder appears in the lists, and is added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus.

To rename a mailbox or folder, do the following:

1. 	Click the mailbox or folder name once, pause, then click again to highlight just the name.

2. 	Type in the new name. Or, right-click the item and choose Rename, or click once on the item and press F2, then type in the new name.

3. 	Press Enter to accept your change, or Esc to cancel it.

To move a mailbox from one folder to another, in the Mailboxes window select the one you want to move and drag it to where you want it.

To remove a mailbox or folder, either right-click it and choose Delete from the pop-up menu, or click once on it to highlight it and then press the Delete key.

If you choose to remove a mailbox in which messages are still stored, or a folder in which other mailboxes or folders are stored, you are prompted to confirm the deletion for each such item selected. Click Remove it to delete the current item for which you are being prompted, or click Remove all to remove all items selected for deletion—no further prompts will appear. Or click Cancel to cancel the deletion. If you delete a non-empty mailbox or folder, all messages, mailboxes, and folders contained within the mailbox or folder are also deleted.


 Address Book Files and Entries

Lists all your Address Book files and entries.

Files are shown as book icons and can be opened and closed by double-clicking on them.

•	To select multiple files and entries, hold down the Shift key and make selections in sequence, or hold down the Ctrl key and make selections out of sequence.

Lists all your Address Book files and entries.

•	To open and close an Address Book file (shown as a book icon), double-click on it.

•	To select multiple files and entries, hold down the Shift key and make selections in sequence, or hold down the Ctrl key and make selections out of sequence.


View By (Address Book)
 View By

Determines how the Address Book entries are displayed in the list-by Nickname, Address, Name, Postal address, Phone, or Fax.


 New (Address Book)

Creates a new entry or file.

The New Nickname dialog box appears, prompting you to name the entry. You can also put the entry on the Quick Recipient List or Make the entry a file.


Remove (Address Book)
 Delete (Address Book)

Removes a selected entry or file from the list.


 To (Address Book)

Creates a new message addressed to the selected entry, or adds the selected entry to the active message.

To select multiple entries, hold down the Shift key and make selections in sequence, or hold down the Ctrl key and make selections out of sequence.

You can also drag selected entries to the recipient fields of open messages.


 Cc (Address Book)

Creates a new message CC’d (carbon copy) to the selected entry, or adds the selected entry to the active message.

To select multiple entries, hold down the Shift key and make selections in sequence, or hold down the Ctrl key and make selections out of sequence.

You can also drag selected entries to the recipient fields of open messages.


 Bcc (Address Book)

Creates a new message Bcc’d (blind carbon copy) to the selected entry, or adds the selected entry to the active message.

To select multiple entries, hold down the Shift key and make selections in sequence, or hold down the Ctrl key and make selections out of sequence.

You can also drag selected entries to the recipient fields of open messages.


Expand Nickname (Address Book)
 Expand Nickname

If this is checked, the full address(es) are inserted into the message address fields (instead of the nickname) when you use the To, Cc, or Bcc buttons.


Nickname (Address Book)
 Nickname

The Nickname for the entry.


Recipient List (Address Book)
 Recipient List

If this is checked, the nickname is included in the Quick Recipient List.

To put multiple entries on the Quick Recipient List, select the entries then check this option for any one of them.


Address(es) (Address Book)
 Address(es)

The email addresses that are included in the nickname.

You can use full addresses and nicknames in this field, just be sure any nicknames you use are defined in another entry. Separate each address or nickname with a comma or a carriage return (Enter). This is the only place you can use a carriage return to separate addresses.

If you do not have a Name defined for the entry (in the Info tab), all of the addresses in this field will be included in outgoing mail.


Notes (Address Book)
 Notes

These are your notes for the entry. This information is not included in an outgoing message.


Name (Address Book)
 Name

This is the name of the entry.

If there is more than one address for an entry, only the Name is given in the To field of outgoing messages, not the list of addresses. This is similar to Bcc, because the recipient list is hidden to each recipient.


Postal Address (Address Book)
 Postal Address

This is the postal address the entry. This information is not included in an outgoing message.


Phone (Address Book)
 Phone

This is the phone number for the entry. This information is not included in an outgoing message.


Fax (Address Book)
 Fax

This is the fax number for the entry. This information is not included in an outgoing message.


New Nickname dialog
 New Nickname

The New Nickname dialog box lets you create a new entry for your Address Book.


What do you wish to call it? (New Nickname)
 What do you wish to call it?

This is the nickname for the new entry.


File (New Nickname)
 File

The file that the entry should go into.

This option is not available if you select the Make it an address book option.


Put it on the recipient list (New Nickname)
 Put it on the recipient list

If this is checked, the entry is included in the recipient list.


Make it an address book (New Nickname)
 Make it an address book

If this is checked, a file is created instead of a new entry.


 Directory Services

Use Directory Services to access two different directory services, for example Ph and Finger.

Certain directory service inquiries will only work if you have the appropriate software running on your server.


Server field (Directory Services)
 Server field

Lists the server from the Server field of the Hosts Options dialog box.

You can enter a different server name for this session. The next time you open the window, the server will be reset to the name in the Options dialog box.


Command (Directory Services)
 Command

Specifies the name or address being searched for, whether you will use Ph or Finger.


Response (Directory Services)
 Response

Displays the server or host response.


Ph (Directory Services)
 Ph

Initiates a Ph query for the text in the Command field.


Finger (Directory Services)
 Finger

Initiates a Finger query for the text in the Command field.


To (Directory Services)
 To

Adds the selected query results to the To field of a new message (opens a new message if necessary).


Cc (Directory Services)
 Cc

Adds the selected query results to the Cc field of a new message (opens a new message if necessary).


Bcc (Directory Services)
Bcc

Adds the selected query results to the Bcc field of a new message (opens a new message if necessary).


Keep on top (Directory Services)
 Keep on top

If this is on, when you use the To, Cc, or Bcc buttons the Directory Services windows stays active (on top of the message window).


New Signature (New Signature dialog)
 Signature Name

The name of the new signature you are creating.


Real Name

The real name assigned to this email account: generally a first and last name. The text you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this account, and identifies to your recipients whom the mail is from.


Return Address

The return email address used in outgoing messages and your recipients' replies for this account, if the address is different from this personality's incoming email account. The address you enter is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this account, and when a recipient replies to a message from this personality, the reply is sent to this address. If you do not enter an address in this field, Eudora uses the personality's incoming email account as the return address. Note: If you do enter an address in this field, first test the address to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you. If you use an invalid return address, no one will be able to reply to your mail sent from this personality.


Login Name

This is the name you use to log in to this email account, if the account requires a user login. Login names generally consist of the text before the at sign (@) in your return address or incoming email account. For example, in the return address beatrixp@qualcomm.com, the login name is beatrixp.


SMTP Server

This is the name of the outgoing mail server for this account. SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Outgoing messages you send are routed through this server. If the computer that this personality's incoming mail account is on also runs an SMTP server, you can leave this field blank. Otherwise, enter the full name of the computer running the SMTP server.


Default Domain

This is the domain name that Eudora automatically adds to an unqualified name addressed in messages sent from this account. An unqualified name is a name that doesn't have an "@" sign followed by a domain name. This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain.


Default Stationery

The default stationery to use for all outgoing messages sent from this account. Select a stationery file from the drop-down menu, or select <No Default> for no default stationery. See the User Manual for details on using stationery with alternate personalities.


Default Signature

This sets the default signature to use for all outgoing messages sent from this account, but only when you are not using stationery (that is, only when the Default Stationery drop-down menu in this dialog box is set to <No Default>). If you have chosen a stationery file in the Default Stationery field, then the signature saved with that stationery will override your setting here.

Select a signature from this drop-down menu, or select <No Default> for no default signature. If you select a signature, Eudora automatically attaches that signature to the end of all outgoing messages sent from this account. You can always change the signature in a particular outgoing message using the Signature drop-down menu in the composition window. See the User Manual for more details about using signatures with alternate personalities.


Check Mail

If this option is on, then mail checking is activated for this account in the following ways:

If you have specified a number in the Check for mail every _ minutes option in the Checking Mail Options, then when automatic mail-checks are performed at these intervals, mail for this account is checked too.

Each time you do a manual check for mail, by selecting the Check Mail command from the File menu or via another method, mail is checked for this account too.

If this option is off, then mail for this personality is not checked during manual or automatic mail-checks, except that you can override the setting and still check for the personality's mail using the Mail Transfer Options dialog box (POP account only) or the Check Mail command on the drop-down menu displayed by right-clicking in the Personalities window.


Transfer to New Mailbox

Click this button to transfer the filtered message to a new mailbox that you will specify. The text field is filled in with a suggested new-mailbox name based on your selected content match condition (From, Any Recipient, or Subject). You can change this name if you like.


Transfer to Existing Mailbox

Click this button to transfer the filtered message into one of your existing mailboxes. Select the mailbox from the button next to the field. The default mailbox is the In box. When you click the button, a version of the Transfer menu appears, letting you choose the mailbox from the Transfer menu.


Delete Message

Click this button to delete the message that satisfies the filter match conditions, transferring it to your Trash mailbox. This feature is useful for deleting junk email, or “spam” as it is called in the Internet world.


From

If you are making a filter from an existing email message, the sender of the email’s name and email address is in this field. You can modify this field. For example, if you want all messages from this person to go to a specific mailbox, just leave this field as is.


Any Recipient

This field searches all possible recipient items. The default is your name and email address. You can change the name in this field. For example, if you want mail to this recipient other than you to be placed into a specific mailbox, enter the name and email address of that person in this field.


Stationery

Stationery files are templates for outgoing messages. If you find yourself repeatedly sending the same message, save the message as a stationery file and send it whenever you need to with the New Message With or Reply With commands. This way you don’t have to copy and paste text into a message; you can just open a pre-written message and edit it as necessary.

The Stationery window displays a single-column list of your stationery files.

Note:	You can select only one item at a time in the list; you cannot select multiple items.

If you right-click a stationery item in the list, a context menu appears with the following commands (the standard Eudora window-management commands appear at the bottom):

•	New — Create a new piece of stationery (a new stationery file). An untitled stationery window opens; enter the stationery name and from the File menu, choose Save As Stationery.

•	Edit — Open an editing window for the selected stationery item. Make your changes and from the File menu, choose Save As Stationery, or close without saving to discard your changes.

•	Delete — Delete the selected stationery item. Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion. Use the Del key (Delete) as a shortcut for this command.

•	Rename — Rename the selected stationery file. Use the F2 key as a shortcut for this command, or click the stationery file’s name box, then edit the name right in the box.

•	New Message With — Create a new message with the selected stationery. As a shortcut for this command, either select the stationery item and press Enter, or just double-click the stationery item.

•	Reply With — Reply with the selected stationery to the sender(s) of the received messages that are currently selected.

•	Reply to All With — Reply with the selected stationery to the sender(s) and all recipients of the received messages that are currently selected.

You can also display the context menu and create new stationery by right-clicking anywhere in an empty Stationery window or by right-clicking anywhere off a stationery item in a non-empty Stationery window.


Signatures

A signature is a few lines of text that is added automatically to the end of an outgoing message when it is sent. A signature can be whatever you want, but it is mostly used to give contact information (telephone, address, etc.). You use only one signature at a time in a message, but you can create as many different signatures as you want.

Note:	Your signature is not displayed in the Eudora message window, but is added to the end of the message when it is sent.

The Signature window displays a single-column list of your signature files.

Note:	You can select only one item at a time in the list; you cannot select multiple items.

If you right-click a signature in the list, a context menu appears with the following commands (the standard Eudora window-management commands appear at the bottom):

•	New — Create a new signature. Eudora prompts you for the name of the new signature, then opens an editing window for you to type the signature text. Save the text with the File menu Save command, or close without saving to discard.

•	Edit — Open an editing window for the selected signature. Double-click a signature as a shortcut for this command. Save your changes with the File menu Save command, or close the window without saving to discard your changes.

•	Delete — Delete the selected signature. Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion. Use the Del key (Delete) as a shortcut for this command.

•	Rename — Rename the selected signature. Use the F2 key as a shortcut for this command, or click the signature item’s name box, then edit the name right in the box.

You can also display the context menu and create a new signature by right-clicking anywhere in an empty Signature window or by right-clicking anywhere off a signature item in a non-empty Signature window.


Address Book

The Address Book is where you keep information about individuals or groups that you correspond with. Each entry in the Address Book includes a nickname for a person or group, their full email addresses, a real name, any contact information, and any notes. You can also use the Address Book to put nicknames on the Quick Recipient List, and to address a new message.

You can use the View By option to display the entries using any of the fields except the Notes field. For example, if you want to view the entries by nicknames, choose View By Nickname. If you view by a field that doesn’t contain any data, the entry appears with <>.

You can also start typing in the list of entries, and the appropriate entry will be selected when you enter enough unique characters to identify it.

Note: To toggle from the left and right window panes, press F6.

To create a new file of Address Book entries, do the following:

1. 	Click New, or right-click anywhere in the entry list and from the pop-up menu, choose New. A dialog box appears asking what you want to call it.

2. 	Enter a name for the file and choose Make it an Address Book, then click OK to create it. The file appears in the list, and you can now add entries to the file.

To create a new entry to be included in an existing file, do the following:

1. 	Click New or right-click anywhere in the entry list and from the pop-up menu, choose New.

2. 	Select an address from anywhere in Eudora and drag it to the Address Book, or drag a message summary to the Address Book. A dialog box appears.

3. 	Enter a Nickname for the entry. A Nickname (sometimes called an alias) is an easily remembered, shorter substitute for the email addresses in the entry. Nicknames can be used in place of proper email addresses in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields of outgoing messages. For example, “buddies” may be a nickname that stands for a list of five complicated email messages for five friends of yours. You’ll be sending mail addressed to “buddies” rather than having to enter those five complicated email addresses in the recipient fields.

4. 	Specify which file this entry belongs in (if you have multiple files).

5. 	If you want the nickname on your recipient list, select the Put it on the recipient list option. You cannot create a file within a file, so do not use the Make it an Address Book option.

6. 	To create the entry, click OK. Then you can enter the information for that entry.

7. 	In the Address(es) tab, enter the complete email addresses of the people (or person) to be included in the nickname, separating the addresses with commas or returns (this is the only place you can use a return to separate addresses). You can also use nicknames in this field, but be sure that any nicknames you use are defined in their own entry. You can use a mix of nicknames and complete email addresses.

Note:	Be sure there is no other information in this field except addresses or nicknames, or your messages will be addressed incorrectly.

9.      In the Name field (in the Info tab), enter the real name of the person or group. If there is just one address for the entry, the real name and the address are included in the To field for your recipient to see. If there is more than one address for the entry, the real name is the only thing included in the To field for your recipients—they do not see the whole list of recipients. If there is nothing in the Name field, the recipients do see the whole list.

In the other fields provided in the Info (Postal Address, Phone, and Fax) and Notes tabs, you can enter contact information for the person or group, and any notes to yourself. This information is not included in outgoing messages.

We recommend that you have at most 2,500 entries per file. If you have a large number of entries, you may want to consider using a Ph server (for information, see the “Sources” section of the Online Eudora User Manual).

10.    To save your changes to the Address Book, from the File menu, choose Save.

To include a nickname in the Quick Recipient List, do the following:

1. 	Right-click the appropriate Address Book entry in the list and from the pop-up menu, choose Add to Recipient List. The nickname for the selected entry is included on the Quick Recipient List, and the entry is bolded in the Address Book list.

To remove a nickname from the Quick Recipient List, do the following:

1. 	Right-click the item in the Address Book list and from the pop-up menu, choose Remove From Recipient. The nickname for the selected entry is removed from the Quick Recipient List, and the entry is unbolded in the Address Book list.

If you change a nickname, the Quick Recipient List is updated as appropriate.

Note:	You can add or remove multiple nicknames to or from the Quick Recipient List by selecting multiple entries before right-clicking. Hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence, or the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.


Directory Services

Eudora lets you look individuals up on the Internet, within your company, and in your Eudora Address Book (if you have one set up) using four directory service protocols: Ph, Finger, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), and Eudora Address Book.

The directory service protocols available to you for your search are listed in the Protocols section of the window. The Protocols section of the Directory Services window lists the directory service protocols available to you that you can use when creating and modifying databases for looking up individuals via these services.

Note:	The Eudora Address Book protocol does not appear in the list until you have created an Address Book in Eudora.

To sort the protocols alphabetically, click the column heading (Registered Drivers). Shift-click the column heading to sort in reverse order.

You can resize the column by dragging the divider line to the right of the column heading to the left or right.

The databases you can use to look up your target individual are listed in the Databases list. The Databases section of the Directory Services window lists the databases that are available to you for searching for individuals over the Internet, within your company, or in your Address Book (if one is set up).

Eudora comes with these servers already configured by default:

•	ldap.bigfoot.com

•	ldap.switchboard.com

•	ldap.whowhere.com

•	ldap.infospace.com

•	ldapbiz.infospace.com

•	ldap.four11.com

•	Eudora Nicknames [or the name of your nicknames file; this last item appears only if you have a Eudora Address Book set up]

You can modify or delete these databases, and you can also create new databases and modify and delete them.

You use the databases in this list to perform your lookup queries. To perform a query, you must first select one or more databases in the list. To select a database, click the checkbox to the left of the database name, until a checkmark appears in the box. If no databases are selected, you cannot perform a query.

You can select multiple databases to perform a query, and you can mix protocols.

Click a column heading to sort this list by that column, alphabetically. Shift-click the column heading to sort in reverse order.

To look someone up on the Internet, within your company, or in your Eudora Address Book, do the following:

1.	In the Databases list, select the database(s) you want to search in your query.

To select a database, click the checkbox to the left of the database until a checkmark appears in the box. You can select multiple databases, and you can use multiple protocols. You must select at least one database in the list in order for Eudora to perform the query.

Note: Eudora remembers which databases you’ve selected when you quit and restart the

program.

3.	In the Query field, type a text string you want to search against.

If one or more of your selected databases use a protocol other than Ph, your entry in this field will always be interpreted as a name. If you only have Ph servers selected as your databases, you can enter any commands that Ph will interpret.

4.	After you’ve typed the text, start the query by pressing Enter or clicking the Start button.

The query begins, and the Start button changes to Stop.

5.	To stop the query before it is completed, click the Stop button.

When the query is completed, or if you click Stop to cancel the query, the Stop button changes back to Start.

To resize columns, position the mouse pointer over the divider line to the right of the desired column, and drag the line to the left or right.


Filter Report

If the Generate Filter Report option is turned on in Getting Attention options panel found in Options under the Tools menu. So when filters are used, Eudora generates a filter report. This report can be viewed in the Filter Report window found under the Tools menu.

If filter report generation is enabled via the option mentioned above, then each time a filter operation is performed, Eudora adds the entry or entries to the Filter Report window and activates the window.

The Filter Report window displays three columns of data:

•	Mailbox — Lists the names of the mailboxes into which messages have been filtered during the current Eudora session. Each listing represents one filter operation for that mailbox.

•	Messages — For each mailbox listed in the Mailbox column, lists the number of messages filtered into that mailbox during the filter operation.

•	Time — For each mailbox listed in the Mailbox column, lists the time that the messages were filtered into that mailbox during the filter operation.

By default, the entries in the window are sorted by time. However, you can click the column headings and sort the display by mailbox names (Mailbox) or by the number of messages filtered (Messages).

Note:	Whenever new entries are added to the list, Eudora always appends them to the bottom of the list in order of arrival, ignoring the current sort order. Simply click a column heading to re-sort.

Select one or more entries in the list and double-click the selection, or press Enter, and Eudora opens the mailbox windows associated with those selections.

The Filter Report listing is a cumulative log of the filter actions for the current Eudora session. Eudora automatically clears the log when you quit the program.

Closing the Filter Report window does not erase the contents of the filter report, as it did in previous versions of Eudora. Only quitting Eudora erases this information.


File Browser

Use this window to browse the Windows desktop. You can use this window to find files to attach to new outgoing messages, for example.

The File Browser window performs some, but not all, of the functions of the standard Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0 Explorer programs.

The File Browser window contains three controls:

•	Drive Selector (top box) — A pop-up menu in this field contains a fixed set of high-level folders on your system, just like the corresponding control in Windows Explorer. The Drive Selector field determines what gets displayed in the Folder Browser (middle section). When you first launch Eudora, the Drive Selector automatically sets itself to the drive containing your Windows folder. Note that the first entry in the pop-up menu is a shortcut called “My Attachments” that points to your Eudora attachments folder.

•	Folder Browser (middle section) — This is a tree control that displays the folder hierarchy whose root is the selection entered in the Drive Selector field. For example, if in the Drive Selector box you choose the C: drive, then the Folder Browser displays the folder tree-hierarchy branching down from the C: drive folder. Right-click a folder item in the Folder Browser to display the standard Windows context menu for that folder.

•	File List (bottom section) — This is a list control that displays the files contained in the folder selected in the Folder Browser. You can select one or more file items in the list, then right-click the selection to display the standard Windows context menu for those files. (Note: Eudora does not fill in the Send To submenu on the context menu.) When selecting multiple items, use the Shift key to select a range of items, and use the Ctrl key for disjoint selections.

The File List control shows these four columns:

•	Name — Displays the name of the file and the icon associated with the file.

•	Type — Based on the file name extension, displays the file type as set in the Options dialog box of Windows Explorer.

•	Size — Displays the size of the file in kilobytes (K), where 1K = 1,024 bytes.

•	Modified — Displays the date and time that the file was last modified.

As in Windows Explorer, you can click any of the four column headings to sort the listing by the data in that column.

You can also resize the widths of the columns by dragging the separator line between the column heading labels. Position the pointer over the separator until you see a splitter cursor, then drag the line to left or right.

In the File List control, double-click an item in the Name column, or select one or more items in the column and press Enter, to open the selected items. For program files, this action launches the program. For document files, this action generally launches the registered viewing or editing application for that document. Eudora displays an error dialog box if it is unable to open a file in this way.

To adjust the relative heights of the Folder Browser and File List controls, position the pointer over the separator bar between the Folder Browser and File List controls until the splitter cursor appears, then click and drag the separator up or down. Note that the File Browser window maintains a minimum height for the Folder Browser and File List controls, so you cannot close them all the way.

To manually refresh the File Browser window display, right-click anywhere in the File Browser window but not on a Folder Browser item or File List item, then choose Refresh from the context menu. (Tip: A good place to right-click is in the Drive Selector box.) Alternately, press the F5 key while keyboard focus is in the File Browser window.

You can select one or more files in the File List control and drag them to a message composition window to attach those files to that outgoing message. This is especially handy if you keep the File Browser window docked and open. (For multiple file selections, use the Shift key to select a range, and use the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.)

You can also select one or more items in the File List control and drag them to another application that can receive such files.

In general, the File Browser window lets you drag items out of the window (copying them rather than moving them), but the window is not a proper drop target; you cannot drop items into the window that you’ve dragged from elsewhere on your desktop. In particular, you cannot move files by dragging them to a target folder in the Folder Browser control. You also cannot drag and drop items within the File Browser window (from one control to another, for example). You can, however, manage the files and folders in the window using the commands on the window’s context menu, such as Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete.


Personalities

Use this window to manage, access, and apply your email accounts —  “multiple personalities” — when you use more than one account.

The Personalities window displays two columns of data:

•	Persona — The identifying name assigned to the personality. <Dominant> indicates your principal email account, which is the account Eudora uses whenever you don’t specify otherwise, and is the account associated with all mail stored before you began using alternate personalities.

•	Account — The incoming mail account assigned to the personality. This is generally in the form loginname@incomingmailserver.

To resize the column widths, position the pointer over the divider line between the column headings, until a splitter cursor appears. Then just drag the divider to left or right. Note that it is possible to completely collapse the Persona column.

Note:	You cannot manually sort the information in the Personalities window. Clicking on a column heading does not do a sort

Note:	You can select multiple items in the Persona column to perform some of the operations listed below. Use the Shift key to select a range of items, and use the Ctrl key to make disjoint selections.

If you select one or more personalities in the Persona column and right-click the selection, a context menu appears with the following commands (the standard Eudora window-management commands appear at the bottom):

•	Check Mail — Check mail now for all selected personalities.

•	Send Queued Messages — Send messages queued by all selected personalities now.

•	Message — This submenu lets you perform message-creation functions using only one selected personality. The submenu is unavailable if multiple personalities are selected in the Persona column.

-	New Message As — Create a new message as the selected personality. As a shortcut for this command, double-click a personality in the Persona column, or select the personality and press Enter.

-	Reply As — Reply as the selected personality to the sender(s) of the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Reply to All As — Reply as the selected personality to the sender(s) and all recipients of the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Forward As — Forward as the selected personality the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Redirect As — Redirect as the selected personality the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Send Again As — Resend as the selected personality the one or more received or composition messages that are currently selected.

•	New — Create a new personality. When you select this command, Eudora walks you through the New Account Wizard. Enter a Personality Name (e.g., My Laptop Account) and click Next. You then have the choice to create a new email account or import the settings from an existing email account — that is, “clone” an existing personality. If you choose a new email account, Eudora prompts you for your name, your return email address, your login name, and your incoming email server (POP or IMAP). Fill in each item as instructed. If you choose to import the settings from an existing email account (clone a personality), Eudora asks you to choose the account to clone, then asks you to confirm the settings and optionally change them. If you leave them unchanged, the cloned account is created when you click Finish. If you choose to change them, Eudora walks you through the settings as above: name, return address, login name, and incoming email server. Change these settings as desired, and when you are complete, the new account is created.

•	Modify — Modify the selected personality. You can only modify one personality at a time. When you select this command, the Account Settings dialog displays, with its fields filled in with the information associated with that personality. See the description of this dialog box below.

•	Delete — Delete all selected personalities. Note, however, that you cannot delete the <Dominant> personality. You are prompted to confirm the deletion for each personality you have selected to delete. Note that these deletions are permanent and cannot be undone! When you delete a personality, any messages associated with that personality are reassigned to your Dominant personality. You can use the Del key (Delete) as a shortcut for this command (you will still get the confirmation requests).

You can also display the context menu and create a new personality by right-clicking in a blank area of the Personalities window, off all personality items, when none of the items are selected. When creating a new personality this way, you are walked through the New Account Wizard as in the description of the New command above.

If you drag one or more received messages to a personality item in the Personalities window, Eudora will Reply As that personality to the messages (hold down the Ctrl key to Reply to All As).


Query

Enter the name of the person you are searching for.

If one or more of your selected databases use a protocol other than Ph, your entry in this field will always be interpreted as a name. If you only have Ph servers selected as your databases, you can enter any commands that Ph will interpret.


Start

After you’ve typed the text, start the query by pressing Enter or clicking the Start button. The query begins, and the Start button changes to Stop. To stop the query before it is completed, click the Stop button.

When the query is completed, or if you click Stop to cancel the query, the Stop button changes back to Start.


Status

This field displays the status of your query (such as Ready, Connecting, Getting Data, etc.) and the number of items found in your summary list. This number is updated dynamically until the query is complete or you stop it.


To

Click the To button to create a new message with the To header field appropriately addressed with the selected query results.


Cc

Click the Cc button to create a new message with the Cc header field appropriately addressed with the selected query results.


Bcc

Click the Bcc button to create a new message with the Bcc header field appropriately addressed with the selected query results.


Keep on top

When the Directory Services window is in the normal state (either alone or as part of a tabbed window group), check the Keep on top button to keep the Directory Services window on top of the other opened windows.


Results List

Your query results are listed in the left half of the Directory Services window, in the results list (top view) and the details pane (bottom view). You can resize the two views relative to each other using the separator between them; drag the separator up or down.

The results list consists of one-line summaries of the successful targets of your query. These are listed by four columns: Name, Email, Phone, and Database. Name indicates the username (or other name) of the target. Email is the email address of the target. Phone is the target’s telephone number. Database tells you in which of your selected databases the target was found.


Details List

Your query results are listed in the left half of the Directory Services window, in the results list (top view) and the details pane (bottom view). You can resize the two views relative to each other using the separator between them; drag the separator up or down.

To view the details of a result in the details pane, select the result in the results list by clicking once on it. The full data appears in the details pane. If nothing is selected in the results list, the details pane is blank. If multiple summaries are selected in the results list, the details pane lists the details for each item, with each item separated by a divider line.


Protocols

The Protocols section of the Directory Services window lists the directory service protocols available to you that you can use when creating and modifying databases for looking up individuals via these services.

Eudora comes with four protocols installed by default:
Ph, Finger, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), and Eudora Address Book.

Note:	The Eudora Address Book protocol does not appear in the list until you have created an Address Book in Eudora.

To sort the protocols alphabetically, click the column heading (Registered Drivers). Shift-click the column heading to sort in reverse order.


Databases

The Databases section of the Directory Services window lists the databases that are available to you for searching for individuals over the Internet, within your company, or in your Address Book (if one is set up).

Eudora comes with these servers already configured by default:

•	ldap.bigfoot.com

•	ldap.switchboard.com

•	ldap.whowhere.com

•	ldap.infospace.com

•	ldapbiz.infospace.com

•	ldap.four11.com

•	Eudora Nicknames [or the name of your nicknames file; this last item appears only if you have a Eudora Address Book set up]

You can modify or delete these databases, and you can also create new databases and modify and delete them.

You use the databases in this list to perform your lookup queries. To perform a query, you must first select one or more databases in the list. To select a database, click the checkbox to the left of the database name, until a checkmark appears in the box. If no databases are selected, you cannot perform a query.

You can select multiple databases to perform a query, and you can mix protocols.

Click a column heading to sort this list by that column, alphabetically. Shift-click the column heading to sort in reverse order.


TOC/Preview Pane

The top half of this window is the TOC (Table of Contents), and the bottom half is the Preview Pane. When you check for mail, messages are delivered to your mailboxes with the In mailbox opened in the TOC (If you have no filters set up, all new messages are delivered to your In mailbox).The messages are listed in the order they are received, with the most recent message listed last. Unread messages are designated by a bullet in the Status column of the message summary.

Double-click anywhere on a message summary to open the message. You can also view messages using the message preview pane (see below for details) at the bottom of the mailbox window while the message summary is highlighted.

Incoming messages are saved indefinitely in the In mailbox (or the mailbox they are filtered into) until they are deleted or transferred to another mailbox.

Also, you can select a message in the TOC and transfer it to another mailbox or to the Trash.

Once you select another mailbox, its messages and summaries are displayed in the TOC.

The Preview Pane shows you the full or partial content of a message without opening the message. It is located to the bottom of the list of messages in a mailbox. You can adjust the size of the preview window by placing the cursor on the window frame. Once the cursor changes to a double arrow, you can resize the preview window.

To activate the preview pane, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Viewing Mail . The Viewing Mail options window appears.

3. 	Click the Show message preview pane box.

4. 	Click OK.

The preview pane shows the key headers and the message body of the currently selected message in the message summary list. If the full message body is not visible in the preview window, scroll bars are displayed, allowing you to view the rest of the message. Only one message can be previewed at a time.

Press Tab or F6 to move the keyboard focus from the message summary list to the preview window (and back again). Or simply click in the preview window to put the focus there.

Once keyboard focus is in the preview window, you can do any of the following, as you can in an open incoming message window:

•	Press Space to page down through the message.

•	Use the arrow keys, as set in the Miscellaneous options window (unmodified or with Ctrl or Alt), to switch to the next or previous message in the mailbox.

•	Use standard keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl+R for Reply, Ctrl+D for Delete, etc.

•	Right-click anywhere in the preview window to display a pop-up menu with commands appropriate for the previewed message.

•	Click an attachment icon or name to open the attachment.

•	Click a URL (hot link) to launch the application for that URL.

If the Show message preview pane option is turned on in the Viewing Mail options window , you can press F7 to show and hide the preview window within the current mailbox only (this does not control the visibility of the preview window in other mailboxes).

If the Show message preview pane option is off in the Viewing Mail options window , only the message summaries are shown in any mailbox window.

If the preview window option is on and the Mark previewed messages as read after _ second(s) option is turned on in the Viewing Mail options window, then the currently previewed message is marked as read (blank in the Status column) after the specified number of seconds. You can always change the message’s status back to Unread (•) by pressing Shift+Space while the message is selected or open (press again to change back to Read). If the Mark previewed option is off, previewed messages are never automatically marked as read.

Note:	Eudora only performs the auto-marking behavior when you manually switch messages, not when it performs actions such as automatic mail checks or filtering.


Technical Support

Displays technical support information for this version of Eudora.


Tip of the Day

Displays the Tip of the Day. The Tip of the Day displays information about Eudora’s functionality.


Task Error Window

The Task Error window displays an error message as it occurs. For example, a password error appears. You can indicate if you want the Task Error window brought to the front when an error occurs. See Background Tasks.

To access and display the Task Status window, do the following.

1. From the Tools menu, choose Task Errors. Or, if the Task Error window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab. The Task Error window appears.

Notice the yellow task error icon on the Eudora tool/status bar at the lower- right of the main Eudora window. Click this icon to display the Task Error message.

2. Click Details to expand the message.

Following are field descriptions for the Task Error details window.

Persona—The personality name associated with this error appears.

Title—The name of the Eudora function when this error occurred.

Status—The name of the system function when this error occurred.

Info—More information on this error appears, if any.

Time—The time and day of this error appears.


Task Status Window

The Task Status window displays background activity: retrieving mail from incoming servers, and sending mail to outgoing servers. Mail can be retrieved and sent from each of your personalities simultaneously. Progress information is described in Background Tasks.

To access and display the Task Status window, do the following.

1. From the Tools menu, choose Task Status. Or, if the Task Status window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab. The Task Status window appears. Notice the progress indicators on the status bar located at the right-hand bottom of the Eudora window. A progress bar and spinning black and white ball indicate that background tasks are occurring.

2. On the progress bar or spinning indicator, click to display the Task Status window. Right-click to display the indicator’s drop-down menu.

3. Choose Stop All Tasks to cancel the tasks currently occurring.

4. Choose Go offline to disconnect from the server. An alert window appears letting you know that you are offline and cannot connect to the server. This is useful if you are using a laptop computer.

Note: 	Offline does not apply to personalities that use IMAP incoming servers.

Choose Show Task Status to display the Task Status window.

You can see if your sent messages are sent, queued, or processing in your Out mailbox.

Following are field descriptions for columns in the Task Status window.

Task—(default) An icon and its description displays in this column indicating what function Eudora is performing.

Persona—This column is available only if have set up more than one personality. If checked, the Personality column displays the personality name for the given task.

Status—(default) Displays a general description of the tasks current status, for example, “Logging into POP server.”

Details—Displays more information of the tasks’ status including network protocol commands.

Progress—(default) Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks.

Details—Displays more information of the tasks’ status including network protocol commands.

Progress—(default) Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks.


Forget Password (personalities)

If you have more than one personality, this dialog box displays listing the names of your personalities. You can select the personalities whose passwords you want Eudora to forget. All the personalities are selected by default. Deselect the personalities you don’t want Eudora to forget.


Search category drop-down list

Anywhere—Choose this option to search everywhere in the message including all header fields and message body. This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on.

Headers—Choose this option to search only in the header fields of the message. This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on.

Body—Choose this option to search only in the body of the message.

Attachment Name(s)—Choose this option to search only attachment names in the message.

Summary—Choose this option to search text entered in only the header From: and Subject: fields of the message.

Status—Choose this option to search for messages by status. A status drop-down options list displays (the default is Unread). You can choose from Unread, Read, Replied, Forwarded, or Redirected. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Priority—Choose this option to search for messages by priority. A priority drop-down options list displays (the default is Highest). You can choose from Highest, High, Normal, Low, or Lowest. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Attachment Count—Choose this option to search the number of attachments joined to each message. A counter appears for you to select the desired number, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Label—Choose this option to search for messages by label. Choose Label, and the labels drop-down options list displays (the default is None). You can choose from the labels you previously set up. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Date—Choose this option to search for messages by date. Once selected, today’s date appears. Click the down arrow to display the current month’s calendar. Using the arrows on the calendar, you can display the preceding or proceeding months and years. Choose the date to or from where you want the search to begin.

Size—Choose this option to search for messages by their file size (in kilobytes). A counter appears for you to select the desired number of kilobytes, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field displays is.

Age—Choose this option to search for messages by age (in days). A counter appears for you to select the desired number of days, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field displays  is.

Personality—Choose this option to search for messages by account. A drop-down list displaying your previously set up personalities appears. Select the desired personality.

Mailbox Name—Choose this option to search for messages in a specific mailbox. Enter the name of the mailbox in the text box.

To—Choose this option to search text entered in only the To: header field of the message.

From—Choose this option to search text entered in only the From: header field of the message.

Subject—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Subject: header field of the message.

CC—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Cc: header field of the message.

BCC—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Bcc: header field of the message.

Any recipient—Choose this option to search text entered in only the To:, Cc:, and Bcc: header fields of the message.


Search Messages

You can now perform complex searches through messages in all or a selected number of mailboxes or folders. Once your search is complete, you can preview, sort, delete, and view the resulting messages. You can search for a specific piece of information in all your mail or just search for a particular item that matches the criteria you set. Set up the criteria for your search by selecting options from the drop-down lists and by entering text.

To set up criteria for a message search, do the following:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Find or press [Ctrl] + F. The Find submenu appears.

2.	From the Find submenu, choose Find Messages. The Find Messages dialog box appears.

In the Find Messages dialog box, your mailboxes display along with checkboxes. If the boxes are checked, Eudora will perform a search in these mailboxes according to the criteria you are about to set up. To omit a mailbox from the search, just deselect the box.

Note. If you see a gray check in the checkbox for a specific mailbox or folder, this indicates that the mailbox’s sub-folders and sub-mailboxes are not checked.

The top part of the dialog box is where you select and enter criteria for your search. Each search can use up to five “terms” and “conjunctions” as its criteria, connecting them as appropriate. The drop-down and conjunction lists displaying the criteria you can select.

3.	In the drop-down criteria list (Anywhere is the default), choose where in the message you want Eudora to search for text. Following is a description of each option.

Anywhere—Choose this option to search everywhere in the message including all header fields and message body. This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on.

Headers—Choose this option to search only in the header fields of the message. This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on.

Body—Choose this option to search only in the body of the message.

Attachment Name(s)—Choose this option to search only attachment names in the message.

Summary—Choose this option to search text entered in only the header From: and Subject: fields of the message.

Status—Choose this option to search for messages by status. A status drop-down options list displays (the default is Unread). You can choose from Unread, Read, Replied, Forwarded, or Redirected. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Priority—Choose this option to search for messages by priority. A priority drop-down options list displays (the default is Highest). You can choose from Highest, High, Normal, Low, or Lowest. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Attachment Count—Choose this option to search the number of attachments joined to each message. A counter appears for you to select the desired number, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Label—Choose this option to search for messages by label. Choose Label, and the labels drop-down options list displays (the default is None). You can choose from the labels you previously set up. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Date—Choose this option to search for messages by date. Once selected, today’s date appears. Click the down arrow to display the current month’s calendar. Using the arrows on the calendar, you can display the preceding or proceeding months and years. Choose the date to or from where you want the search to begin.

Size—Choose this option to search for messages by their file size (in kilobytes). A counter appears for you to select the desired number of kilobytes, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field displays is.

Age—Choose this option to search for messages by age (in days). A counter appears for you to select the desired number of days, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field displays is.

Personality—Choose this option to search for messages by account. A drop-down list displaying your previously set up personalities appears. Select the desired personality.

Mailbox Name—Choose this option to search for messages in a specific mailbox. Enter the name of the mailbox in the text box.

To—Choose this option to search text entered in only the To: header field of the message.

From—Choose this option to search text entered in only the From: header field of the message.

Subject—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Subject: header field of the message.

CC—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Cc: header field of the message.

BCC—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Bcc: header field of the message.

Any recipient—Choose this option to search text entered in only the To:, Cc:, and Bcc: header fields of the message.

4.	After you select the option from the drop-down list, select a conjunction to link the first option with the text you will be searching for.

Following is a description of each conjunction option in the drop-drop list.

contains—If the specific item contains the text string, search and display those messages.

contains word—If the specific item contains the exact word, search and display those messages.

does not contain—If the specific item does not contain the text string, search and display those messages.

is—If the specific item is an exact match, search and display those messages.

is not—If the specific item is not an exact match, search and display those messages.

starts with—If the specific item starts with the text string, search and display those messages.

ends with—If the specific item ends with the text string, search and display those messages.

matches regexp—If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters, search and display those messages. Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters. For example, if you are searching for messages sent to you by two people, choose From in the first drop-down options list, then choose matches regexp, then type their usernames between brackets separated by a vertical slash, e.g., (bobclark)|(janedoe) in the text box. Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people.

For more information, see Regular Expressions.

Note. Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text. There are several web sites where you can get information on Regular Expressions.

is after/is before (Date only)—If the date is after or before the date displayed, search and display those messages.

is greater than/is less than (Age, Size, Priority, Attachment Count only)—If the specific item is greater than or less than the number indicated, search and display those messages.

5.	Once you have chosen the conjunction, enter the text string in messages you are searching for, or choose a value from the drop down list if one displays. In the text box, you can enter as much text as you want.

If you click Search, Eudora will search through all of your mailboxes for every message that contain the text you specified anywhere in the header portion of the message.

6.	To continue adding a second level of criteria (you can add up to five levels), click More. Choose and enter more criteria to further streamline the search. You can also select Match All or Match Any to include or differentiate the criteria from one level to the other.

If you click Search, Eudora will search for every message through every mailbox that contains the word you specified anywhere but only if the text you specified is somewhere in the header.

To continue adding a third level or criteria, click More. Choose and enter more criteria to further reduce the search. Click Search to display the messages that contain the criteria you entered.  You can now search further from the results of the search by clicking on More to continue entering more criteria.

The messages that fulfill the search criteria appear in the Results window.

The Search feature will not work if you have any text boxes blank. You can click Fewer to reach a level where all text boxes are filled to conduct your search.

To sort the messages, click the column headings to sort by that column. To sort in descending order, click the column header again.

To open a message, select and double-click the message, or right-click to display the context menu. Choose Open Message.

To open the mailbox where this message resides, highlight the message, right-click to display the context menu. Choose Open Mailbox.

To delete a message, highlight the message and press the Delete key, or right-click to display the context menu. Choose Delete Message.


Conjunction drop-down list (Search messages)

contains—If the specific item contains the text string, search and display those messages.

contains word—If the specific item contains the exact word, search and display those messages.

does not contain—If the specific item does not contain the text string, search and display those messages.

is—If the specific item is an exact match, search and display those messages.

is not—If the specific item is not an exact match, search and display those messages.

starts with—If the specific item starts with the text string, search and display those messages.

ends with—If the specific item ends with the text string, search and display those messages.

matches regexp—If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters, search and display those messages. Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters. For example, if you are searching for messages sent to you by two people, choose From in the first drop-down options list, then choose matches regexp, then type their usernames between brackets separated by a vertical slash, e.g., (bobclark)|(janedoe) in the text box. Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people. Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text.

For more information, click http://sansecus.usc.es/unixpages/concepts_regexp.htm.

Or see Regular Expressions.

is after/is before (Date only)—If the date is after or before the date displayed, search and display those messages.

is greater than/is less than (Age, Size, Priority, Attachment Count only)—If the specific item is greater than or less than the number indicated, search and display those messages.


Text (Search messages)

 Enter the text (word or string of words) you want; that is, according to the criteria and conjunction you specified in the drop-down lists. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this word or words, as set up in the criteria and conjunction fields, will appear in the Results window.


is after/is before (Search messages)

Choose is after/is before (Date only) if the date is after or before the date displayed; then search and display those messages.


is/is not/is great than/is less than (Search messages)

Choose is/is not/is greater than/is less than (Age, Size, Priority, Attachment Count only) if the specific item is greater than or less than the number indicated; then search and display those messages.


is or is not (Search messages)

Choose is if the specific item is an exact match; then search and display those messages.

Choose is not if the specific item is not an exact match; then search and display those messages.


Number (Search messages)

Enter the number you want; that is, according to the criteria and conjunction you specified in the drop-down lists. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this number, as set up in the criteria and conjunction fields, will appear in the Results window.


Select number (Search messages)

Enter the number you want or choose a number by clicking on the up or down arrows; that is, according to the criteria and conjunction you specified in the drop-down lists. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this number, as set up in the criteria and conjunction fields, will appear in the Results window


Size or Age (Search messages)

If you selected Size in the criteria drop-down list, enter the number of kilobytes or click the up or down arrow counting to the kilobyte number you want to base the search on. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this number, as set up in the criteria and conjunction fields, will appear in the Results window.

If you selected Age in the criteria drop-down list, enter the number of days or click the up or down arrow counting the number of aging days you want to base the search on. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this number, as set up in the criteria and conjunction fields, will appear in the Results window.


Personality (Search messages)

If you selected Personality in the criteria drop-down list and chose the conjunction, click the down arrow to display your personalities. Select the personality that you want to base the search on. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this personality, as set up in the conjunction field, will appear in the Results window.


Status (Search messages)

If you selected Status in the criteria drop-down list and chose the conjunction, click the down arrow to display your choices. Choose the message status that you want to base the search on. They are unread, read, replied, forwarded and redirected. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this status, as set up in the conjunction field, will appear in the Results window.


Label (Search messages)

If you selected Label in the criteria drop-down list and chose the conjunction, click the down arrow to display your label choices. Choose the message label that you want to base the search on. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this label, as set up in the conjunction field, will appear in the Results window.


Priority (Search message)

If you selected Priority in the criteria drop-down list and chose the conjunction, click the down arrow to display your choices. Choose the message status that you want to base the search on. They are Highest, High, Normal, Low, and Lowest. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this priority, as set up in the conjunction field, will appear in the Results window.


Date (Search message)

If you selected Date in the criteria drop-down list and chose the conjunction, click the down arrow to display your choices. When you click the down arrow, the current month’s calendar appears. You can move around the calendar by clicking the arrows on the top of the calendar. Double arrow buttons indicate years, and single arrow buttons indicate months. Left arrows moves the calendar to the past, and the right arrows moves the calendar to the future. Choose the date that you want the search to be based on. If you click the Search button, all messages that pertain to this date, as set up in the conjunction field, will appear in the Results window.


Search button (Search message)

Click the Search button to begin your search. You can click the Search button during any level of the search.


More button (Search message)

Click the More button to display the next level of search criteria. You can display as many as five levels of search criteria.


Fewer button (Search message)

Click the Fewer button to display the previous level of search criteria.


Match All button (Search message)

Click the Match All button to include all the criteria from one level to the next. It’s like saying “and” between levels.


Match Any (Search message)

Click the Match Any button to differentiate criteria from one level to the next. It’s like saying “or” between levels.


Results Information

This displays the number of matches found in the number of mailboxes checked.


Results window

The Results window displays the summaries of messages that contain the criteria you set up in your search. Each message summary displays the mailbox where the message resides, who sent the message, when it was sent, and what it was about. You can click on any result message to open it.

Also, you can perform a search on the resulting messages that appear by entering another level of criteria and by clicking the Search button.


Mailbox window (Search message)

The Mailbox window displays all of your mailboxes and folders. Check the mailboxes and folders to include in your search. Uncheck the mailboxes and folders you don’t want included in the search.

The search mailbox window looks and behaves like your Eudora mailbox window.


Configuring Eudora

To configure Eudora, do the following:

1.	Install Eudora and restart your computer.

2.	Double-click the Eudora icon to open it. If you are installing Eudora for the first time, the New Account Wizard opens, showing the welcome screen.

3.	Click Next to begin setting up your new email account.

4.	Select an appropriate method of setting up your account:

a.	Create a brand new email account (go to step 7).  Select this method to set up a new account if you are not familiar with Eudora or other email programs. You are prompted to enter one piece of information per window.

b.	Import settings from an existing email account (go to step 5). Select this method if you want to import your settings, mail, and address book from Outlook Express™ 5.0, Outlook 98™, or Netscape Messenger™ into Eudora.

If you need more information on migrating settings from another email program to Eudora, see Importing Settings to Create a New Account. Note that this process may take some time depending on the amount of mail, the complexity of your settings, and the size of your address book.

c.	Instruct Eudora to get your settings from an ACAP server (go to step 6). Select this method to instruct Eudora to attempt to get your settings from an ACAP server. To get your settings from an ACAP server, make sure that you are connected to the Internet. Your email administrator or Internet Service Provider (ISP) can tell you whether an ACAP based setup is available to you.

d.	Create a new account using the advanced account setup. Select this method if you are familiar with Eudora or other email programs. An Account Settings window appears with two tabbed panels. Enter all of your Eudora information on these panels. Go to Account Settings Dialog.

5. 	If you choose to import settings from an existing email account, and select the account and click Next. Eudora asks you to confirm the settings and optionally change them. If you choose No and click Next, your account is set up when you click Finish in the final window. If you choose Yes and click Next, the New Account wizard walks you through the fields to be changed as described further below. When you click Finish in the final window, your new account is set up.

6. 	If you choose the ACAP option and click Next, the Auto Configure window appears. Click Next again to instruct Eudora to get your account settings from the ACAP server. If the attempt fails, click Back and try one of the other options.

7. 	If in the Account Setup window you choose to create a brand new email account and click Next, the New Account Wizard begins guiding you through the fields for which you need to enter setup information.

8. 	In the windows of the New Account wizard, enter the following field information (click Next after filling out each window):

•	Your Name — Enter your name as you would like it to appear in the From field of all of your outgoing messages from this email account, to indicate to your recipients whom the mail is from.

•	Return Address — Enter the email address that has been assigned to you by your Internet Service Provider or your email administrator. This is the address that other people will use to send you email. Return addresses are generally in the form loginname@domainname, for example, beatrixp@myfirm.com.

•	Login Name — Enter the name that you will use to log in to this email account, if required. This name is provided by your Internet Service Provider or your email administrator, and it usually consists of the text that appears before the at sign (@) in your return email address. In the example jcamp@myfirm.com, the login name is jcamp.

•	Incoming E-mail Server — All of your incoming email messages are delivered to your incoming email account, which resides on a computer that runs your incoming email server. When your messages arrive at your mail account, Eudora picks them up and transfers them to your computer. Your incoming email server must use one of the two Internet mail communications protocols IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) or POP (Post Office Protocol). If you are not sure which protocol it uses, select POP; you can always change this later. In the edit box, type the full name of the computer that runs your incoming email server; jcamp.myfirm.com is an example.

•	If you chose IMAP in the previous setup window, an IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix may be required to indicate the location of your personal mailboxes on the IMAP server. If so, enter the name of that location prefix as given to you by your Internet Service Provider or email administrator. If the information is not required, leave the field blank. Click Next, then in the last window, click Finish. Your new IMAP email account is set up.

If you chose POP in the previous setup window, click Finish in the final window and your new POP email account is set up.

When you have finished setting up your account via the New Account wizard, you are now ready to receive messages. However, you may need to take an additional step in order to send messages.

To send messages in Eudora, you must have access to a computer running an SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) server. Your outgoing messages are sent to the SMTP server, which delivers them to your recipients.

If the computer that runs your POP or IMAP server (incoming email account) also runs an SMTP server, then no additional setup action is required. You are now ready to send and receive messages in Eudora.

If, however, your SMTP server runs on a different computer from the one running your POP or IMAP server, take the following final setup action (you may want to consult your Internet Service Provider or email administrator to help you set up the SMTP server).

To set up your SMTP server, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	 Scroll through the Category icons, and choose Sending Mail.

3.	In the SMTP server field, enter the full name of the computer that runs your SMTP (outgoing) server, for example: smtp.myfirm.com.

4.	To save your settings and close the Options dialog box, click OK. You are now ready to send and receive mail in Eudora.

If you ever wish to change the settings of your email account, you can do so from the Options dialog box.

You can also change these settings in the Account Settings dialog, which is accessed from the Personalities window. This window also lets you create alternate email accounts and edit the settings in those accounts. For more details, see the sections Using an Alternate E-mail Account , Personalities Window , and Account Settings Dialog.


Tip of the Day

Each time you open Eudora (including the first time after install), the Eudora Tip of the Day appears. You can display next and previous tips by clicking the Next Tip and Previous Tip buttons. To prevent the Tip of the Day dialog box from being displayed on startup, uncheck the checkbox. You can always display the Tip of the Day from the Help menu.

Click the Close button to close the Tip of the Day dialog box.


Online Help

There are several ways to get online help with Eudora:

•	To find out what something in the user interface does, use either Context Sensitive Help from the Help menu, or the Help button on the main toolbar and click the item in question. A brief description of the item appears. Click anywhere to close the description window.

•	The F1 key also displays context sensitive Help or contains information about an open window. Select the user interface item you want to know about, or use the Tab and arrow keys to move keyboard focus to that item, then press F1. Keyboard focus is indicated by a dashed highlight box, a highlighted entry or item, or a flashing insertion cursor.

If in a tabbed window, move the mouse arrow to a field and press F1. The entire procedure for the window appears.

•	For instructions on how to do certain tasks, select Topics from the Help menu. The Help Contents (Contents, Index, and Find) are displayed, and you either browse the contents or use the Find and Index options.

•	The Eudora Tip of the Day can be selected from the Help menu. It provides snapshot information about an assortment of Eudora features. See Tip of the Day .


Technical Support

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

If you register your copy of Eudora in Sponsored or Paid mode, you are entitled to 90 days of free technical support from the date of the first call. Be sure to register as soon as possible to avoid any delays in receiving technical support.

Many common issues can be solved by visiting the Eudora technical support web site, www.eudora.com/techsupport/win. The technical support web site provides online answers to your technical questions about QUALCOMM’s Eudora software products. Go to the technical support web site to get valuable “how to” information, step-by-step interactive tutorials, and information for Eudora products and documentation.

If you are unable to find your answer using the technical support web site, Eudora tech support reps are available Monday - Friday from 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Pacific Time, using the following phone number and email address:

Phone: (858) 658-1292

Email: eudora-support@eudora.com


Starting and Quitting Eudora

To start Eudora, do the following:

•	On the desktop, double-click the Eudora icon or choose Eudora Email from the Start menu under Programs.

    Eudora opens.

To quit Eudora, do the following:

•	 From the File menu, choose Exit, or press [Ctrl]+Q. Eudora closes.

If you have queued or timed messages due to be sent in the next 12 hours, you are given the option to send them. See the sections Queueing a Message to Send Later and Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time.

The Trash mailbox is emptied if the Empty Trash when exiting option is on in the Miscellaneous options. The Miscellaneous options are found under the Tools menu, then Options.


Uninstalling Eudora

You can uninstall Eudora by using the tools provided with your Windows 95/98 or Windows NT 4.0 (or later) operating system. To uninstall Eudora, do the following:

1. From the Start menu, choose Settings, then Control Panel. Open the Control Panel, double-click Add/Remove Programs, select Eudora Email, and click Remove. Eudora will uninstall.


Creating an Outgoing Message
Create an Outgoing Message

An outgoing message is a message you send to someone else. The simplest way to create an outgoing message is to do the following:

1. From the Message menu, choose New Message. A new message window appears, the composition window.


Using the Composition Window
Use the Composition Window

The composition window consists of the title bar, the Toolbar, the message header, and the message body.

Title Bar

The title bar provides information about the message, including the name of the addressee, the time and date the message was sent, and the message subject.

Toolbar

The toolbar consists of a series of buttons and drop-downs that are displayed just under the title bar. It allows you to control the priority of your message, override some of your default options for the current message, send or queue the message, and apply text styles. Each button can be turned on or off for the current message by clicking it (a button is on when it is depressed, and off when it is raised). You can set some of the defaults for the toolbar in the Sending Mail Options Window.

The drop-down menus and buttons on the top row are described below.

Priority Popup — This lets you indicate that your message is of higher or lower priority than a normal message. For most messages, this is just an empty box (normal priority). For details, see Setting the Message Priority .

Signature Popup — This lets you automatically append one of your signatures to the end of a message. For details, see Using a Signature .

Attachment Type Popup — This lets you select the encoding format for attachments. For details, see Attaching a File to a Message .

Quoted-Printable Encoding — If this is on, quoted-printable encoding is used when sending messages that contain special characters or long lines of text. It is used for all plain-text attachments. We recommend that you always keep this on.

Text As Attachment — If this is on, plain text files are attached to messages, not incorporated into the message as part of the message body.

Word Wrap — If this is on, a carriage return is not required at the end of each line. When the message is sent, the text is automatically “wrapped,” meaning that carriage returns are inserted at the end of each line of text, with roughly 76 characters per line.

Tabs in Body — If this button is on, pressing the Tab key within the message body inserts a tab. If this button is off, pressing the Tab key within the message body returns the cursor to the To field of the message header.

Keep Copy — If this is on, a copy of each sent message is kept in the Out mailbox. These messages are saved there until they are deleted or transferred.

Return Receipt — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) If this is on, the message to your recipients includes a Notify Sender button that when clicked creates a message notifying you that the original message has been viewed. This function does not work in all cases. For details, see Requesting a Return Receipt .

Show Text Symbols — If this is on, invisible text symbols, such as carriage returns, tabs, and spaces appear in the message, You can see these symbols only in your composition window. They do not appear in the message you send.

Send or Queue — These choices let you send a message immediately or put it in the queue to send later. If the Immediate Send option in the Sending Mail Options Window is on, the button is labeled Send. If the option is off, the button is labeled Queue. For details, see Sending a Message Immediately or Queueing a Message to Send Later.

Following are descriptions of the drop-down menus and buttons on the bottom row. Note that this bottom row of the toolbar, which controls text styles and other attributes, also appears in text file and signature windows.

Font Popup — Apply the highlighted text the selected font (typeface).

Size — Apply the highlighted text the selected size.

Bold — Apply bold to the highlighted text.

Italics — Italicize the highlighted text.

Underline — Underline the highlighted text.

Color — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Apply color to the highlighted text. Note that “Automatic” is the color you have set up for text on your computer (usually black).

Typewriter — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Make the selected text the fixed-width width (typewriter-style) message font set in the Fonts options window .

Align Left — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Align the selected paragraph to the left of the indent.

Align Center — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Align the selected paragraph to the center of the indent.

Align Right — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Align the selected paragraph to the right of the indent.

Indent In — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Indent the selected paragraph once to the left.

Indent Out — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Remove one left indent for the selected paragraph.

Bulleted List — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Make the selected text a bulleted list.

Make Hyperlink — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Make the selected text or graphic a clickable hyperlink to a URL, so that when the recipient clicks the item, he or she is immediately taken to the URL.

Clear Formatting — Removes all the formatting from the selected text or paragraph.

Insert Object — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Insert a specified picture file or a horizontal line at the current cursor position in body text. For details, see Inserting Objects in Message Text.

For more information on text styles, see Formatting Text.

Message Header—Outgoing mail headers consist of six fields: To, From, Subject, Cc, Bcc, and Attached. Each field is described below. The To, Subject, Cc, and Bcc fields can be directly edited. To move the cursor from field to field, press the Tab key or click in the desired field with the mouse.

To resize the Header region of the outgoing message window, drag the separator up or down. This applies to the current message only.

To: The intended recipients’ email addresses or nicknames you have defined (see Using the Address Book and Using the Quick Recipient List). Multiple addresses and nicknames must be separated by commas. If you have the Automatic Name Completion turned on (see Auto-Completion Options Window), a window appears with your address book and history files entries for you to select.

From: The sender’s email address. This is usually your incoming email account plus your real name. You can use a return address other than your incoming mail account by entering the address in the Return address field of the Getting Started Options Window. If you have more than one personality, click From to display your personality list and choose the personality you want to use.

The From field also reflects changes made with the Change Personality menu under the Message menu, if you have alternate personalities set up. See Using an Alternate E-mail Account .

Subject: Some brief text indicating the contents of the message. This field can be left blank although it is considered a point of email etiquette to include a Subject with each message.

Cc: The email addresses or nicknames of people to whom a copy of the message is to be sent. These recipients are displayed in the message header for all recipients to see. Multiple addresses must be separated by commas. This field can be left blank. Cc stands for “carbon copy.”  If you have the Automatic Name Completion turned on (see Auto-Completion Options Window), a window appears with your address book and history files entries for you to select.

Bcc: The email addresses or nicknames of people to whom a blind copy of the message is to be sent. These recipients are not displayed in the message header, and the recipients in the To or Cc fields will not know that a copy went to these addresses. Multiple addresses must be separated by commas. This field can be left blank. Bcc stands for “blind carbon copy.”  If you have the Automatic Name Completion turned on (see Auto-Completion Options Window), a window appears with your address book and history files entries for you to select.

This field also can be used to put a copy of the message in one or more of your mailboxes. To do this, right-click in the body of the message and select the mailbox from the Fcc menu (equivalent to the Transfer menu). The name of the mailbox is inserted into the Bcc field preceded by the expression “I\.” Repeat the procedure to Fcc to multiple mailboxes; Eudora automatically separates the entries with commas. When the message is sent, a copy is put in each specified mailbox. Fcc stands for “folder carbon copy.”

Attached: A list of documents being attached to and sent along with the message. See Attaching a File to a Message for instructions on how to add attachments. To delete an attachment from an outgoing message, select it and press the backspace or delete key. This field can be left blank.

Message Body — After filling in the header fields, move the insertion point to the space below the message header. Type the body of the message here. For information about formatting your message text, see Formatting Text.

You can insert pictures and horizontal lines into message text. For details, see Inserting Objects in Message Text.


Using an Alternate E-Mail Account

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

You can set up “multiple personalities” in Eudora for each email account you have. For example, if you have Work, Home, and School email accounts, you can set up Eudora to send and receive email from each of these accounts, all without having to quit and restart Eudora. That is, you can check mail either for all of your accounts, or for selected accounts at once, and you can do the same for sending mail.

You use the Personalities window and the Account Settings dialog to set up your personalities. Your “dominant” personality, or principal email account, is set up via the New Account Wizard when you install Eudora and can also be modified via the Account Settings dialog.

For detailed information on the Personalities window, its columns, the commands on its context menu, and the options in the Account Settings dialog, see Personalities Window. Below is the basic procedure for setting up alternate accounts, followed by additional information on using personalities to send and receive mail.

To create a new personality, or alternate email account, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Personalities or click the Personalities window’s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group. The Personalities window appears.

2.	Right-click anywhere inside the Personalities window and choose New from the context menu. The first window of the New Account Wizard displays.

3.	Follow the setup instructions in each window of the New Account Wizard to create the new personality. See Personalities Window for more information.

4.	When you have completed the new account setup, click Finish and the new personality is created.

During new account setup you specify the personality name and the following items associated with the account: the real name, the return email address, the login name, and the incoming email server (POP or IMAP).

To modify an existing personality, do the following:

1.	Open the Personalities window.

2.	Right-click the desired personality to display the context menu.

3.	Choose Properties and make your changes in the Account Settings dialog. For more information, see Account Settings Dialog.

No options can be changed for alternate personalities except those specified in the New Account wizard or the Account Settings dialog; they are effective for all. If you want to change other options for an alternate personality or use a separate set of mailboxes for an account, see the section “Putting Multiple Users on One PC” in the online Eudora User Manual for additional information.

To create an outgoing message from an alternate account, that is, as an alternate personality, do the following:

1.	Open a new message.

2.	In the From field, click the arrow to display your personalities. Choose the desired personality.

Or, in the personality window, select the desired personality and press Enter.

Or, simply double-click the desired personality. A new message opens from that personality.

When the composition window opens in response to any of the three message-creation methods above, the default signature for the selected personality is used. But if a stationery file was selected or a default stationery file specified in the account’s options, then the signature stored with the stationery file is used. However, you can always change the signature drop-down in the composition window (for details, see Using a Signature ).

After you open a new composition message from a particular personality, you can also change the message’s personality, that is, the sender, by selecting the new personality from the Change Personality submenu under the Message menu. The From field of the message header changes to the information associated with the new personality.

When you respond to a message, Eudora assigns your response the same personality under which it received the message. For example, if you receive a message sent to your Home account, your replies to that message are sent from your Home account.

Note:	You can also set up a filter to automatically assign a desired personality to incoming or outgoing messages that satisfy the filter criteria. See the Make Personality action in Filter Actions.


Using Stationery
Use Stationery

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Stationery files are templates for outgoing messages. If you find yourself repeatedly sending the same message, save the message as a stationery file and send it whenever you need to with the New Message With or Reply With commands. This way you don’t have to copy and paste text into a message; you can just open a prewritten message and edit it as necessary.

Stationery files are created and managed from the Stationery window. For more information, see Stationery Window. You can also open a new stationery message from the Stationery window.

For more information, see Creating a Stationery File and Sending a Stationery Message.


Creating a Stationery File
Create a Stationery File

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To create a new stationery file, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Stationery or click the Stationery window’s tab if it’s an inactive window in a tabbed group. The Stationery window appears.

Or click the Stationery window’s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group.

2.	Right-click anywhere inside the Stationery window and choose New from the context menu. Eudora opens a composition window to be used for stationery. The Send/Queue button is inactive in the window; thus the message cannot be sent or queued.

3.	Enter the text you want to see into the message body, fill in the headers as appropriate (subject, copies, and so forth), and make any desired setting in the toolbar.

4.	Choose Save As Stationery from the File menu to display the Save as Stationery dialog box.

5.	Enter a file name and click Save to save the stationery file. The file is saved to your Stationery folder.

6.	Close the stationery message.


Changing a Stationery File
Change a Stationery File

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To change a stationery file, do the following:

1. 	In the Stationery window , right-click the stationery item that you want to change.

2. 	Choose Edit from the context menu, then make your changes and save them with the Save As Stationery command from the File menu.


Deleting a Stationery File
Delete a Stationery File

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To delete a stationery file, do the following:

1. 	Select the desired item in the Stationery window and press the delete key; or right-click the stationery item and choose Delete from the context menu. In either case you are prompted to confirm the delete.


Sending a Stationery Message
Send a Stationery Message

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To send a stationery message, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, select a stationery file from the New Message With or Reply With submenus. A composition window appears containing the header and body from the stationery file. If you are replying to a message, the stationery information is added to the reply. You can edit and send this new message just as you would any other message.

2. 	Or you can send a new stationery message by double-clicking a stationery item in the Stationery window or by selecting the stationery item and pressing Enter. In either case, a new composition window opens containing the selected stationery.

To use a particular stationery file for all of your outgoing messages, do the following:

1. 	Open the Tools menu, choose Options, scroll and choose Sending Mail.

2. 	From the Stationery drop-down in the Sending Mail Options Window (for your dominant account only), select a stationery, or in the Account Settings dialog (for any of your personalities), select a stationery. Most new messages use this file, unless you create the message using the Redirect, Send Again, New Message With, or Reply With command.

You can also set up a filter to reply with a stationery message. See Filtering Messages for more information.


Creating a Message with Stationery
Create a Message with Stationery

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To send a stationery message, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, select the stationery you want from the New Message With or Reply With submenus. A Composition Window appears containing the toolbar, header, and body from the stationery file.

If you are replying to a message, the stationery is incorporated into the reply. You can edit and send this new message just as you would any other message.

The stationery message toolbar overrides any of the Sending Mail or Personality options such as the default signature, but you can change them after you open the message. See Filter Actions.


Using a Stationery File for all Outgoing Messages
Use a Stationery File for all Outgoing Messages

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To use a particular stationery file for all of your outgoing messages, do the following:

1. 	Open the Tools menu, choose Options, scroll and choose Sending Mail.

2. 	From the Stationery drop-down in the Sending Mail Options Window (for your dominant account only), select a stationery, or in the Account Settings dialog (for any of your personalities), select a stationery. Most new messages use this file, unless you create the message using the Redirect, Send Again, New Message With, or Reply With command.

You can also set up a filter to reply with a stationery message. See Filtering Messages for more information.


Using a Signature
Use a Signature

A signature is a few lines of text that are added automatically to the end of an outgoing message when it is sent. A signature can be whatever you want, but it is mostly used to give contact information (telephone, address, and so forth). You use only one signature at a time in a message, but you can create as many different signatures as you want.

Note:	Your signature is not displayed in the Eudora message window, but is added to the end of the message when it is sent.

For more information, see Creating a Signature and Including a Signature in Messages.


Creating a Signature
Create a Signature

Eudora comes with a default signature called Standard. This is an empty signature file that you fill with signature text.

To create a new signature, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Signatures or click the Signature window’s tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group. The Signature window appears.

2.	Right-click anywhere inside the Signature window and choose New from the context menu. Eudora displays the Create New Signature dialog box, and asks you for a name.

3.	In the dialog box, enter a signature name and click OK. A signature window appears.

4.	Enter your signature text in the signature window. To format the text with styles, see Formatting Text.

5.	Save the signature file using the File menu Save command.

6.	Close the signature window.


Changing a Signature
Change a Signature

To change a signature file, do the following:

1. 	In the Signature window, right-click the signature and choose Edit from the context menu. The signature window appears for that signature.

2. 	Make any changes you want, then save the file with the File menu Save command, and close the window.


Deleting a Signature
Delete a Signature

To delete a signature file, do the following:

•	In the Signature window, select the desired signature and press the delete key or right-click the signature item and choose Delete from the context menu. In either case you are prompted to confirm the delete.


Including a Signature in Messages
Include a Signature in Messages

To include a particular signature in an outgoing message, select the signature you want from the Signature drop-down list on the message toolbar.

To include a particular signature in all of your outgoing messages—unless you are using stationery—select a signature from the Signature drop-down list in the Sending Mail Options Window (for your dominant account only), or in the Account Settings dialog (for any of your personalities). You can change this signature for a particular message by selecting a different signature or None from the Signature drop-down on the message toolbar.

If a signature with styled text is sent with a message that does not have styled text, the signature’s styles are removed.

Note that if you open a new composition message with stationery or if you have default stationery set for all new messages, then the signature stored with that stationery file is the one used with the new message, overriding any default signature. However, you can always make the final decision about what signature to send with a new message by choosing it from the Signature drop-down on the message toolbar. See Using Stationery.


Setting the Message Priority
Set the Message Priority

You can assign a priority to incoming and outgoing messages. The priority is only for you and your recipients—it does not affect the way mail transport systems handle the messages.

There are five priority levels available, 1 being the highest, 5 being the lowest. Each is represented by a small symbol in the Toolbar of a message window and the Priority column of a message summary. Priority 3 (Normal) is used for messages that have no assigned priorities; it is not displayed. The Highest priority symbol, a double-caret, is red; the Lowest priority symbol, an inverted double-caret, is blue.

New messages are created with a Normal priority. To change the priority of the current message, use the Priority drop-down.

Note:	To set up Eudora to always use the sender’s priority on your replies, turn on the Copy original’s priority to reply option in the Replying Options Window. You can always change the priority in the message window.


Requesting a Return Receipt
Request a Return Receipt

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

You can request that your recipients notify you when they have seen your message. To do this, click the Return Receipt button (RR) in the message toolbar.

When your recipients open the message and then close it, a dialog box appears asking them to create a notification message now, later, or never (if you send yourself a copy of the message, you will see the notification request). If a recipient chooses to create a notification message, it is sent to you and tells you when the recipient displayed your message.

If you receive a request for notification, click Now to queue the notification message in your Out mailbox: it will be sent the next time queued messages are sent. Click Later to close the message without sending a notification or click Cancel to dismiss the notification request from the screen while the return receipt message is open; however, each time you open the message and then close it (or if you try to delete it), the notification request will appear until you click either Now or Never. Click Never to cancel the notification request without ever sending a notification message.

The Return Receipt options may work differently than described, depending on your recipients’ email software.


Formatting Text
Format Text

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

You can use standard text-editing options to format the text of your outgoing messages, your text files, and your signatures. The formatting your recipient sees depends on how well their email package supports these standards.

It’s important to remember that you cannot completely control what happens on your recipient’s computer. Depending on the type of computer they are using, their installed fonts, and their options or preferences, they could end up viewing something different from what you had intended. Although your formatting changes are sent to your recipient, your default text settings are not. Any text that you did not change appears using your recipient’s default text, which may be different from yours.

Two Eudora options let you specify how you want to send and receive styled text. If the Discard style information with mail option is on in the Styled Text Options Window, you will not be able to format your text at all (default for this option is off). You can find the Styled Text options dialog box by opening the Tools menu, and choose Options. Scroll through the icons until you find Styled Text.

If you want to send styled text, then turn off the Discard style information with mail option, and if you also want to be alerted before sending the message, then turn on the But warn me first option in the Styled Text Options Window.

Text in outgoing messages, text files, and signature files can be formatted using the commands on the Edit menu Text submenu and using the formatting toolbar.

•	To format text, use the text styles buttons on the message window’s Icon bar or from the Text submenu from the Edit menu. You can change the font, size, style, color, and the margins.


Text Editing Menu Commands

To format text, do the following:

1. 	Highlight the text you want to format.

2. 	From the Edit menu, choose Text. The Text submenu appears.

3. 	Select the desired text format that you wish to apply to the highlighted text. If no text is selected but the cursor is in the message body, then the font-related commands apply the formatting to the next text you type, and the margin-related commands apply the formatting to the current paragraph that contains the cursor.

The formatting options are as follows:

Plain, Bold, Italic, Underline — Changes the type face to plain (the default), bold, italic, or underlined.

Typewriter — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Sets the text to the fixed-width (typewriter-style) message font selected in the Fonts options window.

Size — Changes the text to the selected size: Very Small, Small (the default), Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous. The increase or decrease is based in standard point size increments.

Remember that you are viewing the text based on your default settings in the Fonts options window, but your recipient’s settings and fonts will be different. For example, if your recipient’s default font size is larger than yours and you send a message with text set to “Humongous,” your recipient will see text larger than yours.

Color — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Changes the text to black (the default) or the selected color.

Font —Changes the text to a certain font by choosing from the fonts available on your system. Remember that your recipient may not have the same fonts.

Margins—Normal — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Aligns the selected or current paragraph’s left margin to normal (flush left, the default.

Margins—Indent In, Indent Out — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Indents the selected or current paragraph’s left margin in one level or removes one level of indent.

Left, Right, Center — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Aligns the selected or current paragraph to the left, the right, or the center of the current indent.

Bulleted List — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Converts the selected text to a bulleted list, or begin a bulleted list at the insertion point.

Make Hyperlink — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) Converts the selected piece of text or graphic to a clickable, underlined hyperlink to a URL. When your recipient clicks the hyperlink, he or she is immediately linked to the URL.

Clear Formatting — Clears all formatting and goes back to the default settings.


Word Wrap

If you turn on the Word Wrap button in the message toolbar, carriage returns are automatically inserted at the end of each line of message text, with roughly 76 characters per line when a message is sent. This makes the message legible on your recipient’s computer.

Do not include your own carriage returns within paragraphs if you have the Word Wrap option turned on. Only use carriage returns to create new paragraphs in the message.

To manually wrap text, do the following:

1. 	Select the desired text.

2. 	From the Edit menu, choose Wrap Selection.

To unwrap text, do the following:

1. 	Select the desired text.

2. 	Hold down the Shift key and from the Edit menu, choose Wrap Selection.

To copy wrapped text without the carriage returns (that is, to copy and unwrap), do the following:

1. 	Select the desired text.

2. 	Hold down the Shift key and from the Edit menu , choose Copy.


Inserting Objects in Message Text

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Use the Insert submenu under the Edit menu to insert pictures and horizontal lines into the body of a message. You can also do this using the Insert Object button on the message toolbar.

You can insert an object in the middle of a line of text or between lines of text in the message body.

To insert a picture in message text, do the following:

1. 	Move the cursor to where you want the picture.

2. 	From the Edit menu, choose Insert Picture.

3. 	In the dialog box that displays, select an image file and click Open.

The picture is inserted into the message body at the cursor position. You can continue typing text. After the picture is inserted in your message, you can drag it to where you want it in the message. When your recipient opens your message, he or she will see the picture in the message body. Note, however, that what your recipient sees depends on whether or not the receiving computer and email package supports the display of inline images embedded in message text.

To insert a horizontal line in message text, put the cursor in the message body, then choose Insert Horizontal Line from the Edit menu. A horizontal rule is inserted immediately above the line on which the cursor resides.


Attaching a File to a Message

Any file can be attached to and sent with a Eudora message. Most of the time, an attached document functions like a “rider” to the email message and does not appear within the message text. Instead, the name of the document appears automatically in the Attached field of the message header.

To attach a file to an outgoing message, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose Attach File [to New Message]. The Attach File dialog box appears.

2. 	Locate the file you want, select it, and click the Open button to attach the document to the current message or to open a new message with the file attached. You can add as many attachments as you want to a message, one at a time.

You can also drag one or more files from either the Desktop or the File Browser window onto the message window to attach them. (See File Browser Window.)

To detach an attached document before the message is sent, do the following:

1. 	Select the document in the Attached field.

2. 	Press either the Backspace key or the Delete key.

When the message is sent, if the chosen document is not a plain text (ASCII) file, it is encoded in the selected attachment type. This allows you to send any kind of document through the mail, even applications. Encoding options for attachments are MIME, BinHex and Uuencode.

If the document is an ASCII file, you can put it in the body of the by turning on the Put text attachments in body of message option in the Attachments options window (under Options from the Tool menu). The toolbar button applies to the current outgoing message; the Attachments option applies to all outgoing messages.


MIME Encoding
MIME

This is best for recipients with MIME-compliant email readers, regardless of what operating system they are using. For more information on MIME, see the section “MIME and Mapping” in the online Eudora User Manual.


BinHex Encoding
BinHex

This is best for recipients on a Macintosh with an email reader that is not MIME-compliant.


Uuencode Encoding
Uuencode

This is best for recipients using PC or UNIX systems that are not MIME-compliant.


Manually Decoding Attachments

If you send an attachment and your recipient’s email program does not correctly decode it, it will probably be included in the body of the message in the chosen attachment format (MIME, BinHex, or Uuencode).

If you receive a large message consisting largely of indecipherable text, it is probably an attachment that was not automatically decoded. Usually this is because the attachment headers are formatted incorrectly.

To decode an attachment that was not automatically decoded, do the following:

1. 	Open the message.

2. 	From the File menu, choose Save As to save the message as a text file.

3. 	Run the decoding utility for the encoding method that the sender used. Decoding utilities can be found at various shareware sites on the Internet.


Including a URL in a Message

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To include a hot link in a message—also known as a URL, for Uniform Resource Locator—enclose it with less than and greater than signs (angle brackets) to ensure that your recipient’s email application can identify it as a URL. For example, <http://www.eudora.com>.


Creating a Hyperlink in a Message

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Eudora lets you create a hyperlink in an outgoing message; that is, convert a piece of text or a graphic into a link to a URL, so when your recipients click the text or graphic, their browser opens and takes them to that URL.

To create a hyperlink, do the following:

1. 	Type the text you want to link in your outgoing message.

2. 	Select the text to highlight it or insert a graphic file using the Insert then Picture command under the Edit menu and select the inserted graphic.

3. 	From the Text submenu under the Edit menu, choose Make Hyperlink, or click the insert Hyperlink icon on the message toolbar.

4. 	In the URL field of the Hyperlink dialog box, enter the full address of the URL, for example, <http://www.eudora.com>

5. 	 Click OK.

The text or graphic is now linked, highlighted, and underlined in the message. When your recipient receives the message, opens it, and clicks on the hyperlink, their browser or other application will open and go directly to the URL you specified.


Checking Your Spelling

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Eudora includes a built-in spelling checker that checks for misspellings in the body of current message composition windows, text files, and signature files. It includes a built-in dictionary and also allows for the creation of a custom user dictionary. Additionally, it can be configured to ignore capitalized words, words with all capitals, words with numbers, and mixed-case words; to report doubled (repeated) words; and to suggest alternative spellings.

Note:	Changes to the spelling options can be made in the Spell Checking Options Window found in Options under the Tools Menu or by selecting Options from the Check Spelling dialog box.

See the “Sources” section in the online Eudora User Manual for information on how to get dictionaries for languages other than U.S. English.

To automatically check spelling when you send or queue a message, turn on the Check when message queued/sent option in the Spell Checking options window . If this option is on, then when you send or queue a message, the message is checked for spelling errors. If you complete the spell-checking process, the message is automatically sent or queued. If you instead click Cancel, or leave spelling errors in the message, a dialog box appears asking you if you still want to send or queue the message. If you don’t want that dialog box to be displayed, turn on the Don’t warn me anymore option (this can also be set in the Spell Checking options window ).

To check the spelling of a current composition window, text file, or signature file, click the Check Spelling button in the main window toolbar or choose Check Spelling from the Edit menu (Ctrl+6). If there are no misspellings, the “No misspellings found” alert appears.

Note:	For an alternate way to check your spelling using the Shift+Check Spelling option, which lets you see all misspelled words at once and change only those you want to, see Automatic Spell Checking.

Note:	If text is selected, Eudora checks the spelling only of the selected text. Otherwise, it starts the spelling check from the beginning of the message body or text file, and checks the entire text.

If a misspelled, unknown, or repeated word is found, the Check Spelling dialog box appears with the word listed in the Unknown field.

To correct the misspelled word, either (1) type the correct spelling of the word in the Change To field (if it is not already there) and click the Change button, (2) select the correct word from the Suggestions list and click the Change button, or (3) double-click the correct word in the Suggestions list. The spelling checker then proceeds with the check.


Check Spelling Dialog

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

The Check Spelling dialog box allows you to ignore an unknown word, change it, suggest the correct spelling, add the word to your user dictionary, edit your dictionary, or change the spelling options. Each of the fields and buttons is described below.

Unknown — An unknown word is one that is not found in Eudora’s built-in dictionary or your own custom dictionary. You can act on an unknown word using the Ignore, Ignore all, Change, Change all, or Add buttons, as described below.

Change To — This field works in conjunction with the Change and Change all buttons. It allows you to modify the unknown word by typing its correct spelling in this field, or selecting a suggested alternative spelling from the Suggestions field, and then clicking the Change or Change all buttons, as described below.

Suggestions  — This field lists Eudora’s suggestions for the correct spelling of the unknown word. If the Suggest words option is turned on, all suggestions are listed here by default. If the option is turned off, click the Suggest button to display Eudora’s suggestions.

Ignore — This button causes the spelling checker to ignore this occurrence of the unknown word.

Ignore all — This button causes the spelling checker to ignore this occurrence and all subsequent occurrences of the unknown word.

Change — This button substitutes the contents of the Change To field for the unknown word.

Change all — This button substitutes the contents of the Change To field for this occurrence and all subsequent occurrences of the unknown word.

Suggest — This button causes the Suggestions field to display a list of Eudora’s suggestions for the correct spelling of the unknown word.

Note:	If Eudora doesn’t have suggestions in its dictionary, then it doesn’t list any suggestions.

Add — This button adds the unknown word to your custom user dictionary.

Edit Dictionary — This button displays the Edit User Dictionary dialog box. The Edit User Dictionary dialog box lists all of the words in your user dictionary in the Dictionary field. It also allows you to add words to or delete words from your personal user dictionary, or even clear the entire dictionary.

Note:	Words in the user dictionary are saved in all lower case.

To add a word to the dictionary using this dialog box, type the correct spelling of the word in the Word field and click the Add button. The word is then added to the dictionary and displayed in the Dictionary field.

Note:	The Add button in this dialog box works the same as the Add button in the Check Spelling dialog box.

To remove a word from the user dictionary, first type it in the Word field, or locate it in the Dictionary field and single-click it to display it in the Word field, then click the Delete button.

To delete the entire user dictionary, click the Clear button. You will then be prompted to confirm the deletions. If you click Yes, all of the words are deleted from the user dictionary.

Options Button — This button displays the Spelling Options dialog box.

The Spelling options window lists the spell-checking options. A checkmark in the box next to the option name indicates that the option is turned on.

Note:	The spelling options can also be modified in the Options dialog box (Spell Checking category).

The options are as follows:

Ignore capitalized words — The spelling checker ignores words that start with a capital letter, such as proper nouns.

Ignore words with all capitals — The spelling checker ignores words that contain all capital letters, such as acronyms.

Ignore words with numbers — The spelling checker ignores words that contain numbers.

Ignore words with mixed case — The spelling checker ignores words that contain a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters.

Report doubled words — The spelling checker reports words that appear twice in sequence in text and identifies them as Doubled words.

Suggest words — The spelling checker displays Eudora’s suggestions for the correct spelling of an unknown word. You can select any combination of the suggestion options: Phonetic words, Split words, Typographic words.

Note:	If Eudora doesn’t have suggestions in its dictionary, then it doesn’t list anything.


Saving a Message for Later Changes

Sometimes it is convenient to save an outgoing message either as a safeguard when typing long messages or so you can return to it later to make changes.

To save the current message, do the following:

1. 	From the File menu, choose Save. Saved messages are put in the Out mailbox, and if at least one recipient is entered in either the To or the Bcc field, the saved message is shown with a bullet (•) in the Status column. If both the To and the Bcc fields are empty, the Status column is blank. The bullet indicates that the message not only has been saved, but is also ready to be sent or queued.

You can continue making changes to the message or close it. If you try to close an outgoing message window without saving that version of the message, an alert appears asking if the message should be saved or the changes discarded. If you select Discard and the message has never been saved, the message is deleted.


Sending a Message Immediately

If you want to send your messages immediately instead of putting them in a queue to send later, then be sure the Immediate send option is on in the Sending Mail Options Window. The Sending Mail options are found on the Sending Mail window in Options under the Tools menu.

To send the current message, do the following:

1. 	Click the Send button or from the Message menu, choose Send Immediately. A progress window appears to show the progress of the transmission.

If you have the Immediate send option on, but want to put the current message in the queue, hold down the Shift key and click the Send button. The Change Queueing dialog box appears and you can set detailed instructions. For more details, see Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time.


Queueing a Message to Send Later

If you want to put your messages in a queue in the Out mailbox to send all together at a later time, be sure the Immediate send option is off in the Sending Mail Options Window. The Sending Mail options are found on the Sending Mail window in Options under the Tools menu.

You can set up Eudora to warn you if you try to delete a queued message or try to quit Eudora before queued messages have been sent. To do this, turn those options on in the Extra Warnings options. The Extra Warnings options are found on the Sending Mail window in Options under the Tools menu.

To put the current message in the queue, do the following:

1. 	Click the Queue button or from the Message menu, choose Queue For Delivery. The message window is closed (if it was open), the message is saved in the Out mailbox marked Q (meaning it’s ready to be sent), and the date and time are placed in the Date column.

To send all of your queued messages, do the following:

1. 	From the File menu, choose Send Queued Messages. A progress window appears momentarily at the top of the screen indicating the progress of the transmission.

If you have the Immediate send option off, but want to send a message immediately, hold down the Shift key and click the Queue button. The Change Queueing dialog box appears and you can choose the Send Message Right now option.


Queueing a Message to Send at a Certain Time

You can specify that a message be sent at a certain time in the future. To do this for the current outgoing message, choose Queueing from the Change submenu under the Message menu. The Change Queueing dialog box appears.

If you choose Right now, the message is sent immediately when you click OK. If you choose Next time queued messages are sent, the message is sent the next time queued messages are sent.

If you choose On or after, you can use the Time and Date fields to fill in the time and date at which the message should be sent. The message is saved in the Out mailbox with a clock icon in the Status column, and the specified date and time in the Date column. The message is sent when the specified time arrives.

Important:	For the message to be sent at the correct time, Eudora must be up and running at that time. If Eudora is not running, the message is sent the first time Eudora is run after the specified time has passed.

If you choose Don’t send for a message that has never been queued, nothing happens. The message is held in the Out mailbox until it is either deleted or re-queued and sent.


Editing a Queued Message

To edit a queued message, do the following:

1. 	Open the Out mailbox.

2. 	Select the desired message summary.

3. 	Make the necessary edits and save them. The message is kept in the Out mailbox. If you close the changed message without saving it, an alert appears asking you to verify the changes.


Taking a Message Out of the Queue

A message that is queued but is not yet sent can be unqueued using the Change Queueing command. To take a message out of the queue, do the following:

1. 	Open the Out mailbox.

2. 	Select the desired message summary.

3. 	From the Message menu, choose Change Queueing and click Don’t send. This changes the message status from queued (Q) to sendable (•). The message is held in the Out mailbox until it is either deleted, re-queued, or sent. To send the message immediately, open it and click Send.


Sending Queued Messages When Checking Mail

If the Send on check option in the Sending Mail Options Window is on, then every time Eudora checks for mail (automatically or manually), all queued messages are automatically sent.


Sending Messages with Special Server Instructions

To send your queued messages with special instructions for the server (POP server only), do the following:

1. 	Hold down the Shift key and from the File menu choose Send Queued Messages. The Mail Transfer Options dialog box appears.

2. 	Set the options you want and click OK. All the actions you have requested are completed. For details, see Managing your Mail on a POP Server.


Replying to a Message

To reply to the current message, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose Reply.

A new message window appears with the original sender’s address automatically placed in the To field of the header. All of the sender’s original text is quoted in the message body. This text can be edited as needed. Additional text can be added to the reply just as to any outgoing message, and the reply can then be sent or saved for further changes.

The sender’s text is quoted in the message with a left sidebar, also called an “excerpt bar.”

Messages that have been replied to are identified with a left arrow in the Status column of their message summary.


Using the Reply Functions

There are several options for replying to messages.

To include everyone who received the original message, do the following:

1. From the Message menu, choose Reply to All.

To include yourself as a recipient, do the following:

1. 	Open the Tools menu and choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Replying. The Replying dialog box appears.

3. 	Check the Include yourself box and click OK. This only works if you are using Reply to All.

Note:	To determine who you are for the Include yourself option, Eudora uses the “me” nickname. If you do not have a “me” nickname set up in your Address Book, Eudora uses the contents of the Mail Server (Incoming), Login Name, and Return address fields from the Getting Started Options Window. (Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form loginname@mailservername.) The “me” nickname is particularly useful if you have multiple addresses and don’t want replies to go to any of those addresses.

To put the addresses of the other recipients of the original message in the Cc field (instead of the To field), do the following:

1. 	Open the Tools menu and choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Replying. The Replying dialog box appears.

3. 	Check the Put original To: recipients in Cc: field box and click OK. Only the original sender’s address is put in the To field. This works only if you are using Reply to All.

To copy the original message’s priority to your replies, do the following:

1. 	Open the Tools menu and choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Replying. The Replying dialog box appears.

3. 	Check the Copy original’s priority to reply box in the Replying Options Window.

To change the keyboard shortcut Ctrl+R from its normal function of Reply to Reply to All, do the following:

1. 	Open the Tools menu and choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Replying. The Replying dialog box appears.

3. 	Check the Map Ctrl+R to “Reply to All” box in the Replying dialog box. The change is reflected on the Message menu.


Replying with a Stationery File

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

To reply to a message with a stationery file, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose Reply With.

2. 	From the Reply With submenu, select a stationery file. The stationery file is opened as a message and is addressed as appropriate (your Replying options are used). For information on stationery files, see Using Stationery.

Other ways to reply with stationery:

•	With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window, open the Stationery window, right-click a stationery item, and choose Reply With from the drop-down menu.

•	With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window, open the Personalities window, right-click a personality, and choose Reply As from the Message submenu of the drop-down menu. The default stationery assigned to that personality is used in the reply.

•	With the Personalities window open, drag an open message by its Tow Truck, or drag selected message summaries in a mailbox window onto a personality in the Personalities window: a reply is initiated from that personality, and the stationery stored with that personality is used in the reply.

•	Set up a filter that uses the Reply with filter action. See Filtering Messages and Filter Actions.


Forwarding a Message

Any message can be forwarded to someone else. To forward the current message, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose Forward.

A new message window appears with your address in the From field, the original subject preceded by “Fwd:” and a space in the Subject field, the original sender’s text quoted in the message body, and the original attachments in the Attached field. For details on how text is quoted, see Replying to a Message. Make any changes you want, and enter the recipient’s address in the To field. The message can then be sent or saved for further changes.

Note:	If you forward an outgoing message (a message you sent), the attachments are not automatically included.

Messages that have been forwarded are identified with a right arrow in the Status column of their message summary.

Other ways to forward a message:

•	With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window, open the Personalities window, right-click a personality, and choose Forward As from the Message submenu of the drop-down menu.

•	Set up a filter that uses the Forward To filter action. See Filtering Messages and Filter Actions.


Redirecting a Message

Incoming messages can be sent to a new recipient “by way of” you, maintaining the original sender’s address in the From field. This is called redirecting.

To redirect the current message, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose Redirect.

A new message window appears with the original sender’s address in the From field and the statement “by way of” followed by your real name and/or return address, the original sender’s text in the message body, and the original attachments in the Attached field. Make any changes you want, and enter the recipient’s address in the To field. The message can then be sent or saved for further changes.

Note:	You may want to enclose any changes in brackets ([]) so that you don’t confuse the recipient about who wrote what.

Messages that have been redirected are identified with a diagonal arrow pointing up and right in the Status column of their message summary.

Other ways to redirect a message:

•	With the desired message open or selected in a mailbox window, open the Personalities window, right-click a personality, and choose Redirect As from the Message submenu of the drop-down menu.

•	Set up a filter that uses the Redirect To filter action. See the sections Filtering Messages and Filter Actions.


Turbo Redirecting

You can redirect a message to someone on your recipient list, queue the new message (without displaying it), and delete the original message, all with one command. To turbo redirect a message, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select the Miscellaneous icon. The Miscellaneous options window appears.

3. 	Check the Turbo redirect by default box and click OK.

When you select a recipient from the Redirect To submenu under the Message menu, a turbo redirect is automatically performed.


Redirect and Signatures

When you use Redirect or Redirect To, your signature is not added to the message when it is sent, unless you originally created the message. Eudora considers the message to be originally from you if the address in the From field exactly matches either your return address or one of the addresses belonging to your nickname  “me,” if you have one.


Keeping Copies of Outgoing Messages

There are three ways to keep copies of your outgoing messages.

•	To put a copy of every outgoing message in the Out mailbox, turn on the Keep copies option in the Sending Mail Options Window.

•	To put a copy of the current outgoing message in the Out mailbox, turn on the Keep Copy button in the message toolbar.

•	To put a copy of the current outgoing message in a particular mailbox, right-click in the body of the message and select the mailbox from the Fcc menu.

In all these cases, when the messages are sent they are put in the specified mailbox with a checkmark in the Status column, indicating that the message has been sent.

If none of these options are used, outgoing messages are put into the Trash mailbox after they have been sent.

Note:	You can also set up a filter to save outgoing messages in particular mailboxes based on information contained in the message. See Filtering Messages for more information.


Sending Rejected Messages Again

If for some reason an email message can’t be delivered to a recipient, mail transport agents return the message to the original sender (you). A message is typically rejected because of an error in the recipient’s address, although other reasons are possible.

The return message usually includes cryptic information that may let you determine the reason the message was rejected. It also includes the text of the original message.

You can easily recover the original message, make any corrections, and resend it.  To resend a rejected message again, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose Send Again. This eliminates the inserted extra text and reformats the message as it originally appeared. You can then make changes or additions and send the message again.

The Send Again command is also useful for resending saved messages—from your Out box, for example—and messages you’ve copied to yourself, in order to save yourself some retyping. You can send the same message to another recipient to avoid having to retype the whole message, or you can send a different message to the same recipients to avoid having to retype their addresses in the header.

Another way to send a message again:

1. 	In a mailbox window, open or select the desired message.

2. 	From the Tools menu, choose Personalities, or select the Personalities tab. The Personalities window opens.

3. 	Right-click a personality, and from the Message submenu of the drop-down menu, choose Send Again As.

The message is sent again but from the selected personality (which may or may not be the same as the personality under which it was originally sent).


Checking for Incoming Mail

The incoming mail server is where your mail is received and stored until it is transferred by Eudora to your computer. You can use several different mail accounts with Eudora: Your main account, or “dominant personality,” is specified in Configuring Eudora, and additional mail accounts, or “multiple personalities,” are described in Personalities Window and Account Settings Dialog.

Note:	To best understand the functioning of the incoming mail server with respect to Eudora, see the section “Mail Transport” in the Online Eudora User Manual.

There are two ways to check your incoming mail server and transfer mail to your computer: automatically or manually.

You can also control how your mail is transferred from the server, and what happens to it on the server. For details, see Managing your mail on a POP Server and Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server.


Checking for Mail Automatically

To set up Eudora to automatically check your incoming mail account and transfer new mail, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Checking Mail.

3. 	In the Check for mail every _ minutes field, enter the number of minutes that you want between mail checks.

4. 	Open the Personalities window and for each personality that you want to be automatically checked, right-click the personality, choose Modify from the context menu, and when the Account Settings dialog appears, turn on the Check Mail option for that personality.

Note:	Fifteen minutes is a good minimum interval because checking mail more frequently puts an unnecessary load on your incoming mail server. If the field is empty, or is set to 0, mail is not automatically checked.

If automatic checking is set, the Check Mail command under the File menu displays the next time that an automatic check is scheduled to occur.

The Check Mail option also specifies that an account should be checked for new mail when a manual mail check is done.


Checking for Mail Manually

You can manually check for new mail at any time by selecting Check Mail from the File menu. Any account that has the Check Mail option turned on (in the Account Settings dialog accessed from the Personalities window) is checked. If you haven’t successfully entered your password since opening the Eudora program, you are prompted for it for each account being checked. A progress window is momentarily displayed at the top of the screen indicating that an attempt to reach your incoming mail account is being made.


Stopping a Mail Check

If you want to stop a mail check in the middle, click the Stop button in the progress window.


Using Your Password

Each time you open Eudora and check mail for the first time, you need to enter a password for each incoming mail account that you have. This password is required by the incoming mail server before it will transfer your mail, so that no one else can get your mail from the server.

Note:	This does not protect your mail once it is on your computer. Unless a message has been sent with some type of security, it is plain text that many applications can read. If you are interested in securing the messages on your computer, you may want to consider a disk driver that can encrypt hard disk data.

If you need to enter a password, the Eudora Password dialog box appears. Enter your password and click OK. If you make a mistake before clicking OK, simply backspace and re-enter the password correctly.

Note:	Your incoming mail account password is case sensitive, so the uppercase and lowercase characters must be typed in exactly. Be sure that Caps Lock is off.

If your password is rejected, an error message appears indicating that you have entered the wrong password. Choose Check Mail from the File menu to redisplay the password dialog box.

As long as Eudora is running, it remembers all of your passwords. If you don’t want it to remember (if, for example, you are away from your computer), choose Forget Password(s) from the Special menu. The next time you check mail for any account, you are prompted for your password again.

Note:   If you have more than one personality, a window appears listing the names of your personalities. You can select the personalities whose passwords you want Eudora to forget. All the personalities are selected by default. Deselect the personalities you don’t want Eudora to forget.

You can also make Eudora remember all of your passwords from one session to the next, which means you never have to enter passwords again, even if you quit and restart Eudora. You want to do this only if your computer is in a secure location where there is no possible chance of someone else is having access to it. To use this option, turn on Save password in the Checking Mail Options Window.


Changing Your Password

To change the password for one of your personalities, choose Change Password from the Special menu, and select the personality whose password you want to change. You are prompted to enter your old password once and your new password twice. Depending on the server you are using, the password can be up to 30 characters, but normally it is only 7 or 8.

Note:	This only works if the incoming mail server is running a compatible password-change server. For information about these servers, see the “Sources” section of the Online Eudora User Manual.

When you choose a new password, try not to use real words, names, dates, or familiar acronyms. Some systems require you to use at least one number or symbol in your password, and you may want to do that even if it is not required.


Receiving New Mail

When Eudora does a mail check, you can be notified of new mail in one or all of the following ways:

•	Alert dialog box

•	Mailbox receiving new mail opens

•	 “New Mail” sound.

These options are turned on or off in the Getting Attention window. To display the Getting Attention window, open the Tools menu, choose Options. Scroll through the icons and select Getting Attention.

When you receive notice that new mail has arrived, select Eudora from the Windows task bar. Mail usually arrives in the In mailbox unless you are using filters to transfer messages. If the In mailbox is not already open, from the Mailbox menu, choose In. The messages are listed in the order that they are received, with the most recent message listed last. Unread messages are designated by a bullet in the Status column of the message summary.

Double-click a message summary to open the message. You can also view messages using the message preview window at the bottom of the mailbox window while the message summary is highlighted.

Incoming messages are saved indefinitely in the In mailbox (or the mailbox they are filtered into) until they are deleted or transferred to another mailbox.


The Incoming Message Window
Incoming Message Window

To open an incoming message, double-click its message summary in a mailbox window, or, if the message summary is current (highlighted), press the Spacebar or Enter key.

Note:	You can also view the message in the message preview window. See The Message Preview Pane for more details.

The incoming message window consists of the title bar, the toolbar, and the message body.

Title Bar — The title bar provides information about the message, including the name of the sender, the time and date the message was delivered, and the message subject.

Toolbar — The toolbar consists of buttons and drop-downs displayed just under the title bar.

Tow Truck — This icon can be used to drag any current message into a different mailbox. Just hold the mouse button down on the icon and drag it to an open mailbox or a mailbox in the Mailboxes window.

Fixed Width — Click this button to convert the message text to the fixed-width (typewriter style) message font set in your Fonts options window. This lets you view aligned text, such as columns and tables, more easily.

BLAH BLAH BLAH — If this button is on, all the message headers and any formatting codes are displayed.

Pencil — If this button is on, you can edit the message.

Delete From Server — If this button is on, the message is deleted from the server the next time mail is checked.

Retrieve From Server (Fetch) — If this button is on, the message is retrieved (fetched) from the server the next time mail is checked.

Priority drop-down list — This button lets you indicate that the message is of higher or lower priority than a normal message. For most messages, this is just an empty box (normal priority). For details, see Setting the Message Priority .

Subject — This button is the subject that was assigned by the sender, and is shown in the message summary. For instructions on changing this subject, see Editing Incoming Messages .

Message Body — The message body contains the message header and text information as well as the name of each attachment and, if the Show attachment icons option is turned on in the Viewing Mail options window, each attachment’s icon as well. Attachments can be opened from within the message window by clicking the attachment icon or name.

Eudora lets you view incoming mail with advanced formatting, graphics, multimedia, and the like. Additionally, if you have the Use Microsoft’s viewer option turned on in the Viewing Mail Options Window , and you have Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or later installed and available on your system, Eudora lets you take full advantage of the viewing capabilities of a Web browser in the email message itself or linked to the Internet without having to open your Web browser.


Receiving Attachments

Unless you have specified a particular directory for your incoming attachments (see Specifying an Attachment Directory), they are automatically decoded and saved in the Attach Directory in your Eudora Directory. If you receive multiple attachments with the same name, a number is added to the end of each duplicate name in the order they are received.

Attachment names are displayed at the bottom of incoming messages and the message preview window.

To open an attachment from the open message window or the message preview window, click the attachment name or its icon. If you have the application that the attachment was created in, that application launches and the attachment opens.

If you receive a large message consisting largely of indecipherable text, it is probably an attachment that was not correctly decoded. Usually this is because the attachment headers are formatted incorrectly. To decode an attachment that was not automatically decoded, open the message and choose Save As from the File menu to save the message as a text file. Then run the decoding utility appropriate for the encoding method that the sender used. Decoding utilities can be found at various shareware sites on the Internet. Also see Attaching a File to a Message.


Specifying an Attachment Directory

If you do not want to use the default Attach Directory to receive your attachments, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options and scroll and select  Attachments.

2. 	Beneath the Attachment directory prompt, click the large button. A standard file dialog box appears.

3. 	Double-click the name of the directory you want to use (its name should be displayed above the list).

4. 	Click  Use Directory. The dialog box closes, leaving the Options dialog box displayed. The name of the folder you just selected is now displayed in the Attachment directory button.

Note:	If at any time Eudora cannot find your selected directory, Eudora will use the Attach Directory in the Eudora Directory for attachments until you designate a new directory.


Editing Incoming Messages

You can edit the message body in an incoming message if you turn on the Pencil button in the Toolbar. You can also edit the Subject in the Toolbar (this is the subject shown in the message summary), without turning on the Pencil button.

To edit an incoming message, do the following:

1. 	Click the Pencil button to turn it on.

2. 	Edit the text in the message body. (See Formatting Text for details on how you edit the message text.)

3. 	When you are finished, save your changes and close the message.

To edit the subject of an incoming message, open it and edit the subject in the Toolbar (not the subject in the message body). When you are finished, click somewhere else in the message or close it. The new subject appears in the message summary. The contents of the Subject field of the message header remain unchanged.

Note:	If you reply to the message, the original subject is used for the reply, not your changed subject.


Using Active URLs

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Any string of text that Eudora recognizes as a hot link or URL (Uniform Resource Locator, such as http, ftp, gopher, ph, finger) is active. Click a URL to open a World Wide Web location, transfer a file, do a gopher search, or use the finger tool. URLs are highlighted and underlined to show that they are active.


Managing your Mail on a POP Server.

During a mail check, your incoming messages are normally transferred from your account on the POP server to your computer, and then deleted from the POP server. But this can be awkward if you want to read mail from two or more computers and keep your mail organized at the same time.

There are several options that you can use to control your mail transfers and the storage on the server. Some of these options are available in the Incoming Mail Options Window for your dominant account only, and the Account Settings window, for any of your personalities; some of the options are available in the Mail Transfer options window. To access these windows, open the Tools menu and choose Options. Scroll to find the windows you need.


Managing your Mail on the IMAP Server

If your incoming mail server uses the Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), you manage your mail, mailboxes, and folders on the server, not on your computer. You actually create mailboxes and on the server, but  you can see them in the Mailboxes window in Eudora. When you launch Eudora, you retrieve your mailboxes and folders from the server. When you check mail, the mail you retrieve is filtered on the server although your filters are created in Eudora. This is beneficial if you have to retrieve mail from different computers because your mail remains on the server for you to retrieve at anytime on any computer.

During mail checks, partial messages or full messages are transferred to your computer, with or without attachments, depending on the options you specify in the Incoming Mail options window for your main account (see Incoming Mail Options Window). This is beneficial if you use a computer with limited disk space or a slow network connection. To specify options for your personalities, access the Account Settings dialog box from the Personalities window (see Account Settings Dialog).

When a message is transferred either in part or in full from the IMAP server to your computer during a mail check, a copy of the message remains on the server until you actively delete it.


IMAP Tasks Performed Offline

If you use IMAP as your incoming server, you can perform tasks offline. Being offline is a preferred method when you are using a laptop away from home or office.

When you are offline, you are disconnected from the server.

To go offline, do the following:

1.	Move your mouse pointer to the taskbar and right-click. A context drop-down menu appears.

2.	From the context menu, choose Offline. You are now disconnected from your IMAP server.

When offline, you can do the following:

•	Disable timed mail checks

•	Manually check for mail

•	Transfer and delete messages after they are retrieved. However, a dialog box appears asking you to connect for as long as it takes to transfer and delete your messages. When the tasks are completed, you immediately disconnect from the server.


Downloading Minimal Headers vs. the Full Message

By default, the Minimal Headers Only option is turned on in the Incoming Mail Options Window for your dominant account and in the Account Settings dialog for your alternate personalities.

As a result, when you check mail for an account and the incoming mail is delivered to your IMAP server, only a minimal amount of information about each message is transferred to your computer. This consists of the information you would see in the message summary of a mailbox window: the sender, the date and time of the message, the subject, and so forth. However, when you open or preview the message, the full set of message headers and the entire message body is transferred to your computer. Whether or not any attachments to the message are also transferred depends on your setting for the Full Message Except Attachments Over _  K option which is found under the Tools menu, Options, then Incoming Mail.

If you always want the full message to be transferred to your computer during mail checks (with or without attachments, as specified separately) rather than just the minimal headers, turn off the Minimal Headers Only option.


Skipping Attachments Over a Certain Size
Full Message Except Attachments Over _ K

To prevent Eudora from transferring large attachments to your computer during mail checks, turn on the Full message except attachments over _ K option and specify a size. You can set this option in the Incoming Mail options for your main account, or in the Account Settings dialog box for any of your personalities. See Incoming Mail Options Window.

Subsequently, each time mail is checked for the account, attachments larger than the specified size are not transferred to your computer with the message. The rest of the message is transferred including the complete message body. Attachments within the specified size are also transferred.

Attachments not transferred during mail checks can be retrieved, however. When you open or preview the message associated with the attachment, an icon for the attachment appears in the incoming message window or the message preview pane. To retrieve the attachment, do the following:

1.	Click the icon to retrieve the attachment from the IMAP server or right-click a message to display the drop-down menu; and from the drop-down menu, choose Fetch, then Include Attachments.

If you wish to re-retrieve a message at any time, do the following:

1.	Right-click a message to display the drop-down menu.

2.	From the drop-down menu, choose Redownload.

3.	Either choose Include Attachments or Use Defaults. If you want to delete the local copy of a message, right-click the message to display the drop-down menu. From the drop-down menu, choose Remove Cached Contents. The message still exists on the server if you want to re-retrieve it.

If the “Full message except attachments over _ K” option is deselected, then all attachments are transferred to your computer during mail checks, regardless of their size.

Important: In IMAP, your attachments download to the Attach folder, which is in the IMAP folder. However, if you have previously set up a directory in the Attachments options window where you want your attachments to go, all attachments (POP and IMAP) go to that directory. See Attachments Options Window.


Deleting a Message from the IMAP Server

If you have the When I delete a message, move it to Trash option turned off in the Incoming Mail options window (see Incoming Mail Options Window), all new messages are delivered to your IMAP server and are kept there until you actively delete them.

Also, whenever you retrieve a message either in part or in full from the IMAP server to your computer, a copy of the message is kept on the IMAP server until you actively delete it.

Therefore to delete an IMAP message, you must delete it from the IMAP server. To delete messages from the IMAP server, you must perform two steps.

•	Mark the message for deletion.

•	Remove all marked messages.

To mark a message for deletion, do the following:

1.	Open the IMAP mailbox or folder containing the message.

2.	Select or open the message.

3.	From the Message menu, choose Delete. Or press the Delete key.

To unmark a marked message so that it won’t be deleted from the IMAP server, select or open the message and from the Message menu, choose UnDelete. Or right-click to display the drop-down menu; then choose UnDelete.

4.	To remove all messages from the IMAP server marked for deletion, from the Message menu, choose Remove Deleted Messages. The messages are completely removed both from the IMAP server and from your computer.

Once you remove marked messages using the “Remove Deleted Messages” command, these messages are completely gone and cannot be restored. Therefore, use this command with caution.


Resynchronizing an IMAP Mailbox or Folder

General mailbox and folder management for POP and IMAP servers is performed from the Mailboxes window. See Using the Mailboxes Window for more information. This section discusses resynchronization.

Keeping your mailboxes and folders remotely on an IMAP server lets you perform operations on them from different computers. For a particular IMAP mailbox, you may delete some messages from the mailbox from one computer; check mail from another computer, resulting in new messages being transferred to the mailbox; and change the status of some of the messages from a third computer.

Each computer has no idea what has been done to the mailbox from the other computer until you resynchronize the mailbox, which updates all operations performed on the mailbox from all computers that have access to the mailbox. In some situations, others may have access to these same mailboxes.

To resynchronize an IMAP mailbox or folder, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Mailboxes, or click the Mailboxes window tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group. The Mailboxes window appears.

2.	Right-click the mailbox or folder to display the drop-down menu.

3.	From the drop-down menu, choose Resynchronize Mailbox. The content of the mailbox or folder is completely updated according to all operations that have been performed on the mailbox from all computers that have access to it.

Note: Every time you open an IMAP mailbox, you cause it to resynchronize automatically.

General mailbox and folder management for POP and IMAP servers is performed from the Mailboxes window. For more information, see Using the Mailboxes Window.


Refreshing Your List of IMAP Mailboxes and Folders

General mailbox and folder management for POP and IMAP servers is performed from the Mailboxes window. See Using the Mailboxes Window for more information. This section discusses how to update the list of IMAP mailboxes and folders in the Mailboxes window.

If you have shared folders set up, you and other users can access and change messages stored in mailboxes and folders you keep stored remotely on an IMAP server. However, users may access shared folders only; your personal folders cannot be accessed. The Mailboxes window does not reflect the “real-time” status of the IMAP mailbox list, and between mail checks, a disparity can grow between what appears in the list and what is actually on the IMAP server, as new mailboxes are added and existing ones are changed or removed.

To refresh your list of mailboxes and folders on the IMAP server, as it appears in the Mailboxes window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Mailboxes, or click the Mailboxes window tab if it is the inactive window in a tabbed group. The Mailboxes window appears.

2.	Right-click the top folder in the IMAP tree to display the drop-down menu.

3.	From the drop-down menu, choose Refresh Mailbox List. The mailbox list is updated according to what actually appears on the IMAP server at that time. Also, the Mailbox and Transfer menus are updated with the current IMAP mailbox configuration.


Leaving Mail on the Server

If you use the POP protocol for your incoming server to retrieve mail, your mail is normally deleted from the server once it is delivered to Eudora. However, most POP incoming servers allow you to indicate that you wish to keep your mail on the server so you can retrieve it from several different computers at various times.

Facts you should know if you decide to leave your mail on the server:

•	Some mail servers won’t allow you to keep mail on them.

•	Your system administrator may not allow you to keep mail on the server even though you have the option turned on. Usually administrators do not like to keep too much mail on the server because of space concerns.

•	Keeping a lot of mail on the server may slow down the mail checking process.

•	If you check mail from several computers at different times, you can end up reading your messages two or more times. However, if you delete mail from your Trash folder, the message is deleted on the server.

Eudora has an option that allows you to leave your email messages on the server for a specified number of days.

To transfer all of your new messages from the incoming server to Eudora and also leave copies of those messages on the server, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Scroll through the categories and click Incoming Mail.

3.	In the Incoming Mail options window, turn on the Leave mail on server option. This options is available only if you are using POP.

4.	Select the Delete from server after _ days box and set the maximum number of days the copies of your email messages should be kept on the server. This number is determined by the time it takes for you to check mail from all of your computers. If this number is too small, copies of your mail will not be delivered to all of your computers.

Important: Make sure the settings in steps 3 and 4 are identical on all of the computers from which you will be receiving your mail. If you don’t, one computer will delete the mail from the server before you can receive it at another computer.

5.	Click OK and close the window.

At the next mail check from that computer, Eudora ignores the copies of those previously read messages and looks for new ones. However, if you check mail from another computer, those messages are treated as new and are transferred to that computer.

Note:  The “Leave mail on server” option can also be set for each alternate personality you have. To do this, use the Account Settings dialog box, accessed from the Personalities window.

Important: The “Leave mail on server” option should be used with care, since it can result in a buildup of messages on the POP server.


Deleting a Message from the POP Server

To delete a message that has been left on the server (without retrieving it again), do the following:

1. 	Turn on the Trash button in the message Toolbar or set the message summary’s server status to Delete.

2. 	Check mail again. Or, use the Delete all messages that have been retrieved option in the Mail Transfer options  (described in the section Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions).


Skipping Messages Over a Certain Size

To stop Eudora from transferring incoming messages that are too large, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Incoming mail. The Incoming mail window appears.

3. 	Check the Skip messages over _ K in size box and specify a size. Only the first few lines of the messages that exceed that size are transferred, with a note at the bottom stating that the whole message has not been transferred.

4. 	Click OK.

Note:	The Skip messages over _ K in size option can also be set for each alternate personality you have. To do this, use the Account Settings dialog, accessed from the Personalities window (choose the personality, right-click, and choose Modify).

If you decide you want to transfer the whole message, click the Fetch button in the incoming message window, or select the Fetch server status in the message summary, then check mail again. You can also use the Trash button or the Fetch then Delete server status so that the message is deleted from the server after it is transferred.

If you decide you don’t want the message and want to delete it from the server, click Trash in the incoming message window, or select the Delete server status in the message summary, then check mail again.


Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions

To check your mail and give special transfer and storage instructions to the POP server, do the following:

1. 	Hold down the Shift key and from the File menu, choose Check Mail. The Mail Transfer Options dialog box appears.

2. 	Set the options you want and click OK to continue checking for mail.

The mail transfer options are described below.

Retrieve new mail

Transfer your new mail from the POP server to your computer.

Send queued messages

Send all the queued messages (marked “Q”) in your Out mailbox.

Delete messages marked for deletion

Delete from the POP server the messages that are marked Delete in Eudora. This is for messages that were retrieved only in part, either with the Leave mail on server or Skip messages over _ K in size options (in the Incoming Mail Options Window for your main account or the Account Settings dialog for your alternate personalities), or with the Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option (in the Mail Transfer options window).

Retrieve messages marked for retrieval

Retrieve from the POP server the messages that are marked Fetch or Fetch then Delete in Eudora. This is for messages that were retrieved only in part, either with the Leave mail on server or Skip messages over _ K in size options (in the Incoming Mail options window for your main account or the Account Settings dialog for your alternate personalities), or with the Fetch all message headers to In mailbox option (in the Mail Transfer options window).

Note:	To mark a message Fetch, Delete, or Fetch then Delete, either click the buttons in the incoming message window, or select an option from the Server Status drop-down of the message summary.

Delete all messages that have been retrieved

Delete from the POP server all of the messages that have already been transferred to the computer you are on.

Delete all messages on server

Delete all of your messages from the POP server. Note: Be absolutely sure this is what you want to do, because there is no way to undo it!

Fetch all message headers to In mailbox

Retrieve from the POP server the header and the first few lines of every new message. If you select this option, the messages are not filtered. Set the Server Status in the message summaries to specify what you want to do with the messages the next time you check mail.

Important:	If you delete the message header, and you have the Delete from server when emptied from Trash option on in either the Incoming Mail Options Window for your main account, or the Account Settings dialog for an alternate account, the message is gone completely from Eudora and the POP server.

How should checking/sending be performed

If you have multiple personalities, you can check or send mail based on the options on the left of the Mail Transfer options window (turn on Using options at left), or as specified in the Incoming Mail options window, for your dominant account only, or in the Account Settings dialog (accessed from the Personalities window), for any of your personalities (turn on Normally). You can also specify the personalities that you want to check or send with this mail transfer. Hold down the Shift key to select multiple personalities in sequence, or the Ctrl key to select them out of sequence.

Note:	Another way to check mail for multiple personalities, regardless of your settings elsewhere, is to open the Personalities window, select your desired personalities, right-click the selection, and choose Check Mail from the drop-down menu.


Opening a Mailbox

To open a mailbox, do the following:

1. 	Select it from the Mailbox menu, or double-click it in the Mailboxes window.

Note:	The unread message icon appears in the Mailbox menu whenever a mailbox or folder contains unread messages that are less than five days old, and any mailboxes or folders in the Mailboxes window that contain unread messages are displayed as bold.


Message Summaries in Mailboxes

Each line in the list portion of a mailbox window represents a message and is called a message summary. Outgoing messages that are in any mailbox other than Out are shown with italicized message summaries.

To select one or more message summaries, use one of the following options:

•	To select one summary, click it.

•	To select two summaries and all the summaries between them, select a summary, hold down the Shift key, and select another summary. Or, drag the mouse over the summaries to select them (as long as you begin on an unselected summary).

•	To select all of the summaries that have the same information in a particular column, hold down the Alt key and click the column in the summary. For example, if you click the Status column for one summary, all of the summaries with that status are selected.

•	To make “nonconsecutive” selections, hold down the Ctrl key and select summaries.

Each message summary is divided into columns: Status, Priority, Attachments, Label, Sender/Recipient (Who), Date, Size (in K), Server Status, and Subject. You can show or hide these columns using the Display options window.

A message’s Status, Priority, Label, and Server Status can be changed directly in the mailbox window. To do this, select the messages you want to change and click the right mouse button inside the selection. Select an option from the drop-down menu to make your change.

To turn on the display of lines in the message summaries portion of mailbox windows—horizontal lines to separate summaries, and vertical lines to separate columns—turn on the Show Mailbox Lines option in the Display options window .

Column

This column displays the message status, which is one of the following:

•	The message has not been read (all mailboxes except Out), or is queueable or sendable but has not been queued or sent (Out mailbox only).

<blank>	The message has been read (all mailboxes except Out), or is not yet able to be queued or sent because it has no recipients in the To or Bcc fields (Out mailbox only).

left arrow	Reply has been chosen for the message.

right arrow	Forward has been chosen for the message.

diagonal arrow	Redirect has been chosen for the message.

check mark	The message has been sent (outgoing messages only).

Q	The message is queued to be sent (outgoing messages only).

clock icon	The message is queued to be sent at a specified time (outgoing messages only).

_	The message was transferred from the Out mailbox before being sent.

You can change the status of one or more selected messages, or an open message, from Read (blank) to Unread (•) or from Unread to Read by pressing Shift+Space (all mailboxes except Out).

Priority Column

This column displays the message priority. You can use the drop-down to set a particular priority.

Attachments Column

This column displays the attachment icon (a paper clip) if a message has attached documents.

Note:	This attachment icon is not affected by the Show attachment icons option in the Viewing Mail options window. This attachment icon appears whether Show attachment icons is turned on or off. The Show attachment icons option refers to attachment icons in the open incoming message and the message preview window.

Label Column

This column displays the message label. Labels are assigned to incoming messages by the recipient, either manually or automatically using filters (see Filtering Messages ). When a message summary is assigned a label, the entire summary changes color to match the label color.

Note:	Label colors and titles are assigned using the Labels options window.

Sender/Recipient Column (Who)

This column shows the sender of the message (for incoming messages) or the intended recipients (for outgoing messages).

Note:	Bugs in some POP servers/mail transport systems cause Eudora to display the sender of incoming messages as ???@???. This is because the required From header is missing.

Date Column

This column displays the date and time the message was composed, or, for timed messages, the date and time the message is scheduled to be sent. Date formats, including age-sensitive indications such as the day of the week or “Today,” are set in the Date Display options window .

Size Column (K)

This column displays the size of the message in kilobytes, K (1 K = 1,024 bytes).

Server Status Column (V)

This column displays the action that is done to the corresponding incoming message on the POP server. The next time you check mail, the server status you requested is automatically completed.

Solid diamond indicates that the message has been retrieved.

Open diamond indicates that the message has not yet been retrieved.

Half filled diamond (IMAP only) indicates that the message body is retrieved, but not all attachments.

An “X” indicates that the message is deleted from the server.

An “X” and down arrow indicate the whole message is to be retrieved and then deleted from the server.

Note:	To control the mail transfer, you can also use the Mail Transfer options window. For details, see Checking for Mail with Special Server Instructions.

Subject Column

This column displays the subject of the message. The sender originally typed this information into the message header, but you can modify it (see Editing Incoming Messages).


Displaying and Resizing Columns

To specify which columns you want to be displayed in your mailboxes, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Display. The Display options window appears.

3. 	Check the boxes of the columns you want to see.

4. 	Click OK.

To resize a column in a mailbox window, move the mouse pointer until it is over the column heading divider to the right of the column you want to resize, then drag the divider to the position you want. The column divider moves to the new location, and the mailbox is redrawn.

You can only shrink a column as far as its left divider. If you do that, a double divider line appears in place of the column, and its contents are hidden. To redisplay the column, drag the right divider line to the right.


Using the Mailbox Size Display

In the lower left corner of the message summary part of each mailbox window, three numbers show the size information for that mailbox. The first is the number of messages in the mailbox; the second is the total amount of space those messages require; the third is the amount of disk space that is wasted with the mailbox.

Wasted space is created when messages are deleted from a mailbox. This wasted space is automatically removed when the amount of wasted space in the mailbox is greater than the amount of space the messages in the mailbox use, or if the amount of space wasted in the mailbox is greater than 5% of the free space on the disk drive that contains it.

To manually clean up the wasted space in a mailbox, click the mailbox’s size display. Or, to clean up all your mailboxes, choose Compact Mailboxes from the Special menu.


The Message Preview Pane
Preview Pane

The Preview Pane shows you the full or partial content of a message without opening the message. It is located at the bottom of the list of messages in a mailbox. You can adjust the size of the preview window by placing the cursor on the window frame. Once the cursor changes to a double arrow, you can resize the preview window.

To activate the preview pane, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Viewing Mail . The Viewing Mail options window appears.

3. 	Click the Show message preview pane box.

4. 	Click OK.

The preview pane shows the key headers and the message body of the currently selected message in the message summary list. If the full message body is not visible in the preview window, scroll bars are displayed, allowing you to view the rest of the message. Only one message can be previewed at a time.

Press Tab or F6 to move the keyboard focus from the message summary list to the preview window (and back again). Or simply click in the preview window to put the focus there.

Once keyboard focus is in the preview window, you can do any of the following, as you can in an open incoming message window:

•	Press Space to page down through the message.

•	Use the arrow keys, as set in the Miscellaneous options window (unmodified or with Ctrl or Alt), to switch to the next or previous message in the mailbox.

•	Use standard keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl+R for Reply, Ctrl+D for Delete, and so forth.

•	Right-click anywhere in the preview window to display a drop-down menu with commands appropriate for the previewed message.

•	Click an attachment icon or name to open the attachment.

•	Click a URL (hot link) to launch the application for that URL.

If the Show message preview pane option is turned on in the Viewing Mail options window , you can press F7 to show and hide the preview window within the current mailbox only (this does not control the visibility of the preview window in other mailboxes).

If the Show message preview pane option is off in the Viewing Mail options window , only the message summaries are shown in any mailbox window.

If the preview window option is on and the Mark previewed messages as read after _ second(s) option is turned on in the Viewing Mail options window, then the currently previewed message is marked as read (blank in the Status column) after the specified number of seconds. You can always change the message’s status back to Unread (•) by pressing Shift+Space while the message is selected or open (press again to change back to Read). If the Mark previewed option is off, previewed messages are never automatically marked as read.

Note:	Eudora only performs the auto-marking behavior when you manually switch messages, not when it performs actions such as automatic mail checks or filtering.


Creating Mailboxes and Folders

Eudora lets you create mailboxes to put messages in, and folders to put mailboxes (or more folders) in.

There are three ways to create mailboxes and folders:

•	Using the New command from the Mailbox menu and folder submenus.

•	Using the New command from the drop-down menu in the Mailboxes window (see Using the Mailboxes Window ).

•	Using the New command from the Transfer menu (see Creating a Mailbox or Folder During Transfer ).

Note that depending on whether your incoming mail server uses the POP or IMAP protocol, there are some differences in the way mailboxes and mail folders are created, stored, and managed. For more information, see Mailbox and Folder Management: POP vs. IMAP Server .


Creating a Mailbox or Folder Using the Mailbox Menu

To create a new mailbox or mail folder, do the following:

1. 	From the Mailbox menu, choose New, or from a mail folder submenu (placing the new mailbox in that folder). The New Mailbox dialog box appears.

2. 	To create a mailbox, type in the new mailbox name and click OK. The mailbox is created and added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus and to the Mailboxes window.

3. 	To create a mail folder, type the name of the new mail folder and check the Make it a folder option. Click OK to create the folder. The New Mailbox dialog box appears again. Type the name of a mailbox to create within the new folder, then click OK. The new folder and its mailbox are displayed in the Mailbox and Transfer menus and in the Mailboxes window.


Using the Mailboxes Window

The Mailboxes window lets you create new mailboxes and folders, remove and rename them, and move mailboxes among folders. Mailboxes or folders that are bolded have unread messages.

By default, the Mailboxes window is provided as the first window in a five-window tool group docked vertically to the left side of the main Eudora window.

To open the Mailboxes window, choose Mailboxes from the Tools menu, or click the Mailboxes window tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group. See Window States and Tabbed Windows .

To open a mailbox or folder within the window, double-click it, or click it once and press Enter. You can move among the folders and mailboxes using the up and down arrow keys, or close or open folders using the left and right arrow keys. You can also start typing the name of the mailbox or folder you want, and it is highlighted when you have typed enough unique characters to identify it (the item must be displayed, so a mailbox that is in a closed folder cannot be selected).

Right-click any item in the Mailboxes window and a drop-down menu appears whose commands let you, depending on the item, create, remove, and rename mailboxes and folders, open existing mailboxes and folders, empty the trash from the Trash mailbox, and find messages in mailboxes and folders.

The folder trees displayed in the Mailboxes window, and some of the operations available from the drop-down menu, depend on whether your incoming mail server for one or more mail accounts uses the POP or the IMAP protocol. For more information on these differences, see Mailbox and Folder Management: POP vs. IMAP Server .


Creating a New Mailbox or Folder

To create a new mailbox or folder in the Mailboxes window, do the following:

1. 	From  the Tools menu, choose Mailboxes.

2. 	Right-click the folder. A drop-down menu appears.

3. 	From the drop-down menu, choose New. A dialog box appears requesting the name of the new mailbox or folder.

4. 	Type in the new name, check the Make it a folder option if you want to, and click OK. If you chose to make it a folder, enter the name of the mailbox when the dialog box appears again, and click OK. The new mailbox or folder appears in the lists, and is added to the Mailbox and Transfer menus.


Renaming a Mailbox or Folder

To rename a mailbox or folder, do the following:

1. 	Click the mailbox or folder name once, pause, then click again to highlight just the name.

2. 	Type in the new name. Or, right-click the item and choose Rename, or click the item and press F2, then type in the new name.

3. 	Press Enter to accept your change, or Esc to cancel it.


Moving a Mailbox from One Folder to Another

To move a mailbox from one folder to another, in the Mailboxes window select the one you want to move and drag it to where you want it.


Removing a Mailbox or Folder

To remove a mailbox or folder, either right-click it and choose Delete from the drop-down menu, or click it to highlight it and then press the Delete key.

If you choose to remove a mailbox in which messages are still stored, or a folder in which other mailboxes or folders are stored, you are prompted to confirm the deletion for each such item selected. Click Remove it to delete the current item for which you are being prompted, or click Remove all to remove all items selected for deletion—no further prompts will appear. Or click Cancel to cancel the deletion. If you delete a non-empty mailbox or folder, all messages, mailboxes, and folders contained within the mailbox or folder are also deleted.


Mailbox and Folder Management: POP vs. IMAP Server

The location of your mailboxes and mail folders depends on whether your incoming mail server for your account uses the POP or IMAP protocol.

If your incoming mail server uses POP, then all of your mailboxes and mail folders are created and stored on your computer. If your incoming mail server uses IMAP, then all of your mailboxes and mail folders are created and stored on the IMAP server.

The parallel situation holds true if you have multiple email accounts: mailboxes and folders for all of your POP accounts are stored on your computer; mailboxes and folders for all of your IMAP accounts are stored on the respective IMAP servers.

You create an IMAP server account using the New Account Setup wizard for your dominant personality (see Configuring Eudora ), or using the Account Settings dialog, accessed from the Personalities window, for an alternate personality (see Personalities Window and Account Settings Dialog ).

The Mailboxes window is the main tool for managing your IMAP mailboxes and mail folders. In the Mailboxes window, right-click the folders or mailboxes in an IMAP hierarchy and select an item from the drop-down menu. See “Using the Mailboxes Window” for more information. (The additional commands for IMAP are Refresh Mailbox Command and Resynchronize Mailbox.)

Mail folders stored on an IMAP server can contain not only mailboxes but also messages. Mail folders stored on a POP server can only contain mailboxes, not messages.

Some mailboxes stored on your IMAP server may have been created by others and made accessible to you. For some of these mailboxes you may have both “read and write” permission: that is, you can not only read the messages stored in them but also change or delete the messages. Other mailboxes may give you only “read” permission: you can only read the messages, not change or delete them.

If you have multiple email accounts and the incoming mail servers for all of them use POP, then you will have only one top-level mail folder, named Eudora by default. If the incoming mail server for at least one of your personalities uses IMAP, then you can have multiple top-level mail folders: one to hold mail from all of your POP accounts, and one top-level folder for each of your IMAP accounts. The name of a top-level IMAP folder is the personality name for that IMAP account.

For more information on managing your mail on POP and IMAP servers, see Managing Your Mail on a POP Server. and Managing Your Mail on the IMAP Server.


Deleting a Message

As a safeguard against inadvertent deletions, two steps are used to delete a message from your computer: first you put the message in the Trash, then you empty the Trash. (If your incoming mail server uses IMAP, the procedure is slightly different, as described below.)

POP Procedure

To put a message in the Trash, do the following:

1. 	Select the message.

2. 	From the Message menu, choose Delete, or choose Trash from the Transfer menu, or press the Delete key, or click the Delete toolbar button. The message is transferred to the Trash mailbox.

Note:	To cancel a deletion to the Trash, from the Edit menu, choose Undo.

To delete the messages in the Trash mailbox (removing them permanently from your computer), do the following:

1. 	From the Special menu, choose Empty Trash. Or, if the Mailboxes window is open on your desktop, right-click the Trash mailbox in the window and choose Empty Trash from the drop-down menu.

You can set up Eudora to warn you if you try to delete unread, queued, or unsent messages. To do this, use the Extra Warnings options window found in Options on the Tools menu to turn on those options.

Quitting Eudora empties the contents of the Trash mailbox when the Empty Trash when exiting option in the Miscellaneous options window found in Options on the Tools menu is turned on.

Finally, if you want to delete just a few messages from the Trash mailbox, open the Trash mailbox, select the desired messages, then choose Delete from the Message menu, or press the Delete key. Deleting a message from the Trash removes it completely.

IMAP Procedure

If you have the When I delete a message, move it to Trash option turned off in the Incoming Mail options window (see Incoming Mail Options Window), all new messages are delivered to your IMAP server and are kept there until you actively delete them.

You must perform two steps to remove a message from your computer: first mark it for deletion, then remove marked messages.

To mark for deletion a message stored in an IMAP mailbox or folder, do the following:

1. 	Select the message.

2. 	From the Message menu, choose Delete. To unmark the message for deletion, select it and then choose UnDelete from the Message menu. To remove all messages marked for deletion, choose Remove Deleted Messages from the Message menu. The messages are completely removed not only from your computer but also from the IMAP server.

Note:	Once you remove marked messages using the Remove Deleted Messages command, these messages are gone and cannot be restored! Use this command with caution.


Automatically Deleting Attachments

When you delete messages, you can have their attachments automatically deleted by doing the following,

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2. 	Scroll and select Attachments. The Attachments options window appears.

3. 	Check the Delete attachments when emptying Trash box. Be sure the attachments are still in the Attach Directory (or the directory you have specified for attachments). If you have this option on and want to delete a message but save its attachment, move the attachment into another directory before deleting the message.

4. 	Click OK.


Transferring Messages

You can transfer messages to any of your mailboxes. There are several ways to do this:

•	Select the message(s) you want to transfer, then select a mailbox from the Transfer menu.

•	Select the message(s) you want to transfer, then right-click the selection and choose a mailbox from the transfer submenu.

•	Drag a message summary to an open mailbox window or to a mailbox icon in the Mailboxes window.

To put a copy of a message in another mailbox (instead of transferring the message), hold down the Shift key and use one of the transfer options above. This is useful if you want to file a message in more than one mailbox.

If you try to transfer a message to the Out mailbox an alert appears informing you that some header information may be removed from the message during transfer. Click Yes to transfer the message.

Note:	You can undo mailbox transfers using the Undo command under the Edit menu.


Using the Transfer menu

The Transfer menu is one way to transfer messages among your mailboxes. With a current message open, or message summaries selected, select a mailbox from the Transfer menu. The messages are transferred from their previous mailbox to the mailbox you selected.


Dragging Messages

You can drag messages from one mailbox to another using the message summaries or the Tow Truck icon in an open message window.

•	To drag a message summary to another mailbox, select the message summary (or summaries) and drag the summary into any open or minimized mailbox window, or any mailbox in the Mailboxes window. When you release the mouse button, the message is transferred.

•	To drag an open message to another mailbox, hold down the mouse over the Tow Truck icon and drag the message into any open mailbox or any mailbox in the Mailboxes window. When you release the mouse button, the message is transferred.

When dragging to the Mailboxes window, pause over a closed folder and the folder temporarily opens, making its mailboxes visible so that you can complete the drop operation. The folder closes again when you complete or cancel the drop.

Note:	You can only drag messages around if the Allow drag and drop transfers box is checked in the Miscellaneous options window found in Options on the Tools menu.


Creating a Mailbox or Folder During Transfer

To create a mailbox and transfer the current message into it at the same time, choose New from the Transfer menu instead of the name of a mailbox. The New Mailbox dialog box appears.

You can create a new mailbox or mail folder (for details, see Creating Mailboxes and Folders ). When you are done, the current message is transferred into the new mailbox.

To create the new mailbox without transferring the message into it, check the Don’t transfer, just create mailbox option.


Filtering Messages

Note. If you are using Eudora in Light mode, you may use only a few of the filter functions when filtering messages.

Many of the email management functions in Eudora can be done automatically using filters. For example, you can automatically reply to a request for information, transfer all the messages from your children into a Personal mailbox, and label all the messages from your customers as “Important.”

A filter can be thought of as a personal organizer that takes your mail and does certain things to it that you specify. One kind of organizer might watch for particular mail from a mailing list and move it into a mailbox, open the message, and play a sound. Another might look for other kinds of mail and give it a label color, a high priority, and a new Subject line. You can create as many of these organizers as you like and give each of them from one to five instructions on what to do with your mail that fits a certain set of criteria, based on information in the header of the message and the message body.

For examples, see Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Dialog and Detailed Filters with the Filters Window.


Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Dialog

The simplest filters are those that transfer incoming messages to a particular mailbox based on the sender of the message or one or more of the recipients. For example, each time you check your mail, you may want to have Eudora take all of the incoming messages it receives from your friend Joe and automatically transfer them into a mailbox you’ve called “Mail from Joe.” To get Eudora to do this, you set up a simple filter.

For new users, the Make Filter dialog box provides an easy way to learn how to use filters. Once you get comfortable with the simple filters created this way, you can go on to make more complex, powerful filters using the Filters window. Experienced users will find that the Make Filter dialog box provides a rapid, convenient method for making a simple transfer filter.

To open the Make Filter dialog box and create a simple filter, do the following:

1. 	Open an incoming or outgoing message containing the information you want in your filter, or select one or more message summaries in a mailbox.

2. 	From the Special menu, choose Make Filter. Or, right-click in the body of the open message, or in the selection of message summaries, or in the preview window for a single-selected message, and choose Make Filter from the drop-down menu. The Make Filter dialog box appears with the selected message criteria already entered.

Match Conditions

The Match Conditions area of the dialog box helps you set up the criteria that will determine whether or not a particular message will get acted on by this filter. The two match conditions reflect type and content.

You can specify that the type of messages you are interested in should be Incoming and/or Outgoing. You can also specify that this should be a Manual filter (described below). You can check and uncheck any combination of the three boxes Incoming, Outgoing, and Manual.

Note:	If the messages you selected when you chose Make Filter were in any mailbox other than your Out mailbox, the Incoming and Manual checkboxes are checked automatically. If the messages you selected were in your Out mailbox, the Outgoing and Manual checkboxes are checked automatically.

•	Incoming — If this box is checked, then any incoming message that satisfies the content match condition you specify will be acted on according to the action you’ve specified in this filter.

•	Outgoing — If this box is checked, then any outgoing message that satisfies the content match condition you specify will be acted on according to the action you’ve specified in this filter.

•	Manual — If this box is checked, then, when you select one or more message summaries in a mailbox window and choose Filter Messages from the Special menu, the incoming and/or outgoing messages selected that satisfy the content match condition you specify will be acted on according to the action you’ve specified in this filter. Whether the messages that are manually filtered by this filter are incoming and/or outgoing messages depends on which other box or boxes are checked: Incoming or Outgoing or both.

Note:	If Incoming or Outgoing is checked (or both), the filter is automatic; that is, Eudora performs the filter operation behind the scenes, automatically, when you send or check mail. If you now also check Manual, the filter becomes both automatic and manual; that is, you can now manually perform the filter operation, by selecting Filter Messages from the Special menu while message summaries are selected in a mailbox window—but Eudora will still automatically filter the messages during mail sends and checks. In short, checking Manual does not “turn off” Eudora’s automatic filtering for that filter.

Note:	Making a filter Manual also gives you a good way to test the filter to your needs as soon as you set it up, rather than having to wait until the next time you send or check mail. After creating a manual filter with the Make Filter dialog box, check to see that it does what you want by selecting Filter Messages from the Special menu; your open message or selected message summaries are immediately filtered according to the new filter.

You can choose one of three content matches: From, Any Recipient, or Subject.

Click the From radio button (turned on by default) to match the message against the From field—the sender—of the messages you selected. You can then edit the field. The From field of a target message must contain the information in this box but does not have to exactly equal it. Note that if you selected multiple messages and they do not have a common sender, the From field is unselectable and is left blank.

Click the Any Recipient radio button to match the message against any of the recipients in the messages you selected (recipients are contained in the To and Cc fields and, in an outgoing message, the Bcc field). Choose one recipient from the pulldown menu (accessed from the menu button next to the field), or edit the text in the field. Note that the information you enter in the field must be contained in any of the recipient fields of the target message but does not have to exactly equal any recipient field.

Click the Subject radio button to match the message against the Subject field of the messages you selected. If you have selected multiple messages and they do not have a common Subject, this field is left blank. In either case you can edit the field. The Subject line of a target message must contain the information in this box but does not have to exactly equal it.

Action Area

The Action Area lets you determine the one action that will be performed on messages that satisfy the Match Conditions you’ve specified for this filter. The three action choices are all message-transfer actions; they transfer the filtered message to a mailbox. For messages that satisfy your match conditions, your simple filter will transfer the messages to either a new mailbox, an existing mailbox, or your Trash mailbox.

Click the Transfer to New Mailbox button to transfer the filtered message to a new mailbox that you will specify. The text field is filled in with a suggested new-mailbox name based on your selected content match condition (From, Any Recipient, or Subject). You can change this name if you like. The In Folder field is a label showing you the folder in which your new mailbox will be created. By default, this is the same folder that holds the mailbox containing the messages you’ve selected. The new mailbox is created as soon as you create this filter.

Note:	You can set the value of the In Folder field to your own desired default folders based on the chosen match condition—From, Any Recipient, or Subject—using the three Eudora.ini file entries FilterFromFolder, FilterRecipFolder, and FilterSubjectFolder, respectively. Enter the path as it appears on the mailbox window. For example: FilterFromFolder=mail-lists\entertainment.

Click the Transfer to Existing Mailbox button to transfer the filtered message into one of your existing mailboxes. Select the mailbox from the button next to the field. The default mailbox is the In box. When you click the button, a version of the Transfer menu appears, letting you choose the mailbox from the Transfer menu.

Click the Delete Message (Transfer to Trash) button to delete the message that satisfies the filter match conditions, transferring it to your Trash mailbox. This feature is useful for deleting junk email, or “spam” as it is called in the Internet world.

Buttons

•	Create Filter —  When you have set up your match conditions and filter action, click Create Filter to create the filter. The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list in the Filters window (discussed below). The filter is available immediately and will act on messages that satisfy the conditions at the next mail check, mail send, or selection of the Filter Messages command, as appropriate.

•	Add Details — Alternately, after setting up the filter information, click Add Details to both create your filter and also open the Filters window so that you can add additional information to your new filter and make it more powerful or just change it. The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list and is immediately available in the form in which it was set up in the Make Filter dialog box. Any changes you make in the Filters window must be saved before they become effective. See below for more information on the Filters window.

•	Cancel — Click Cancel to cancel the filter if you change your mind. The filter is canceled and your changes are not saved.


Detailed Filters with the Filters Window

The Make Filter dialog box, discussed in Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Dialog, lets you create quick, simple filters that perform one operation, that is a mail transfer based on one match condition and specific header information. The Filters window lets you create more complex, powerful filters that use multiple match conditions and perform multiple filter actions. (You can also use the Filters window to create simple filters such as those created by the Make Filter dialog box.)

To create or modify a detailed filter, do the following:

1. 	To open the Filters window, from the Tools menu, choose Filters, or click the Filters window’s tab if it is part of a visible tabbed window group. The Filters window appears, and any filters you have created are listed on the left. (For more information on how to manipulate the Filters window alone and as part of a tabbed window, see Window States and Tabbed Windows .)

2. 	Click the New button or select an existing filter.

3. 	Choose the options for how you want the filter to be used, as an automatic filter to be invoked on any Incoming and/or Outgoing mail, and as a Manual filter that can be invoked when you choose Filter Messages from the Special menu. Any combination of these options works.

4. 	Define the criteria for the filter; use the header item drop-downs and the text fields to specify which header items should include a particular string of text. You can define two related terms for the criteria so that your filter is as specific as possible. See Filter Criteria (The Match Area)

5. 	Define the action or actions to be taken on messages that fit the criteria (see Filter Actions ) and save the filters.

Note:	Eudora places a small icon next to the filter, in the filters list on the left, for each action you have selected for that filter—up to five icons/actions per filter.

Note:	Filters are automatically named based on the criteria for the filter. You can re-order them by dragging a filter up or down in the list.

When the filters are invoked (automatically or manually), each message is matched against each filter in order from top to bottom. If the message meets a filter’s criteria, the actions are done as specified until there are no more actions, then the message is matched against the next filter. If at any point a Skip Rest action is done, nothing else is done with that message, and the next message is filtered.

You can change the width of the filters list to create more or less space for your list. To do this, put the arrow over the bar to the right of the list and drag the line to the left or right.

For information on the match conditions and filter actions in the Make Filter dialog box, see Quick and Simple Filters with the Make Filter Dialog.


Filter Criteria (The Match Area)

Each filter in the Filters window can use one or two “terms” as its criteria, connecting them as appropriate with the conjunction drop-down.

Use the Header field to specify which message header items you want the filter to search. You can select an option from the drop-down menu or enter one yourself (this is helpful if you want to use a header item that does not appear on the menu, such as X-Priority). The selections are as follows:

•	To:

•	From:

•	Subject:

•	Cc:

•	Reply-To:

•	<Any Header>

•	<Body>

•	<Any Recipient>

•	<Personality>

The <Any Header> option searches all message headers (including hidden headers that are shown with the BLAH BLAH BLAH option). The <Body> option searches the message body. The <Any Recipient> option searches all possible recipient items (To, Cc, Bcc). The <Personality> option searches the name of the personality (email account) associated with the message.

Use the Match Type drop-down to control how the header item is matched with the text string in the text field. The match options are as follows:

contains or doesn’t contain — If the specified header item contains or does not contain the text string, filter the message.

is or is not — If the specified header item is or is not an exact match of the text string, filter the message.

starts with or ends with — If the specified header item starts with or ends with the text string, filter the message. The starts with item refers to the first non-whitespace character after the colon, so any spaces after the colon are ignored.

appears or doesn’t appear — If the header item appears or does not appear in the message, filter the message (the text field is ignored). This is useful for filtering messages based only on the types of fields they contain. Example: Some messages contain a Reply-To header; some don’t.

intersects nickname — If the text string is included in a nickname (whether it is a full address or a nickname within the nickname), filter the message.

matches regexp (case sensitive) (Sponsored and Paid modes only)—If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters with case sensitivity, filter those messages. See Regular Expressions.

Note. Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text.

Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters. For example, if you are filtering messages sent to you by two people, choose From in the first drop-down options list, then choose matches regexp, then type their usernames between parentheses separated by a vertical slash, for example (bobclark)|(janedoe) in the text box. Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people.  For more information on regular expressions, refer to the readme.txt file in your Eudora folder, or click www.robelle.com/library/smugbook/regexpr.html.

matches regexp—If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters, filter those messages.

Use the Text fields to specify the text strings that the filter is searching for.

Note:	It is recommended that the contents of this field be kept as specific and brief as possible. The greater the complexity, the less likelihood of a match.

Do not enter a header label in the Text field as part of the text string (e.g., To, From, Bcc). For example, to filter all messages from Justine, do not enter From: Justine in the Text field. Rather, select From in the Header field, and enter simply Justine in the Text field (choosing “contains” from the Matching drop-down list to link the two terms.

The conjunction options are as follows:

ignore —  Ignore the second term; if the message matches the first term, filter the message.

and — If the message matches both the first and second terms (but not just one alone), filter it.

or —  If the message matches either term (or both), filter it.

unless —  If the message matches the first term, filter it unless the message also matches the second term, in which case do not filter it. (This lets you exclude certain variations of the first term.)


Filter Actions

For a filter you’re creating or modifying in the Filters window, all messages that match the filter criteria are acted on as specified with the Actions drop-downs. Each filter can do up to five things to a message that matches the criteria. You can use the same action twice if it does not directly affect the original message (for example, Copy To can be used twice, but not Transfer To).

Some filter actions have an associated icon. For these actions, Eudora places the action icon next to the filter in the filters list. Up to five icons can appear per filter.

The Actions options are as follows:

None — No action.

Make Status — Assigns the selected status to message summaries.

Make Priority — Assigns the selected priority level to messages. If you select a set level, messages are set to that priority. If you select Raise or Lower, messages are raised or lowered one priority level based on their prefilter level.

Make Label (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Assigns the selected label to messages. Label colors and names are set in the Labels options window.

Make Personality (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Assigns the selected personality to messages. For outgoing messages, the message is sent from the assigned personality. For incoming messages, all your responses to the message will be from the assigned personality until you change the personality associated with the incoming message or your response. For more information, see Using an Alternate Email Account .

Make Subject — Assigns the new subject to message summaries (does not affect the subject in the message itself). If you choose this option, the entire subject of the message is replaced with the new subject. Use the “&” symbol to stand for the old subject if you want to add the new subject to the old subject. For example, entering New Subject [was &] results in New Subject [was Old Subject].

Play Sound — Plays the selected sound when messages are filtered.

Speak (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— A voice makes you aware when a certain email message is retrieved. The voice can read the name of the sender and the subject line of the message, if you so choose. Also, you can select the type of voice you prefer from a drop-down list that appears. After you select Speak, the Who and Subject fields and a drop-down voice list appear. If these fields are grayed out,  refer to the Eudora ReadMe file. (The ReadMe file is in the same location as the user manual Start>Programs>Eudora Email.)

Open (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Opens the Mailbox and/or Message when a message is received. If you set a previous action to filter messages into a mailbox, then that mailbox is opened.

Print (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Prints one copy of each message.

Notify User (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Notifies you As Normal and/or In Report when messages are received. The As Normal option notifies you based on the options you have selected in the Getting Attention options window. The In Report option notifies you by opening the Filter Report window and displaying in that window a filter report that details what filter actions have been done. See Filter Report Window .

Notify Application — Notifies the selected application when messages are received, and provides information from the message. Specify the application to use and the part of the message to be included.

Use the Browse button to select an application, or enter the command line yourself. The command line should include the path to the executable file, any options, and the following substitution variables, all separated by blank spaces:

%1	Date
%2	To
%3	From
%4	Subject
%5	Cc
%6	The entire message

For example, the command line to send the subject of a message to a pager might look like this:

C:\apps\pager.exe -c %4

Forward To (Sponsored and Paid modes only)— Forwards messages to the email address given. Forwarded messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Redirect To (Sponsored and Paid modes only)—  Redirects messages to the email address given. Redirected messages are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox, and sent the next time you send queued messages.

Reply with — Replies to messages with the selected stationery message. Replies are placed in the queue in the Out mailbox and sent the next time you send queued messages. For more details, see Using Stationery .

Server Options (Sponsored and Paid modes only) — Sets the message’s server status to Fetch and/or Delete (POP server only: see Managing your Mail on a POP Server. ). Sets the message’s server status to Fetch and/or Delete (incoming server only). The Fetch option specifies that the entire message be transferred from the server the next time mail is checked, and the Delete option specifies that the message be deleted from the server the next time mail is checked. If you select both, the message will be transferred and deleted.

Copy To — Copies messages to the selected mailbox.

Transfer To — Transfers messages to the selected mailbox.

Skip Rest — Stops filtering for the message (the message is not matched to the rest of the filters in the filter list).


Sorting Messages Within Mailboxes

The message summaries in mailboxes are automatically sorted by date, in ascending order (the newest messages at the bottom of the mailbox). To change this, select the appropriate command from the Sort submenu under the Edit menu. Or, click any of the column headings to sort by that column. To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and either select a command from the Sort submenu or click the column headings.

Mailboxes are sorted based on the previous state of the mailbox. For example, if a mailbox is sorted by Date, and then you sort by Sender, the messages are grouped by sender and each group is in order by date.

Note:	Sometimes sorting by Date can be incorrect. This usually happens if the messages have incorrectly formatted date fields, or unknown or incorrect time zones.

See the Date Display options window for information on age-sensitive indications that might appear in the Date column, such as the day of the week or “Today.”


Finding Text Within One Message

To search for text within a single message, do the following:

1. 	Open the message and make sure it is current (active).

2. 	From the Edit menu, choose Find.

3. 	From the submenu, select the Find Text command or press Ctrl+Shift+F. The Find dialog box appears with the blinking insertion point located in the text field.

4. 	In the text field, type the text you want to find. When finished entering the desired text, click the Find button.

Starting at the cursor’s current position in the message, Eudora searches the current message for the specified text. If no match is found, the not found alert appears.

If the search is successful, the message is scrolled to the first point where the match is found and the matching text is highlighted.

To continue searching in the same message for the next occurrence of the text, click the Find Next button.


Match Case

Normally, Eudora ignores capitalization when searching. If you want Eudora to consider capitalization when searching, check the Match case option in the Find dialog box. When this option is checked, Eudora searches for exact matches of character strings, including any capitalization.


Enter Selection Command

If you don’t want to actually type the text in the Find dialog box (for example, the text is very long or complex), highlight it in an existing message, and then either choose Enter Selection from the Find submenu, or press Alt+F3. This automatically inserts the selected text at the insertion point in the Find dialog box. Then, click the Find button in the Find dialog box, or select the Find command from the Find submenu, to start the search.


Stopping a Find

If you want to stop Eudora from continuing a search, click the Stop button in the progress window or press the Esc key.


Saving a Message to a File

You can save a message to a separate text file on your computer by doing the following:

1. 	Open or select the messages you want to save.

2. 	From the File menu, choose Save As. The Save As dialog box appears.

3. 	Enter the name you want to give the text file, and select the appropriate options.

Important:	Be sure to change the Save as type option to Text Files.

Include Headers retains the first message’s header information in the saved document. If this is not checked, only the body of the messages is saved.

Guess Paragraphs removes extraneous carriage returns from the message, leaving returns only at the ends of paragraphs, and converts multiple spaces into tabs.

4.    Once you’ve made all of your choices, click the Save button in the dialog box.

If you select multiple messages from a mailbox window and choose Save As, all of the messages are saved to a single file.


Window States and Tabbed Windows

There are three types of windows in Eudora: Normal Windows, Docked Windows, or Floating Windows.

A tabbed window is a collection of windows combined into a single window in which each window has its own tab, for activating and dragging. A tabbed window can exist in any of the three window states, normal, docked, or floating. See Tabbed Windows.

Note that only tool windows — those windows accessible from the Tools menu (excluding the Options dialog box)  can exist as docked windows, floating windows, and tabbed windows. All other windows in Eudora, particularly mailbox windows and message windows, exist only in the normal state and cannot be combined into tabbed windows.

The tool windows that can be docked, floating, or tabbed are as follows, in order down the Tools menu:

•	Filters

•	Filter Report

•	Mailboxes

•	File Browser

•	Stationery

•	Signatures

•	Personalities

•	Task Status

•	Task Error

•	Address Book

•	Directory Services

•	Link History

Note:	If you minimize and then restore the main Eudora window, then all normal, docked, and floating Eudora windows — including tabbed windows — are also minimized and restored with it.

Note:	Unlike in previous versions of Eudora, closing a tool window does not erase its contents, unless the contents can be saved, and you choose to discard changes. When you close a tool window or a tabbed window, the content, state, and position of the window or of all windows in the tabbed window are preserved. The preservation of content is useful for “persistent data” such as filter reports and directory service queries. If you try to close or de-activate a tool or tabbed window with unsaved changes, Eudora asks you if you want to save the changes.


Normal Windows

A window is said to be in the normal state if it is restricted to the window work area of the main Eudora window and cannot be dragged out of the main window.

Normal windows can be moved around within the window work area. They can also be minimized and maximized to completely fill the visible window work area. When a normal window is maximized, its title bar partially blends with the main window title bar.

Normal windows can overlap other normal windows and are obscured by both docked and floating windows.

The title bar of a normal window contains the window-menu icon (far left) and three window buttons: minimize/restore, maximize/restore, and close.

A tool window in the normal state, whether alone or in a tabbed group, can be dragged out of the confines of the main Eudora window, but it must first be converted to a dockable or floating window. To perform this conversion, right-click the window’s border or tab, uncheck (turn off) Float In Main Window on the context menu, then select (turn on) Allow Docking on the menu.

A nontool window in the normal state, such as a mailbox window or a message window, can never be dragged out of the confines of the main Eudora window.

To convert a docked or floating window to a normal window, right-click the docked or floating window’s border or tab, and choose Float In Main Window from the context menu.


Docked Windows

A window is said to be dockable if it is capable of being attached to one of the four edges of the main Eudora window. A window is said to be in the docked state if it is currently attached to one such edge.

Note:	Some application programs identify the docking feature by words such as “gravity,” “snap,” “glue,” “sticky,” “join,” and the like.

Only tool windows as described in Window States and Tabbed Windows , whether alone or tabbed, are dockable. All other windows in Eudora, particularly message windows and mailbox windows, are not dockable.

Note:	The main toolbar, although not a window, is also dockable, to any edge of the main Eudora window or to another dockable window.

Dockable windows can be docked to any edge of the main Eudora window and to each other. You can also dock multiple windows along a single edge of the main window.

When you dock a window to the main window, the visible window work area is reduced. Docked windows cannot be obscured by normal windows, but they can be obscured by floating windows.

To make a window dockable, do the following:

1. 	Right-click the window’s border or tab and make sure the Float In Main Window command is unchecked (off) on the context menu.

2. 	Select (check) the Allow Docking command on the menu.

3. 	To dock the window, drag the window to an edge of the main Eudora window or to another docked window, and when the ghosted docking rectangle appears indicating that the window will be docked, release the mouse button. The window attaches to the main window edge or the other window.

Note: If you want to move a docked window to another location, right-click in the docked window to display the context menu.  Uncheck Allow Docking and check Float in Main Window. After the window changes shape, right-click again and check Allow Docking. Move the window to where you want it.

Some windows are more convenient to use when docked vertically (tall and skinny), while others are more convenient to use when docked horizontally (short and wide). Examples of windows that work better as tall-and-skinny windows are the Mailboxes window and the File Browser window. Examples of windows that work better as short-and-wide windows are the Personalities window and the Filter Report window.

Following are descriptions of the controls in docked windows.

The Gripper Bar

The gripper bar, also called the grab handle, is the double line at one edge of the docked window. Drag the window by the gripper bar to undock it from the main window frame. The window now floats; you can leave it as a floating window, or you can dock it to any edge of the main window or to another docked window.

Note:	The toolbar has a gripper bar.

The Zoom Bar

When two or more windows are docked on the same edge of the main window, Eudora activates each window’s zoom button. This button appears next to the “x” close button and contains a small triangle. Click the zoom button to minimize, maximize, or restore the width or height of that docked window relative to the other docked windows adjacent to it.

The Close Button

The close button contains an “x” and appears next to the zoom button. Click the close button to close the docked window.

The Resize Bar

When two windows are docked side by side along one edge of the main window, a bar appears between them, called the resize bar. Drag this bar up or down, or to the left or right, as appropriate, to enlarge one of the docked windows and reduce the other.


Floating Windows

A window is said to be in the floating state if it floats above the main Eudora window and can be placed anywhere on the desktop, including outside the main Eudora window. In this way a floating window is a standard Windows “Always on Top” window, like tool palettes in paint programs.

Only tool windows as described in Window States and Tabbed Windows, whether alone or tabbed, can be made to float. All other windows in Eudora, particularly message windows and mailbox windows, cannot be made to float.

All windows in Eudora can be thought of as “living” in one of three layers or areas:

•	Normal windows live in the window work area, at the bottom layer.

•	Docked windows live at the level of the main Eudora window’s border, the middle layer.

•	Floating windows live at the level above the main Eudora window, the top layer.

Therefore, a floating Eudora window floats above all other Eudora windows except other floating windows.

The title bar of a floating window contains, in addition to the title, only the close button. This distinguishes the window from a normal window when both appear to be in the window work area; a normal window’s title bar contains the window-menu icon (left) and three buttons. But also note that a floating window can be dragged outside of the main Eudora window, whereas a normal window cannot.

You can diagonally resize any floating window in Eudora. Simply position the pointer over any window corner, and click and drag to enlarge or reduce.

To convert a window to a floating window, either undock it from the main window, if it is docked, or do the following: right-click the window’s border or tab, make sure the Float In Main Window command is unchecked (turned off) on the context menu, then turn off (uncheck) the Allow Docking command on the menu. For a docked window, you can also temporarily override the Allow Docking command and suspend docking by holding down the Ctrl key while dragging the window. The window drags as a floating window.


Tabbed Windows

A tabbed window is a collection of windows combined into one window; that is, windows accessed from the Tools menu. Each tool window in the tabbed window has its own window tab.

A window tab has two purposes:

•	It lets you bring the window to the front of the group to display it (by clicking the tab).

•	It serves as a “drag handle” that lets you drag the window from one tabbed window to another, so that you can reorganize your tabbed windows and create new tabbed windows.

Only tool windows are accessible from the Tools menu except for Options and are capable of being combined into a tabbed window. All other windows in Eudora, particularly mailbox windows and message windows, are not capable of being combined into a tabbed window.

A tabbed window can be in any of the three window states, normal, docked, or floating, and you can convert a tabbed window from any state to any other state.

If a tabbed window shows a title bar, the title in the bar is the name of the active window in the group.

With the combined windows, you are able to change the order of the tabbed windows. You can even move a tabbed window between two main windows. To move a tabbed window to the front of the list (the topmost is always displayed), drag and drop the tab to the far-left of the tabbed window group. As you drag the tabbed window, you will see an outline of the action of moving the tabbed window. When you see the long, vertical up arrow, you can insert the window into the new position.


Default Tabbed Windows

Eudora comes with two default tabbed windows that together include all eleven tool windows.

The first default is a vertically oriented tabbed window that is docked to the left side of the main window and contains the following five tool windows, with tabs in left-to-right order:

•	Mailboxes Window

•	File Browser Window

•	Stationery Window

•	Signatures Window

•	Personalities Window

The second default  tabbed window is a normal window that contains these four tool windows, with tabs in left-to-right order (to display this window, display one of the member windows from the Tools menu):

•	Directory Services Window

•	Address Book

•	Filters Window

•	Filter Report Window

The third default tabbed window is a docked window that contains two tool windows, with tabs on the left side in top to bottom order. To display this window, display one of the member windows from the Tools menu.

•	Task Status Window

•	Task Errors Window

Note:	The far-left window is the default window that will display. To change this default window, select the window you want to display as the default, and drag it to the far-left tabbed window grouping. See Reorganizing Tabbed Windows for more information.

You can reorganize these default tabbed windows any way you like. Your new organization will be preserved when you quit and restart Eudora.

Note:	Due to file format incompatibilities, if you upgrade from a pre-4.0 version of Eudora you will lose the previous docking state of your Mailboxes window and toolbar. Eudora will reset the toolbar and docking states to the default configuration noted above. However, customized toolbar information is preserved; only the size and location of your toolbar may change.


Opening and Activating Tabbed Windows

To open a tabbed window that’s hidden, open any of its member windows by selecting the appropriate command from the Tools menu. The tabbed window opens with the selected window as the active (frontmost) window.

If the tabbed window is already visible, and you wish to display one of its member windows that is currently not active, simply click the member window’s tab. You can also select the appropriate item from the Tools menu. The desired window comes to the front of the tabbed group.

You can also use the tool window’s keyboard shortcut, if it has one, to open or activate the tool window in its tabbed window.


Reorganizing Tabbed Windows

You are not restricted to the default tabbed window arrangements supplied with Eudora. You can mix and match tabbed windows any way you like.

At one extreme, you can have each of the nine tool windows in its own container with its own tab. At the other extreme, you can have all nine tool windows combined into one tabbed window. In between, you can have multiple tabbed windows open at once, mixed and matched to suit your purposes.

To move a window from one tabbed group to another, drag the window tab from the first group and drop it onto the second.

While the drag operation is in progress, the cursor changes and Eudora displays a small ghosted rectangle when you are over a valid drop location.

If you drop the window tab onto another tab in the second group, the new window tab is inserted at that position and the other tabs are displaced to accommodate it. If you don’t drop the tab onto an existing tab, Eudora adds the new tab at the “end” of the group of existing tabs, where that end depends on the location of the tabs in the tabbed window: top, bottom (the default), left, or right. For example, with tabs along the bottom, the “end” is the far right.

Note that the relocated window takes on the window state — normal, docked, or floating — of the destination tabbed window.

To reorganize the left-to-right or top-to-bottom order of tabs within a tabbed window, just drag the tabs left and right or top and bottom. The drop scheme is the same as that described above.


Creating a New Tabbed Window

To create a new tabbed window, do the following:

1. 	Drag one of the tabs from an existing tabbed window.

2. 	Drop it onto an exposed portion of the window work area. If the window work area is completely obscured (for example, a normal window is maximized), then drop the tab onto the status bar.

The dropped window converts into a normal tabbed window with a single tab.

To convert the window to docked or floating, do the following:

1. 	Right-click the tab or the window border.

2. 	On the context menu, uncheck Float In Main Window.

3. 	Check the Allow Docking command on the menu to make the window dockable.

4. 	While dragging the floating or docked window, hold down the Ctrl key to temporarily suspend docking behavior. When you release the key, docking behavior resumes.


Tab Display in Single-Tabbed Windows

If a tool window is in a tabbed window by itself, with one tab, you can hide or show the tab by doing the following:

1. 	Right-click the tab or the window border to display the context menu.

2. 	From the Tab Location submenu, select  Show Single Tab.

Note:	You cannot hide the tabs in a tabbed window with two or more tabs.


Tab Contents, Location, Auto-Activation

•	Tab Contents — A window tab contains both the icon and the text label associated with that window. If there is room enough in the tabbed window, both the icon and the label are displayed on each tab. If there is not enough room, only the icon appears for each tab. If only the icon is visible, pause the mouse pointer over the tab icon, and Eudora will display the tab text in a tool tip.

•	Tab Location — By default, Eudora arranges window tabs along the bottom edge of a tabbed window. Sometimes it is more convenient to have the tabs displayed along a different edge. For example, in a short-and-wide tabbed window (one that is docked horizontally), you can improve the visibility of the window’s contents by moving the tabs to the right edge. To change the location of the tabs in a tabbed window, right-click the tabs or on the window border, and select a new location from the Tab Location submenu of the context menu.

•	Tab Auto-Activation — During a drag and drop operation, if you pause the mouse pointer over the tab of an inactive window in a tabbed window, that window becomes active (is brought to the front), and you can complete the drop. For example, if you drag received messages to the Mailboxes window when it is inactive in a tabbed window, pause the pointer over the Mailboxes window’s tab; the window is made active and you can drop the messages in a mailbox. Note that tab auto-activation is disabled when you are dragging a tool window tab.


Closing Tabbed Windows

To close a tabbed window, click the “x” close button in the corner of the window.

Alternately, right-click any tab in the window, or on the window border, and choose Hide from the context menu.

Note that when you close or hide a tabbed window, the contents of all member windows, and the state and position of the tabbed window, are all preserved. When you redisplay the tabbed window, the active window shows its prior contents and the tabbed window appears in its prior state and position.

However, if you attempt to close or hide a tabbed window in which the active window contains unsaved changes, or you attempt to deactivate that active window by making another window active in the group, Eudora asks you if you want to save your changes.


Window Context Menu

If you right-click the tab or border of a single tool window, or on any tab or the border of a tabbed window, Eudora displays a context menu containing window-management commands.

The commands on the context menu are described below.

Note that if you right-click in the interior of some tool windows, and sometimes on an item in the window itself, these window-management commands appear at the bottom of the context menu specific to that tool window.

Tab Location

This submenu is always available on the window context menu. It lets you change the location of the tabs in a tabbed window, and lets you show and hide the tab in a single-tabbed window.

By default, Eudora places window tabs at the bottom of a tabbed window. Choose Top, Bottom, Left, or Right from this submenu to move the tabs to the top of the tabbed window, the bottom, or the left or right side. Eudora places a bullet (radio button) next to the current tab location selection.

Changing tab locations can sometimes increase the visible space within a tabbed window. For example, a short-and-wide tabbed window (one docked horizontally) might show more content if you move the tabs to the right side.

Show Single Tab is available in a single-tabbed window, and lets you show or hide the tab. A checkmark next to the command indicates that the tab is shown (the default). This command is not available in a tabbed window containing two or more tabs; you cannot hide the tabs in such a window.

Allow Docking

This command controls the ability to dock of floating and docked windows. It is available only when the Float In Main Window command is turned off (unchecked). It is not available for normal windows (that is, when Float In Main Window is turned on).

A checkmark next to the command indicates that it is on.

When this command is on for a docked or floating window, the window can be docked to any edge of the main Eudora window.

When Allow Docking is turned off for a docked window, the window is converted to a floating window and cannot be redocked. When the command is turned off for a floating window, the window cannot be docked.

Even with Allow Docking on, you can hold down the Ctrl key while dragging a docked or floating window to suspend its ability to dock until you release the key.

Hide

This command is always available on the context menu.

Choose Hide to hide (close) the tool window or tabbed window. Hide performs the same function as the Close command (Ctrl+F4) on the standard MS Windows window context menu.

Note, however, that when you hide or close a tool window, its content, state, and position are all preserved. And when you hide or close a tabbed window, the content, state, and position of all member windows are preserved. Thus, if you hide and redisplay a floating tabbed window, the window floats in its same position.

If you attempt to hide or close a tool window that contains unsaved changes, or a tabbed window in which the active window contains unsaved changes, Eudora asks you if you want to save your changes.

To redisplay a tool window after you’ve hidden it, select it from the Tools menu. To redisplay a tabbed window after you’ve hidden it, select one of its member windows from the Tools menu. The tabbed window redisplays with the selected window active. You can use keyboard shortcuts to redisplay hidden tool or tabbed windows where appropriate.

Float In Main Window

This command is always available on the context menu.

Turning this command on (indicated by a checkmark next to the command) converts a docked or floating window to a normal window. Turning this command off converts a normal window to a docked or floating window.

Note that the availability of the Allow Docking command depends on the state of this command. When Float In Main Window is turned on (checked), Allow Docking is unavailable (the window is normal). When Float In Main Window is turned off, Allow Docking is available.


Filter Report Window

If the Generate Filter Report option is turned on in the Getting Attention options window found in Options under the Tools menu, Eudora generates a filter report. This report can be viewed in the Filter Report window found under the Tools menu.

To open the Filter Report window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Filter Report. Or, if the Filter Report window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab.

If filter report generation is enabled via the option mentioned above, then each time a filter operation is performed, Eudora adds the entry or entries to the Filter Report window and activates the window.

The Filter Report window displays three columns of data:

•	Mailbox — Lists the names of the mailboxes into which messages have been filtered during the current Eudora session. Each listing represents one filter operation for that mailbox.

•	Messages — For each mailbox listed in the Mailbox column, lists the number of messages filtered into that mailbox during the filter operation.

•	Time — For each mailbox listed in the Mailbox column, lists the time that the messages were filtered into that mailbox during the filter operation.

By default, the entries in the window are sorted by time. However, you can click the column headings and sort the display by mailbox names (Mailbox) or by the number of messages filtered (Messages).

Note:	Whenever new entries are added to the list, Eudora always appends them to the bottom of the list in order of arrival, ignoring the current sort order. Simply click a column heading to re-sort.

Select one or more entries in the list and double-click the selection, or press Enter, and Eudora opens the mailbox windows associated with those selections.

The Filter Report listing is a cumulative log of the filter actions for the current Eudora session. Eudora automatically clears the log when you quit the program.

Closing the Filter Report window does not erase the contents of the filter report, as it did in previous versions of Eudora. Only quitting Eudora erases this information.


File Browser Window

Use this window to browse the Windows desktop. You can use this window to find files to attach to new outgoing messages, for example.

To open the File Browser window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose File Browser. Or, if the File Browser window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab.

The File Browser window performs some, but not all, of the functions of the standard Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0 Explorer programs.

The File Browser window contains three controls:

•	Drive Selector (top box) — A drop-down menu in this field contains a fixed set of high-level folders on your system, just like the corresponding control in Windows Explorer. The Drive Selector field determines what gets displayed in the Folder Browser (middle section). When you first launch Eudora, the Drive Selector automatically sets itself to the drive containing your Windows folder. Note that the first entry in the drop-down menu is a shortcut called “My Attachments” that points to your Eudora attachments folder.

•	Folder Browser (middle section) — This is a tree control that displays the folder hierarchy whose root is the selection entered in the Drive Selector field. For example, if in the Drive Selector box you choose the C: drive, then the Folder Browser displays the folder tree-hierarchy branching down from the C: drive folder. Right-click a folder item in the Folder Browser to display the standard Windows context menu for that folder.

•	File List (bottom section) — This is a list control that displays the files contained in the folder selected in the Folder Browser. You can select one or more file items in the list, then right-click the selection to display the standard Windows context menu for those files. (Note: Eudora does not fill in the Send To submenu on the context menu.) When selecting multiple items, use the Shift key to select a range of items, and use the Ctrl key for nonconsecutive selections.

The File List control shows these four columns:

•	Name — Displays the name of the file and the icon associated with the file.

•	Type — Based on the file name extension, displays the file type as set in the Options dialog box of Windows Explorer.

•	Size — Displays the size of the file in kilobytes (K), where 1K = 1,024 bytes.

•	Modified — Displays the date and time that the file was last modified.

As in Windows Explorer, you can click any of the four column headings to sort the listing by the data in that column.

You can also resize the widths of the columns by dragging the separator line between the column heading labels. Position the pointer over the separator until you see a splitter cursor, then drag the line to left or right.

In the File List control, double-click an item in the Name column, or select one or more items in the column and press Enter, to open the selected items. For program files, this action launches the program. For document files, this action generally launches the registered viewing or editing application for that document. Eudora displays an error dialog box if it is unable to open a file in this way.

To adjust the relative heights of the Folder Browser and File List controls, position the pointer over the separator bar between the Folder Browser and File List controls until the splitter cursor appears, then click and drag the separator up or down. Note that the File Browser window maintains a minimum height for the Folder Browser and File List controls, so you cannot close them all the way.

To manually refresh the File Browser window display, right-click anywhere in the File Browser window but not on a Folder Browser item or File List item, then choose Refresh from the context menu. (Tip: A good place to right-click is in the Drive Selector box.) Alternately, press the F5 key while keyboard focus is in the File Browser window.

You can select one or more files in the File List control and drag them to a message composition window to attach those files to that outgoing message. This is especially handy if you keep the File Browser window docked and open. (For multiple file selections, use the Shift key to select a range, and use the Ctrl key to make nonconsecutive selections.)

You can also select one or more items in the File List control and drag them to another application that can receive such files.

In general, the File Browser window lets you drag items out of the window (copying them rather than moving them), but the window is not a proper drop target; you cannot drop items into the window that you’ve dragged from elsewhere on your desktop. In particular, you cannot move files by dragging them to a target folder in the Folder Browser control. You also cannot drag and drop items within the File Browser window (from one control to another, for example). You can, however, manage the files and folders in the window using the commands on the window’s context menu, such as Cut, Copy, Paste, and Delete.


Stationery Window

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Use this window to manage and apply stationery.

To open the Stationery window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Stationery. Or, if the Stationery window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab.

The Stationery window displays a single-column list of your stationery files.

Note:	You can only select one item at a time in the list; you cannot select multiple items.

If you right-click a stationery item in the list, a context menu appears with the following commands (the standard Eudora window-management commands appear at the bottom):

•	New — Create a new piece of stationery (a new stationery file). An untitled stationery window opens; enter the stationery name and from the File menu, choose Save As Stationery.

•	Edit — Open an editing window for the selected stationery item. Make your changes and from the File menu, choose Save As Stationery, or close without saving to discard your changes.

•	Delete — Delete the selected stationery item. Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion. Use the Del key (Delete) as a shortcut for this command.

•	Rename — Rename the selected stationery file. Use the F2 key as a shortcut for this command, or click the stationery file’s name box, then edit the name right in the box.

•	New Message With — Create a new message with the selected stationery. As a shortcut for this command, either select the stationery item and press Enter, or just double-click the stationery item.

•	Reply With — Reply with the selected stationery to the sender(s) of the received messages that are currently selected.

•	Reply to All With — Reply with the selected stationery to the sender(s) and all recipients of the received messages that are currently selected.

You can also display the context menu and create new stationery by right-clicking anywhere in an empty Stationery window or by right-clicking anywhere off a stationery item in a non-empty Stationery window.


Personalities Window

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Use this window to manage, access, and apply your email accounts — “multiple personalities” — when you use more than one account.

To open the Personalities window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Personalities. Or, if the Personalities window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab.

Note:	The Personalities window replaces the Personalities window of the Options dialog box that appeared in previous versions of Eudora.

The Personalities window displays two columns of data:

•	Persona — The identifying name assigned to the personality. <Dominant> indicates your principal email account, which is the account Eudora uses whenever you don’t specify otherwise, and is the account associated with all mail stored before you began using alternate personalities.

•	Account — The incoming mail account assigned to the personality. This is generally in the form loginname@incomingmailserver. (See Account Settings Dialog .)

To resize the column widths, position the pointer over the divider line between the column headings until a splitter cursor appears. Then just drag the divider to left or right. Note that it is possible to completely collapse the Persona column.

Note:	You cannot manually sort the information in the Personalities window. Clicking a column heading does not do a sort

Note:	You can select multiple items in the Persona column to perform some of the operations listed below. Use the Shift key to select a range of items, and use the Ctrl key to make nonconsecutive selections.

If you select one or more personalities in the Persona column and right-click the selection, a context menu appears with the following commands (the standard Eudora window-management commands appear at the bottom):

•	Check Mail — Check mail now for all selected personalities.

•	Send Queued Messages — Send messages queued by all selected personalities now.

•	Message — This submenu lets you perform message-creation functions using only one selected personality. The submenu is unavailable if multiple personalities are selected in the Persona column.

-	New Message As — Create a new message as the selected personality. As a shortcut for this command, double-click a personality in the Persona column, or select the personality and press Enter.

-	Reply As — Reply as the selected personality to the sender(s) of the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Reply to All As — Reply as the selected personality to the sender(s) and all recipients of the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Forward As — Forward as the selected personality the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Redirect As — Redirect as the selected personality the one or more received messages that are currently selected.

-	Send Again As — Resend as the selected personality the one or more received or composition messages that are currently selected.

•	New — Create a new personality. When you select this command, Eudora walks you through the New Account Wizard. Enter a Personality Name (e.g., My Laptop Account) and click Next. You then have the choice to create a new email account or import the settings from an existing email account — that is, “clone” an existing personality. If you choose a new email account, Eudora asks you for your name, your return email address, your login name, and your incoming email server (POP or IMAP). Fill in each item as instructed. If you choose to import the settings from an existing email account (clone a personality), Eudora asks you to choose the account to clone, then asks you to confirm the settings and optionally change them. If you leave them unchanged, the cloned account is created when you click Finish. If you choose to change them, Eudora walks you through the settings as above: name, return address, login name, and incoming email server. Change these settings as desired, and when you are complete, the new account is created.

•	Modify — Modify the selected personality. You can only modify one personality at a time. When you select this command, the Account Settings dialog displays, with its fields filled in with the information associated with that personality. See the description of this dialog box below.

•	Delete — Delete all selected personalities. Note, however, that you cannot delete the <Dominant> personality. You are prompted to confirm the deletion for each personality you have selected to delete. Note that these deletions are permanent and cannot be undone! When you delete a personality, any messages associated with that personality are reassigned to your Dominant personality. You can use the Del or Delete key as a shortcut for this command (you will still get the confirmation requests).

You can also display the context menu and create a new personality by right-clicking in a blank area of the Personalities window, off all personality items, when none of the items is selected. When creating a new personality this way, you are walked through the New Account Wizard as in the description of the New command above.

If you drag one or more received messages to a personality item in the Personalities window, Eudora will Reply As that personality to the messages (hold down the Ctrl key to Reply to All As).


Account Settings Dialog

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

This tabbed dialog box appears when you select Skip directly to advanced account setup from the New Account Wizard Account Settings window, or when you choose Properties from the drop-down context menu in the Personalities window. When you display the dialog box, enter the information in the fields. If you are modifying an existing personality, the fields are filled in with the information associated with the personality you have selected.

After you make your changes in the dialog box, click OK to save them, Cancel to discard them, or Help for more help.

Any changes you make to your dominant personality in this dialog box are also changed where they are mirrored in relevant options of the Options dialog box. The same is true in reverse; changes you make in the Options dialog box are carried over here, when you next open this dialog box.

Generic Properties

This dialog box window contains the general characteristics associated with this personality.

Following are the field descriptions for Generic Properties panel.

Personality Name—This is a label that shows the name assigned to the personality being modified (for example, Business or My PC Account). <Dominant> indicates your dominant personality.

Your dominant personality is your principal email account; it’s the personality Eudora uses whenever you don’t specify otherwise, and it’s also the personality associated with all mail stored before you began using alternate personalities.

Note that the name shown here may be different from the Real Name associated with the personality (see below).

Traits:

Real Name—This is the real name assigned to this personality—generally a first and last name. The text you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this personality and identifies the source to your recipients.

Return Address—This is the return email address used in outgoing messages and recipients’ replies for this personality, if this address is different from the personality’s incoming mail account. The address you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this personality, and when a recipient replies to a message from this personality, the reply is sent to this address. If you do not enter an address in this field, Eudora uses the personality’s incoming mail account as the return address. Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form loginname@incomingmailserver. For example, suppose your incoming mail account is rclark@worldmail.myfirm.com but your return address is rclark@myfirm.com — slightly different. You would then enter rclark@myfirm.com in this field.

Note:	If you do enter an address in this field, first test the address to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you. If you use an invalid return address, no one will be able to reply to mail sent from this personality.

Login Name—This is the name you use to login to this email account, for accounts that require a user login. For example, in the incoming mail account rclark@worldmail.myfirm.com, the login name is rclark. The part after the “@” sign is the name of the incoming mail server. See Incoming Mail Options Window.

SMTP Server—This is the name of the outgoing-mail server for this personality. SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Outgoing messages you send are routed through this server. If the computer that this personality’s incoming mail account selected also runs an SMTP server, you can leave this field blank. See Sending Mail Options Window.

Allow authentication— Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail, just like it does for receiving mail. Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication. Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it. The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM-MD5. If CRAM-MD5 is not available, LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used.

Default Domain—This is the domain name that Eudora automatically adds to an unqualified name addressed in messages sent from this personality. An unqualified name is a name that doesn’t have an “@” sign followed by a domain name. This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain. Also, different personalities can be used to send messages to different domains. For example, you can use one personality to send work-related messages to the domain myfirm.com, and another personality to send personal messages to the domain in your home email address, or to your school account (for example, myschool.edu).

Default Stationery—The default stationery to use for all outgoing messages sent from this personality. Select a stationery file from the drop-down menu, or select <No Default> for no default stationery. For more details about using stationery with alternate personalities, see Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality and Sending Mail Options Window.

Default Signature—This sets the default signature to use for all outgoing messages sent from this personality, but only when you are not using stationery — that is, only when the Default Stationery drop-down menu (above) is set to <NoDefault>. If you have chosen a stationery file, then the signature used when that stationery file was saved overrides your setting here.

Select a signature from this drop-down menu, or select <No Default> for no default signature. If you select a signature, Eudora automatically attaches that signature to the end of all outgoing messages sent from this personality. You can always change the signature in a particular outgoing message using the Signature drop-down in the composition window. For more details about using signatures with alternate personalities, see Using a Signature and Sending Mail Options Window.

Check Mail—If this is selected, mail checking is activated for this personality in the following ways:

•	If you have specified a number in the Check for mail every _ minutes option in the Checking Mail options window, then when automatic mail-checks are performed at these intervals, mail for this personality is checked as well.

•	Each time you do a manual check for mail, by choosing the Check Mail command from the File menu or via another method, mail is checked for this personality as well.

If this option is deselected, mail for this personality is not checked during manual or automatic mail checks, except that you can override the setting and still check for the personality’s mail using the Mail Transfer Options window or using the “Check Mail” command from the Personalities window’s drop-down context menu.

Incoming Mail

This panel contains settings that identify and configure the incoming mail server to be used in receiving mail for this account.

When Configuration = POP:

Following are field descriptions for the Incoming Mail panel (POP configuration):

Server—This is the name of the incoming-mail server for this personality. All incoming messages to this personality are routed through this server.

Configuration—This indicates which email protocol the incoming mail server uses: POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol). Ask your email administrator which one to use, if you are not sure.

The settings in the rest of this panel depend on whether you’ve chosen POP or IMAP in this field. Settings for both configurations are described below.

Leave mail on server—If this is selected, then during mail checks, incoming mail for this personality is left on the incoming mail server and a copy is transferred to your computer. If this is deselected, then when mail is checked, incoming mail for this personality is deleted from the incoming mail server after it is transferred to your computer. For more details, see Managing your Mail on a POP Server.

Delete from server after _ days—This option has a check box for selecting or deselecting and an edit box for specifying the number of days mail that was left on the POP server should be saved before being deleted. It is a good idea not to leave copies of your messages on the POP server indefinitely because this will create mail storage problems on the server.

Delete from server when emptied from Trash—If this is selected, any messages that are deleted from your Trash mailbox are also deleted from the POP server. For details, see Managing your Mail on a POP Server..

Skip messages over _ K in size—If this is selected, messages over the specified size are downloaded only in part. These messages include the first few lines, and a statement that says the message is not complete. This can be useful on slow connections. For details, see Managing your Mail on a POP Server..

Authentication style—This specifies which POP account authentication technology to use for this personality: Passwords, Kerberos, APOP, or RPA. Ask your email administrator which one to use. If you use Eudora at home, most likely your Authentication Style is Password. CompuServe users should use the RPA authentication method.

When Configuration = IMAP:

Following are field descriptions for the Incoming Mail dialog box (IMAP configuration):

IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix—This specifies the mailbox location prefix that IMAP will use when locating your mailboxes on the incoming mail server. An example prefix is /usr/mail. Ask your email administrator what to enter here, if you are not sure.

For new mail, download—These two settings let you control the way incoming mail is downloaded from the IMAP server.

Minimal Headers Only—If this setting is selected, only a limited set of message headers is downloaded for each incoming message. If this setting is deselected, the full set of message headers is downloaded for each incoming message.

Full message except attachments over _ K—If this setting is selected and a number is entered in the edit box, then any attachments larger than the specified size will not be downloaded with the message. If you enter 0 in the text box, all attachments regardless of size are retrieved.

Authentication style—This specifies which IMAP account authentication technology to use for this personality: Passwords, Kerberos, or CramMD5. Ask your email administrator which one to use.


Using the Address Book

The Address Book is where you keep information about individuals or groups that you correspond with. Each entry in the Address Book includes a nickname for a person or group, their full email addresses, a real name, any contact information, and any notes. You can also use the Address Book to put nicknames on the Quick Recipient List, and to address a new message.

To open your Address Book, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Address Book, or press Ctrl+L. Or, if the Address Book is an inactive window in an open tabbed window group, click its tab. (See Window States and Tabbed Windows for more details on tabbed windows.)

All of the Address Book entries are kept in files. For example, you can show files for Business, Family, and Friends (Eudora Nicknames is the default file). You can show or hide the entries in a file by double-clicking the file. The icon shows an open or closed book, depending on whether the file is open or closed.

You can use the View By option to display the entries using any of the fields except the Notes field. For example, if you want to view the entries by nicknames, choose View By: Nickname. If you view by a field that doesn’t contain any data, the entry appears with <>.

Note:	Eudora remembers your selection in the View By field when you quit and restart the program.

You can also start typing in the list of entries, and the appropriate entry will be selected when you enter enough unique characters to identify it.

To page up and down in the list of entries, use the arrow keys. To resize the list, drag the divider.

To close and open the right-hand side of the Address Book, use the close (<) and open (>) buttons.

To move the keyboard focus back and forth between the left and right sides of the Address Book, press F6.

To move quickly through the tabbed windows on the right side of the Address Book, use the Ctrl+Tab, Ctrl+PgUp, Ctrl+PgDn, Ctrl+Home, and Ctrl+End keys.


Creating New Entries
Creating a New Entry

Note. This procedure includes information for hidden and multiple recipients.

(Sponsored and Paid modes only) To create a new file of Address Book entries, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Address Book.

2. 	Click New, or right-click anywhere in the nickname list and from the drop-down menu, choose New. A dialog box appears asking what you want to call it.

3. 	Enter a name for the file and choose Make it an Address Book, then click OK to create it. The file appears in the list, and you can now add entries to the file.

To create a new entry to be included in an existing file, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Address Book.

2. 	Click New or right-click anywhere in the nickname list and from the drop-down menu, choose New.

3. 	Select an address from anywhere in Eudora and drag it to the Address Book, or drag a message summary to the Address Book. A dialog box appears.

4. 	Enter a Nickname for the entry. A Nickname (sometimes called an alias) is an easily remembered, shorter substitute for the email addresses in the entry. Nicknames can be used in place of proper email addresses in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields of outgoing messages. For example, “buddies” may be a nickname that stands for a list of five complicated email messages for five friends of yours. You’ll be sending mail addressed to “buddies” rather than having to enter those five complicated email addresses in the recipient fields.

5. 	Specify which file this entry belongs in (if you have multiple files).

6. 	If you want the nickname on your recipient list, select the Put it on the recipient list option. You cannot create a file within a file, so do not use the Make it an Address Book option.

7. 	To create the entry, click OK. Then you can enter the information for that entry.

8. 	In the Address(es) tab, enter the complete email addresses of the people (or person) to be included in the nickname, separating the addresses with commas or returns (this is the only place you can use a return to separate addresses). You can also use nicknames in this field, but be sure that any nicknames you use are defined in their own entry. You can use a mix of nicknames and complete email addresses.

Note:	Be sure there is no other information in this field except addresses or nicknames, or your messages will be addressed incorrectly.

9.      In the Name field (in the Info tab), enter the real name of the person or group. If there is just one address for the entry, the real name and the address are included in the To field for your recipient to see. If there is more than one address for the entry, the real name is the only thing included in the To field for your recipients—they do not see the whole list of recipients. If there is nothing in the Name field, the recipients do see the whole list.

In the other fields provided in the Info (Postal Address, Phone, and Fax) and Notes tabs, you can enter contact information for the person or group, and any notes to yourself. This information is not included in outgoing messages.

We recommend that you have at most 2,500 entries per file. If you have a large number of entries, you may want to consider using a Ph server (for information, see the “Sources” section of the online Eudora User Manual.

10.    To save your changes to the Address Book, from the File menu, choose Save.


Changing, Moving, Copying, and Deleting Entries

To change the nickname for an entry, see Renaming a Nickname .

To make other changes to an entry, that is, to change any information in the Address(es), Notes, or Info tabs, select the entry from the list and edit the fields as appropriate.

To move or copy an entry to a file, right-click it and select the Move To or Copy To command. The Choose a Nickname File dialog box appears so that you can select the file you want to move or copy the entry to.

You can move an entry (or entries) to a different file by dragging it, or copy it by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key and then dragging it.

Note:	You cannot move an entry into the file it is already in, but you can copy an entry into its file (a “Copy of [Entry]” is created).

To delete an entry or an address file, select it from the list and click the Del button or press the Delete key. Or, right-click it and choose Delete from the drop-down menu. You cannot remove the Eudora Nicknames file.

Note:	If a nickname file is set to read-only (you do not have permission to write to it), you cannot move or copy entries into it, or delete an entry from it.

To save your changes, choose Save from the File menu. (Tip: Add a button for the File menu Save command to your main toolbar as a handy way to save Address Book changes.)


Renaming a Nickname

To change the nickname for an Address Book entry, do the following:

1. 	Make sure the View By field is set to Nicknames, and that the entry appears in the list.

2. 	Click the nickname for the entry, pause, and click it again.

3. 	Edit the nickname in the edit box.

Alternately, click the nickname once to highlight it, then press F2 and edit the nickname. Or, click the nickname to highlight it, right-click the selection to display the drop-down menu, choose Rename from the menu, and edit the nickname in the edit box.

Important:	If you change a nickname, but sure to correct any entries that reference that nickname.


Including Nicknames on the Quick Recipient List

To include a nickname in the Quick Recipient List, do the following:

1. 	Right-click the appropriate Address Book entry in the list and from the drop-down menu, choose Add to Recipient List. The nickname for the selected entry is included on the Quick Recipient List, and the entry is bolded in the Address Book list.

To remove a nickname from the Quick Recipient List, do the following:

1. 	Right-click the item in the Address Book list and from the drop-down menu, choose Remove From Recipient. The nickname for the selected entry is removed from the Quick Recipient List, and the entry is unbolded in the Address Book list.

If you change a nickname, the Quick Recipient List is updated as appropriate. For details about using the Quick Recipient List, see Using the Quick Recipient List .

Note:	You can add or remove multiple nicknames to or from the Quick Recipient List by selecting multiple entries before right-clicking. Hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence, or the Ctrl key to make nonconsecutive selections.


Addressing a Message from the Address Book

You can open and address a new message from the Address Book using the To, Cc, and Bcc buttons.

To create a new message from the Address Book, do the following:

1. 	Select the entry you want to address the mail to (hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence, or the Ctrl key to make nonconsecutive selections).

2. 	Click To, Cc, or Bcc. A new composition window appears with the selected nickname(s) inserted in the appropriate field.

Note:	You can also double-click an entry to enter that nickname in a header field. If no composition window is open, a new composition window is opened and the nickname is entered in the To field. If a composition window is open when you double-click, the nickname is entered in the header field that last had keyboard focus.

To address the message with the completely expanded address or addresses for that entry, rather than the entry’s nickname (the addresses are listed in the Address(es) field for the entry), turn on the Expand Nickname option.

Once the composition window appears, you can use the To, Cc, and Bcc buttons to insert additional nicknames into the corresponding fields, subject to the following restrictions.

If the Address Book is a docked or floating window (either alone or as part of a tabbed window group), the To, Cc, and Bcc buttons apply to the topmost composition window, if any. If the Address Book is a normal window (either alone or as part of a tabbed window group), the To, Cc, and Bcc buttons apply to the composition window, if any, that is immediately under either the Address Book or the tabbed window group containing the Address Book. For more information on docked, floating, normal, and tabbed windows, see Window States and Tabbed Windows .


The "Make Address Book Entry" Command
Make Address Book Entry Command

The Make Address Book Entry command is used to create entries in your Address Book, and is especially helpful for making group entries.

In the Address Book, do the following:

1. 	Highlight several different entries (hold down the Shift key to select multiple entries in sequence, or the Ctrl key to make nonconsecutive selections),

2. 	From the Special menu, choose Make Address Book Entry. The Make Address Book Entry dialog box appears, prompting you for the nickname of the new entry. The Address(es) field of the new entry will include the nicknames for the entries you selected, not the real addresses.

Note:	When the Address Book is docked or floating, the Make Address Book Entry command applies to the Address Book only if the keyboard focus is in the Address Book. When the Address Book is a normal window, this command applies to the Address Book only if it is the topmost normal window, or if the tabbed window group containing it is the topmost normal window and the Address Book is the active window in the group.

In a mailbox, highlight the message summaries you want and from the Special menu, choose Make Address Book Entry. The Make Address Book Entry dialog box appears, prompting you for the nickname of the new entry. Follow the instructions for creating a new entry. If the current message is an outgoing message, the new entry will include all of the addresses in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields. If the current message is an incoming message, the new entry will include the address in the From field. If multiple messages are current (that is, you have several message summaries selected in a mailbox window), addresses are taken from each message and are all put in the new entry.

Note:	The Make Address Book Entry command uses the Reply Options. If the Include yourself option is on, your address is included in the new entry. If this option is off, your address is not included. To determine who you are for the Include yourself option, Eudora uses the addresses listed under your “me” nickname, if you have one set up.

In an open message window, from the Special menu, choose Make Address Book Entry. The Make Address Book Entry dialog box appears, prompting you for the nickname of the new entry. Follow the instructions for creating a new entry. If the open message is an outgoing message, the new entry will include all of the addresses in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields. If the open message is an incoming message, the new entry will include the address in the From field. If multiple messages are open, addresses are taken only from the currently active (topmost) open message. Also see the note above about the Include yourself option.

In the Directory Services window, finish a query, select in the results list the target(s) you want to include in the entry, and from the Special menu, choose Make Address Book Entry. The Make Address Book Entry dialog box appears so that you can name the nickname. The real name and email address of each selected target is included in the new entry. See Making an Address Book Entry from Your Query Results for more details.


The "Finish Address Book Entry" Command
Finish Address Book Entry Command

With the Finish Address Book Entry command, you can enter a unique portion of a nickname in the To, Cc, or Bcc fields of a message, then from the Edit menu, choose Finish Address Book Entry, and the nickname will be completed for you. You must enter the characters in the nickname that make it unique, or Eudora will not know which nickname to use. For example, if you have two nicknames, joan and john, you would have to enter “joa” or “joh” for Eudora to complete them.

To insert the real addresses for the entry, instead of the nickname, hold down the Shift key and from the Edit menu, choose Finish Address Book Entry. To set this to happen all the time, turn on the Automatically expand nicknames option in the Miscellaneous options window found in Options under the Tools menu.


Using Central Address Book Files on a Server

You can set up central Address Book files on a server and configure Eudora clients so that they refer to the central files.

First, be sure the files are plain text, have a .txt extension, and are formatted as follows: One nickname on each line with the real addresses separated by commas, and one line for notes and info with the Notes text following the Info data. For example:

alias Wow joe@wow.com,lisa@wow.com,chris@wow.com
note Wow <fax: 222.2223><phone: 222.2222><address:1234 Street>
<name:Wow Inc.>My favorite company

Then, for each client application, add an ExtraNicknameDirs entry to the [Settings] section of the Eudora.ini file. This entry should be followed by the list of directories that contain Address Book files, separated by semicolons (;). Any Address Book files located in those directories are added to the Address Book. You need to exit and relaunch Eudora to see the new entries.


Using Address Book Files Not Created by Eudora

To use an Address Book file that was not created in Eudora, put the file in the Nickname directory (in your Eudora directory), and be sure the format is as shown in Using Central Address Book Files on a Server . You need to exit and reopen Eudora to see your new entries in the Address Book.


Using the Quick Recipient List

The Quick Recipient List is your list of recipients to whom you often send mail.

To add a nickname to the Quick Recipient List, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Address book. Or, if the Address book window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group, click its tab.

2. 	Select the desired entry in the list on the left by clicking on the item; then right-click the item.

3. 	From the drop-down menu, choose Add to Recipient List. The entry’s nickname is added to the Quick Recipient List, and the entry is bolded in the Address Book list.

To add an email address to the Quick Recipient List, select the text that makes up the full address. Then, from the Special menu, choose Add as Recipient.

To remove an entry from the list, do the following:

1. 	Open the Address Book.

2. 	Select the desired entry in the list on the left by clicking on the item; then right-click the item.

3. 	From the drop-down menu, choose Remove From Recipient List. The entry’s nickname is removed from the Quick Recipient List, and the entry is unbolded in the Address Book list. Or, select the item you wish to remove from the Remove Recipient submenu under the Special menu.

To open a new message addressed to someone on your Quick Recipient List, do the following:

1. 	From the Message menu, choose New Message To, Forward To, or Redirect To.

2. 	Select the nickname from the displayed list.

To insert a recipient into a message that you have already opened, put the cursor where you want the recipient and select the recipient from the Insert Recipient submenu under the Edit menu.

To insert the real address(es), instead of a nickname, hold down the Shift key and select the recipient from the Insert Recipient submenu under the Edit menu. To set this to happen all the time, turn on the Automatically expand nicknames option in the Miscellaneous options window found in Options under the Tools menu.

More than one recipient from the Quick Recipient List can be added to the To, Cc, and Bcc fields of any message. If you use the Insert Recipient submenu, commas are added where necessary.


Opening Directory Services

Eudora lets you look up individuals on the Internet, within your company, and in your Eudora Address Book (if you have one set up) using four directory service protocols: Ph, Finger, LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), and Eudora Address Book.

To use directory services to look someone up, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Directory Services. Or, if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group, click its tab. (See Window States and Tabbed Windows for more information on tabbed windows.)

The directory service protocols available to you for your search are listed in the Protocols section of the window. See Directory Service Protocols for more information.

The databases you can use to look up your target individual are listed in the Databases list. For more details, see Directory Service Databases , Creating a New Database and Deleting a Database .

To resize the left and right halves of the window relative to each other, drag the vertical separator bar to the left or right.


Keeping the Directory Services Window on Top

To keep the Directory Services window on top so that you can easily continue using it, turn on the Keep On Top option. Eudora remembers the state of this option when you quit and restart the program.

Note:	The behavior of this option is subject to the restrictions in Window State Considerations .


Looking Someone Up (Making a Query)

To look up someone on the Internet, within your company, or in your Eudora Address Book, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Directory Services. Or, if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group, click its tab.

2.	In the Databases list, select the database(s) you want to search in your query.

To select a database, click the checkbox to the left of the database until a checkmark appears in the box. You can select multiple databases, and you can use multiple protocols. You must select at least one database in the list in order for Eudora to perform the query.

Note: Eudora remembers which databases you’ve selected when you quit and restart the program.

3.	In the Query field, type a text string you want to search against.

If one or more of your selected databases use a protocol other than Ph, your entry in this field will always be interpreted as a name. If you only have Ph servers selected as your databases, you can enter any commands that Ph will interpret.

Note: When looking up names in Eudora’s Directory Services, Eudora now remembers the name and places it in a directory services history file. So whenever you begin typing a name, a drop-down list of names from your history file display alphabetically. Just select the desired name from the list, and the name’s information appears.

4.	After you’ve typed the text, start the query by pressing Enter or clicking Start.

The query begins, and the Start button changes to Stop.

5.	To stop the query before it is completed, click Stop.

When the query is completed, or if you click Stop to cancel the query, the Stop button changes back to Start.


Reading Your Query Results

Your query results are listed in the left half of the Directory Services window, in the results list (top view) and the details pane (bottom view). You can resize the two views relative to each other using the separator between them; drag the separator up or down.

The results list consists of one-line summaries of the “hits” or successful targets of your query. These are listed by four columns: Name, Email, Phone, and Database. Name indicates the username (or other name) of the target. Email is the email address of the target. Phone is the target’s telephone number. Database tells you in which of your selected databases the target was found.

Click a column header to sort the results list alphabetically (or numerically) by that column. Shift-click to sort in reverse order.

To resize the columns, drag the divider line to the right of the desired column to the left or right. Note that the columns resize dynamically during a query to accommodate the width of each target’s data.

The Status field displays the status of your query (such as Ready, Connecting, or Getting Data) and the number of items found as shown in your summary list. This number is updated dynamically until the query is complete or you stop it.

If the results list does not fit in the available viewing space, scroll bars appear to let you navigate through the remaining part of the list.

To view the details of a result in the details pane, select the result in the results list by clicking on it. The full data appears in the details pane. If nothing is selected in the results list, the details pane is blank. If multiple summaries are selected in the results list, the details pane lists the details for each item, with each item separated by a divider line.

To select multiple items in the results list, use the Shift key to select a continuous range, and use the Ctrl key to make nonconsecutive selections.

Scroll bars appear in the details pane if the displayed information cannot fit in the viewing space.


Addressing a Message from the Directory Services Window

You can create and address a message with the query results in the Directory Services window.

To create a new message, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Directory Services. Or, if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group, click its tab.

2. 	Make sure there are no outgoing messages open.

3. 	Perform your query.

4. 	Select one or more summaries in your results list.

5. 	Click the To, Cc, or Bcc button. A new message is created, and it is addressed appropriately with the selected query results.

To add an address to an existing message, make sure the message you want to address is active, open the Directory Services window, perform the query, and select one or more summaries in the results list. Now click the To, Cc, or Bcc button. The addresses from the selected query results are added to the appropriate field of the current message.

Note:	The behavior of the To, Cc, and Bcc buttons is subject to the restrictions in Window State Considerations .


Making an Address Book Entry from Your Query Results

You can make a nickname from your query results in the Directory Services window and add the entry to your Address Book.

To make a nickname, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Directory Services. Or, if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group, click its tab.

2. 	Perform a query.

3. 	Select one or more summaries in the results list.

4. 	From the Special menu, choose Make Address Book Entry. The Make Address Book Entry dialog box appears so that you can name the nickname. The real name and email address for each selected query result is included in the new entry.

Note:	The use of this command from this window is subject to the restrictions in Window State Considerations .


Printing Your Query Results

You can print, and preview for printing, the results of your query as shown in the details pane.

To print your query results, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Directory Services. Or, if the Directory Services window is an inactive window in a visible tabbed window group, click its tab.

2. 	Perform your query.

3. 	Select one or more summaries in the results list. The details pane lists the details of each selected item, with each item’s details separated by a divider line.

4. 	To preview your query details for printing, from the File menu, choose Print Preview. The Print Preview dialog box appears, showing how the query details will look when printed.

5. 	To print your query details, from the File menu, choose Print.

Note:	The use of this command from this window is subject to the restrictions in Window State Considerations .


Window State Considerations

The behavior of some Eudora features internal and external to the Directory Services window depends on the state of the window. For definitions of window states, see Window States and Tabbed Windows.

When the Directory Services window is in the docked or floating state (either alone or as part of a tabbed window group), the following applies:

•	The Keep on top setting in the window is ignored.

•	The To, Cc, and Bcc buttons in the window apply to the topmost composition window, if any.

•	The Special menu Make Address Book Entry command, and the File menu Print Preview and Print commands, apply to the Directory Services window only if the keyboard focus is in that window.

When the Directory Services window is in the normal state (either alone or as part of a tabbed window group), the following applies:

•	The Keep on top setting in the window is obeyed.

•	The To, Cc, and Bcc buttons in the window apply to the composition window, if any, immediately under the Directory Services window or the tabbed window containing it.

•	The Special menu Make Address Book Entry command, and the File menu Print Preview and Print commands, apply to the Directory Services window only if it is the topmost normal window and is active, or if the tabbed window containing it is the topmost normal window and the Directory Services tab is active.


Directory Service Protocols

Protocols are servers you access in Directory Services to find information on persons by entering their name, email address, clicking The Protocols section of the Directory Services window lists the directory service protocols available to you to use when looking up individuals via these services.

Eudora comes with four installed protocols.

•	Ph

•	Finger

•	LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol)

•	Eudora Address Book

The Eudora Address Book protocol does not appear in the list until you have created an Address Book in Eudora.

Click the column heading, Registered Drivers, to sort the protocols alphabetically. Shift-click the column heading to sort in reverse order.

You can resize the column by dragging the divider line to the right of the column heading to the left or right.

The use of the New Database button, shown in this section of the window, is described in Creating a New Database .


Directory Service Databases

The Databases section of the Directory Services window lists the databases that are available to you for searching for individuals over the Internet, within your company, or in your Address Book (if one is set up).

Eudora comes with these servers already configured by default:

•	ldap.bigfoot.com

•	ldap.switchboard.com

•	ldap.whowhere.com

•	ldap.infospace.com

•	ldapbiz.infospace.com

•	ldap.four11.com

•	Eudora Nicknames (or the name of your nicknames file; this last item appears only if you have a Eudora Address Book set up)

You can modify or delete these databases, and you can also create new databases and modify and delete them.

You use the databases in this list to perform your lookup queries. To perform a query, you must first select one or more databases in the list. To select a database, click the checkbox to the left of the database name, until a checkmark appears in the box. If no databases are selected, you cannot perform a query.

You can select multiple databases to perform a query, and you can mix protocols.

Click a column heading to sort this list alphabetically. Shift-click the column heading to sort in reverse order.

To resize columns, position the mouse pointer over the divider line to the right of the desired column, and drag the line to the left or right.

The use of the Modify button in this section of the window is described in Modifying an Existing Database . The use of the Delete button is described in Deleting a Database .


Creating a New Database

In addition to the default directory service databases that already comes configured with Eudora, you can create new Ph, Finger, and LDAP databases for your Directory Services queries. By adding a new database, you can then query that database for names, email addresses, phone numbers, and so on. Databases are created from the Protocols section of the window, and they must be created using one of these three listed protocols.

Important:	You must be able to identify the server by its description and its host name before you can add it to Directory Services.

Note:	You cannot create a new database using the Eudora Address Book protocol in the list. Nickname files must be created from the Address Book window. See Using the Address Book for more details.


Deleting a Database

To delete a database, do the following:

1. 	Open the Directory Services window.

2. 	Click the database name or icon in the Databases list to highlight the item.

3. 	Click Delete. You are prompted to confirm the delete. Click Yes and the database is removed from the list. Click No and the deletion is canceled, and the database remains.

You can delete multiple databases at once; use the Shift key to select a range in the list, and use the Ctrl key to select items nonconsecutively.


Printing

You can print the current message or messages, a plain text window, selected text within a message or text window, the contents of the Directory Services window, and your filters. Eudora automatically prints headers and footers on each page, giving the window title, page number, and your return address.

To print the current message or item, choose Print from the File menu.


Plugins (Extended Messaging Services)

Plug-ins are special add-ons that can be installed to add features to Eudora. For example, you could use a language conversion plug-in to translate a message to another language, a security plug-in to automatically secure a message, or a text manipulation plug-in to change lowercase to uppercase. Plug-ins interface to Eudora using the Extended Messaging Services Application Programming Interface (EMSAPI).

•	To make plugins available to Eudora, put them in the Plugins directory in your Eudora Email directory, then restart Eudora. Depending on the plug-in type, it will be available in Eudora through the following methods:

-	The Message Plugins submenu (in the Edit menu) typically includes plugins that are used to modify the text of a message. These are referred to as on-request plugins. Some samples of these types of plugins are available with Eudora: Sort, UpperLower, and Unwrap.

-	Icons in the message window are typically for plugins that are used to manipulate messages as they are sent or when they are received. These are referred to as on-transmission and on-display plugins.

-	The Tools menu typically includes plugins that are used to do tasks that are not directly related to Eudora functions. These are referred to as tools plugins.

-	The Attach [to New] submenu (in the Message menu) typically includes plugins that are used to create and attach particular files to a message. These are referred to as attachment plugins.

-	Plug-ins that are automatically used when a message is received are not available through the user interface.

•	To see all of your currently installed plugins, choose Message Plugins Settings from the Special menu. If a plug-in has any settings options, you can use the Settings button to change them.

For information about available plugins, send email to <eudora-rep@eudora.com> or visit our web site www.eudora.com/central/plugins


The Messaging Application Program Interface (MAPI)
Messaging Application Program Interface (MAPI)

MAPI is an interface for sending email messages from any MAPI-compatible application, such as your word processor, spreadsheet, graphics application, and so forth.

MAPI-compatible applications have a Send or Send Mail option in the File menu. When you select the option, the Eudora MAPI server displays a new outgoing message with your current document attached. All you need to do is address the message, type any details you want to include in the body of the message, and click Send or Queue.

•	To run the Eudora MAPI server, use the MAPI options window. To display the MAPI options window, choose Options from the Tools menu and click MAPI.

You have several options in the MAPI options window for loading the Eudora MAPI server. You can set it to always run or to run only when Eudora is running, or you can specify that it never run. These three options open or exit the server as soon as you select them.

Note:	When you are running the Eudora MAPI server, Microsoft Exchange will not work. If you need to use Exchange, turn off the Eudora server.

See the online User  Manual for technical details on the Eudora MAPI server.

Also, you have several options for saving or deleting MAPI attachments. When you use MAPI to attach a file and send a message, that file is immediately copied into the Attach directory (or a directory you have specified). You can use the MAPI options to save those copies, delete them after sending their corresponding messages, or delete them after their messages are emptied from the trash.


Modifier Keys

Many operations in Eudora can be implemented by holding down one or more modifier keys. Eudora uses the Shift, Ctrl, and Alt keys as modifiers.

Shift + Check Mail or Send Queued Messages
Displays the Mail Transfer options window to define the interaction with your POP account.

Shift + Queue/Send	Opens the Change Queuing dialog box.

Shift + Open an incoming message
Opens the message with all headers displayed.

Shift + Insert Recipient	Inserts the address(es) instead of the nickname.

Shift + Ctrl + F	Opens Find text dialog box

Shift + Ctrl + , or Shift + Finish Address Book Entry
Finishes the Address Book entry with the address(es) instead of the nickname.

Shift + Sort command	Sorts in ascending order.

Shift + Transfer	Puts a copy of the current message in the selected mailbox and leave the original where it is.

Shift + Copy	Copies the selected text without the carriage returns (copy unwrapped).

Shift + Paste or Shift + Paste as quotation
Pastes the selection as plain text (do not paste the style information).

Shift + Wrap Selection	Removes the carriage returns from the selected text (unwraps).

Shift + Exit	Sets all open windows to open again when Eudora is next started.

Shift + Save	Saves changes to all open windows.

Shift + Close	Closes all open windows.


Shortcuts

The keyboard shortcuts for Eudora functions are as follows:

Ctrl +	0	Opens Out mailbox

Ctrl +	1	Opens In mailbox

Ctrl +	6	Checks spelling

Ctrl +	'	Pastes as quotation

Ctrl +	,	Finishes nickname

Ctrl + 	.	Removes one level of excerpt bars

Ctrl + 	>	Adds one level of excerpt bars

Ctrl +	A	Selects all

Ctrl +	B	Makes the selected text bold

Ctrl +	C	Copies

Ctrl +	D	Deletes

Ctrl +	E	Sends or Queues

Ctrl +	F	Finds message

Ctrl + Shift + F	Finds text

Ctrl +	H	Attaches document

Ctrl +	I	Makes the selected text italic

Ctrl +	J	Filters messages

Ctrl +	K	Makes nickname

Ctrl +	L	Opens the Address Book

Ctrl +	M	Checks mail

Ctrl +	N	Opens a new message

Ctrl +	O	Opens a file

Ctrl +	P	Prints

Ctrl +	Q	Exits Eudora

Ctrl +	R	Replies

Ctrl + Shift + R  Replies to all

Ctrl +	S	Saves

Ctrl +	T	Sends queued messages

Ctrl +	U	Makes the selected text underlined

Ctrl +	V	Pastes

Ctrl +	W	Closes message

Ctrl +	X	Cuts

Ctrl +	Y	Opens Directory Services

Ctrl +	Z	Undo

Ctrl + Tab	Switches between opened mailboxes and messages

Alt + 	A	Jumps to Attached: field in message header; Sort by Attachments in Table of Contents

Alt + 	B	Jumps to Bcc field in message header

Alt + 	C	Jumps to Cc field in message header

Alt + 	D	Sorts by date in table of contents window

Alt +	 Shift + D	Sorts by reverse date in table of contents window

Alt +	 E	Opens Edit menu

Alt + 	F	Opens File menu

Alt + 	H	Opens Help menu

Alt + 	K	Sorts by size in table of contents window

Alt + Shift + K	Sorts by size reversed in table of contents window

Alt + 	L	Sorts by Labels column in table of contents window

Alt + Shift + L	Sorts by Labels column reversed in table of contents window

Alt + 	M	Opens the Message menu

Alt + 	O	Jumps to the To field in the message header; sorts by Who column in table of contents window

Alt + Shift + O	Sorts by Who column reversed in table of contents window

Alt + 	R	Opens Transfer Menu; Jump to From field in the message header

Alt + 	S	Opens Special menu

Alt + 	T	Opens Tools menu

Alt + 	U 	Jumps to Subject: field in the message header

Alt + 	V 	Sorts by server status in table of contents window

Alt + Shift + V	Sorts by reversed server status in table of contents window

Alt + 	W	Opens Window menu

Alt + 	X	Opens Mailbox menu

Shift + 	F4	Tiles windows horizontally

Shift + 	F5	Cascades Windows

Shift + 	F10	Opens context menu for selected item

Shift + 	Space	Toggles current message status between read and unread

arrows	Moves from one message to another in a mailbox (depends on your Miscellaneous Options ).

enter	Selects the outlined button in any dialog box, alert, or window, or opens the selected messages or URL.

esc	Stops any operation currently in progress.

F1	Displays Help.

page up, page down	Scrolls up or down through the window.

F6	Toggles the cursor position between the left and right window panes in the Filters dialog box and the Address Book.


Using the Eudora Taskbar

The Eudora taskbar appears along the bottom edge of the window work area in the main Eudora window, and normally shows the QUALCOMM logo at the right.

The Eudora taskbar displays a button for each normal Eudora window that is open or minimized. The taskbar provides a convenient way to switch between normal windows by clicking buttons, without having to display the different windows from the Window menu.

The Eudora taskbar is modeled after the Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0 system taskbars, which usually appear at the bottom of the screen, but there are important differences, noted below.

To show or hide the Eudora taskbar, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu,  choose Options to open the Options dialog box.

2. 	Scroll and select Display.  The Display options window appears.

3. 	Check or uncheck the Show MDI task bar box to turn the option on or off.

Any normal Eudora window that is open or minimized is represented by a button on the taskbar. This includes composition messages, received messages, mailbox windows, and any tool windows or tabbed windows that are in the normal state. Any open tool or tabbed windows that are in the docked or floating state are not represented as buttons on the taskbar.

If a tabbed window is represented by a button on the taskbar, the button shows the name and icon associated with the active tool window in that tabbed window.

Click a taskbar button to make that normal window active. The window comes to the front of the stack of all normal Eudora windows.

If you right-click a taskbar button, the standard Windows context menu displays, letting you restore, minimize, maximize, or close that normal window.

If you right-click an exposed area of the taskbar (not on a button), the standard Eudora context menu displays.

If you drag an object over a taskbar button and pause for several seconds, Eudora activates the normal window associated with that button. For a tabbed window, Eudora activates the tabbed window with the indicated window active. You can then complete the drag and drop operation into the normal window. For a tabbed window, you can further pause the pointer over one of the inactive window tabs, and that window becomes active and you can complete the drop.

Each taskbar button displays both the window icon and the window title of the normal window. If there is not enough room to display the entire title, Eudora truncates the title and places an ellipsis (...) to indicate the truncation. If you pause the mouse pointer over such a button, Eudora displays the entire window title in a tooltip.

If you have many normal windows open or minimized, the taskbar buttons shrink so that all buttons are visible. When the bar gets sufficiently crowded, the QUALCOMM logo is hidden to make room.

Note that, unlike with the Windows 95/98 and Windows NT 4.0 taskbars, you cannot move the Eudora taskbar to another edge of the main Eudora window; it always stays at the bottom of the window work area. You also cannot resize the taskbar as a separate item. It resizes automatically, however, when you resize the main Eudora window.


EUDORA.INI Settings File

The EUDORA.INI file is where Eudora keeps most of the settings. It is a standard Windows INI file, and may be edited with any text editor.

Note:	Since Windows caches information from INI files in memory while the program is running, you should never change the EUDORA.INI file while Eudora is in use. If you need to make a change, first quit Eudora, edit the file, and then restart Eudora.

The EUDORA.INI file is divided into a number of sections, the following of which appear by default:

•	Settings

•	Mappings

•	Window Position

•	Tool Bar

•	Directory Services

•	Debug

Optional Sections

The following sections will appear in the INI file only when the appropriate conditions are met or the appropriate items created:

•	Personalities — This section appears only when you have created alternate email accounts (personalities).

•	Stationery — This section appears only when you have created stationery files.

•	Open Windows — This section appears only when there are windows currently open in Eudora.

•	Wazoo Bars —  This section appears only when normal Eudora windows are currently open or minimized on the desktop (and thus buttons appear on the Eudora taskbar, which is what this section controls).

•	Recent File List — This section appears only when files have been opened since the most recent Eudora startup.

          Note. We strongly urge that you do not change the values in these optional sections of the INI file, and rather make any changes from the interface. For example, personalities can be created and edited from the Personalities window, and stationery can be created and edited from the Stationery window. Both windows are available from the Tools menu.

 The values of the settings in each of these optional sections reflect the current values of the objects or conditions; there are no "default" values per se.

Name and Location of the INI File

The default name is EUDORA.INI and the default location is in the mail directory.  But the name and location can be changed.

To specify a different INI file from the EUDORA.INI that is not in the mail directory, add a second parameter to the command line in the Program Item for Eudora, e.g.

Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe c:\mymail c:\inis\myeudora.ini

To use a different INI file that is in the mail directory:

Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe c:\mymail myeudora.ini
Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe c:\mymail\myeudora.ini

This is a way to have multiple settings for one set of mailboxes, nicknames, and so forth.  For example, you may have multiple email accounts in which you receive mail, but want to collect mail from all of the accounts in one place.  You could set up separate program Items for each account (each having a different INI file on the command line), and switching between accounts would be as simple as double-clicking a program Item.

And for an even more tricky specification, if the first parameter is an INI filename without a path, then the mail directory is searched through the normal process of checking the EUDORA environment variable and then using the executable directory.

Examples:

SET EUDORA=c:\mymail
Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe myeudora.ini

will use c:\mymail as the mail directory and c:\mymail\myeudora.ini as the INI file.

SET EUDORA=myeudora.ini
Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe

will use c:\apps as the mail directory and c:\apps\myeudora.ini as the INI file.

Default INI file

When an entry in the EUDORA.INI file is not found, Eudora will look in the DEUDORA.INI file located in the same directory as the EUDORA.EXE file. The [Mappings] section of the DEUDORA.INI file acts as though it was appended to the end of the [Mappings] section of the EUDORA.INI file.

Examples:

          SET EUDORA=c:\mymail

          Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe myeudora.ini

          will use c:\mymail as the mail directory and c:\mymail\myeudora.ini as the INI file.

          SET EUDORA=myeudora.ini

          Command Line: c:\apps\eudora.exe

          will use c:\apps as the mail directory and c:\apps\myeudora.ini as the INI file.

Settings

Entry	Default Value		Description
AllowDefPlugins	1		Controls whether or not EMSAPI plugins can be automatically added to the toolbar.
AllowOverwriteMode	1		Controls whether or not toggling the Insert key puts the message editor in to overwrite mode. Helpful for people who use the Ctrl+Insert and Shift+Insert accelerators for Copy and Paste and have a tendency to linger on the Insert key after letting go of the Ctrl/Shift key.
AlwaysConnected	0		Set to 1 if you have a constant Internet connection such as LAN or cable modem.
AltClickMoveSummary	1		When you hold down the <Alt> key while clicking an item in a mailbox, all messages in that mailbox with the same item are selected (e.g. <Alt> clicking a subject will select all messages in that mailbox with the same subject).  If this switch is on, then the selected messages will be grouped together as well.  You can temporarily turn this off by holding down the <Shift> key while doing the <Alt> click.
BackgroundColor			Specifies an RGB triple (in hexadecimal) for the color to use for the "workspace" area of the main Eudora window. Can be used in conjunction with the BackgroundImage entry for choosing a color better suited for the image being displayed.  Examples: white is "FFFFFF", black is "000000", and blue is "0000FF".  This setting does *not* require QuickTime to be installed.
BackgroundImage			Specifies an image to be displayed in the "workspace" area of the main Eudora window (called "Application Background" in the Appearance tab of the Control Panel->Display options). It needs to be specified as a full path name. This setting requires QuickTime to be installed.
BadPasswordString	password		When the POP server returns an error on sending the PASS command, the password will only be erased when the error response includes this text.
BlackTocLines	0		If on, and displaying lines is mailboxes, draws lines as black instead of gray.
CenterUnreadStatus	1		When on (1), centers the bitmap in Mailbox menu items that indicate that the mailbox has unread messages. If the display of this bitmap is not correct, turn this switch off (0).
CheckOwnerFreq	0		How often (in seconds) Eudora should check the OWNER.LOK file to see if another instance of Eudora has been started on the same set of mailboxes.
CompactDisk%	5		What the amount of "wasted space" taken up by deleted messages in a mailbox as a percentage of total free disk space must be before the mailbox automatically gets compacted when closed.
CompactMailbox%	50		What the percentage of "wasted space" taken up by deleted messages in a mailbox must be before the mailbox automatically gets compacted when closed.
CompactOutgoingPlugins	0		Controls whether the outgoing EMSAPI plugins on the composition message window toolbar should be separate buttons or contained within one button that pops up a list of all outgoing plugins.  By default, all ougoing plugins get their own toolbar button.
CompSummaryItalic	1		In mailboxes other than the Out mailbox, display the summaries of outgoing messages in italics.
ConvertFormatFlowedtoExcerpt	0,1		Turns format-flowed feature on and off.
DesDllName	Des32.dll		The name of the DLL implementing the DES encryption routines for use with Kerberos version 4, e.g., des32.dll
EditAllHeaders	0		Controls whether or not the (by default, non-editable) From and Attached: headers in the composition message window.
EnrichedSoftLine	72		Number of characters sent on a line before adding a soft new line when sending styled text.
EudoraPassPort	106		Default port number for the Eudora password-changing service (epass).
ExcerptBars	2		HTML style sheet parameter for excerpt bars.  Can use this to change the width, color, and style of excerpt bars. (Only works when using the Microsoft viewer).
ExtraHeaders			Extra headers that are sent with each outgoing message. If multiple headers are to be sent, separate each with "\r\n". For example, "ExtraHeaders=X-Header1: foo\r\nX-Header2: bar".
FilterTransferName	0		This controls how mailbox names should be displayed in the button that indicates which mailbox is the target of a transfer or copy filter action. 0 is the mailbox name only. 1 is the full path of each mail folder and the mailbox name. 2 is the full path to the filename of the mailbox. 3 is just he parent mail folder and the mailbox name.
ExtraNicknameDirs			List of directories to search for additional nickname files. Multiple directories can be entered, separated by semicolons (;).
FilterFromFolder			When doing a Make Filter, the name of the mailbox folder to place the default named mailbox that is created when filtering based on whom the message is from.
FilterRecipFolder			When doing a Make Filter, the name of the mailbox folder to place the default named mailbox that is created when filtering based on whom the message is to.
FilterSubjectFolder			When doing a Make Filter, the name of the mailbox folder to place the default named mailbox that is created when filtering based on the subject of the message.
FindMatchCase	0		"Match Case" checkbox in the Find dialog box.
FindSummariesOnly	0		"Summaries Only" checkbox in the Find dialog box.
FirstUnreadNormal	1		When checking mail on a POP server, download any mail that hasn’t been retrieved at this machine.
FirstUnreadStatus	0		When checking mail on a POP server, download only messages that haven’t been read on any machine.
FontSizeTableLarge	10,12,14,16,20,26, 42		Font sizes used for displaying text in the built-in (non-Microsoft) viewer. They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog. The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window.
FontSizeTableLargest	11,14,16,18,22,28, 48		Font sizes used for displaying text in the built-in (non-Microsoft) viewer. They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog. The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window.
FontSizeTableMedium	8,10,11,14,18,24, 36		Font sizes used for displaying text in the built-in (non-Microsoft) viewer. They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog. The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window.
FontSizeTableSmall	7,9,10,12,16,22,28		Font sizes used for displaying text in the built-in (non-Microsoft) viewer. They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog. The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window.
FontSizeTableSmallest	7,8,9,10,12,16,24		Font sizes used for displaying text in the built-in (non-Microsoft) viewer. They correspond to the size schemes in the Fonts category of the Options dialog. The seven values in each list correspond to the Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous sizes that you can specify in a message composition window.
FixCurlyQuotes	1		If on, then if a message contains 7-bit characters except for directional quotes, then those directional quotes are turned into regular non-directional quotes so that the message may be sent out as 7-bit (no quoted-printable encoding needed).
GssDllName	Gssapi32.dll		For the user to specify the GSS/K5 DLL name.
GuessParagraphs	0		"Guess Paragraphs" checkbox in the Save As... dialog box.
HTMLInPlainText	0		HTML text would be displayed in messages in the Out box.
IMAPLeafMenu	0		Controls whether IMAP mailboxes with no child mailboxes should be shown in the Mailbox/Transfer menus as an entire menu or just a menu item.  Default is to just show it as a menu item.
IMAPPort	142		Default port number for IMAP connections.
IdleTime	60		The number of seconds that Eudora has to be idle before it will consider performing an automatic mail check.
IMAPPreviewPane	1		Controls whether or not IMAP mailboxes have a preview pane.  On slower networks, it may be desirable to turn off the preview pane for IMAP mailboxes, but still have the preview pane for local mailboxes.  You can do that by keeping the normal Preview Pane option turned on, but turning this setting off (setting to 0).
IMAPRemoveOnDelete	0		Controls whether or not a message in an IMAP mailbox that is deleted will be removed from the server mailbox immediately.  If this setting is off (the default), then you can remove messages from the server mailbox that have been marked to be deleted by using the Message->Remove Deleted Messages menu item.
IncludeHeaders	0		"Include Headers" checkbox in the Save As... dialog box.
IncludeSigForward	1		Whether or not the default signature should be included when forwarding a message.
IncludeSigRedirect	0		Whether or not the default signature should be included when redirecting a message.
IncludeSigReply	1		Whether or not the default signature should be included when replying to a message.
InteractiveSpellCheck	1		When doing a spell check, controls whether you get prompted with a dialog box for each misspelled word, or each misspelled word gets marked with a double red underline (which then you can right-click to get suggestions and other options for the misspelled word).  If you hold down the Shift key while doing a spell check, the other method of spell checking will be performed.
InterpretFormatFlowed	1, 0		Turns format-flowed off and on.
IgnoreIdleOnManualCheck	0		Controls whether background tasks started manually (e.g. Ctrl+M to do a Check Mail) should be processed immediately after completing, or wait until a sufficient amount of user idle time (see TaskMgrWaitTime below).
KerberosSetUserName	0		Uses KClient SetUserName() function to set user name in Kerberos system. Turning this switch on may cause Kerberos tickets to be invalidated.
Krb4Dllname	Kerberos32.dll		The name of the Kerberos version 4 DLL, e.g., kerberos32.dll.
LastSettingsCategory	0		Last category that was displayed in the Options dialog box.
LexPath			Directory in which the dictionary files for spell checking reside.
MainLexFiles			Main dictionary files. British dictionaries can be used by changing this to british.tlx, british.clx.
MainWindowState	1		The state of the Main Window (normal = 1, minimized = 2, or maximized = 3). The state is set when Eudora closes, and the Main Window is set to this state the next time Eudora starts up.
MaxConcurrentTasks	10		The maximum number of background tasks that can be running at the same time.  Note that if you are connected over a modem (dialup networking connection) only one network task at a time will be run; otherwise network performance would suffer greatly.
MaxMenus	30000		The maximum number of popup menus for mailboxes. These are equivalent to mailbox folders; that is, local mailbox folders that contain other mailboxes, or IMAP mailboxes that contain other mailboxes. Used when Eudora can’t be started due to the large number of popup menus created, which is limited by Windows. This will allow you to start up Eudora and run it long enough to remove some mailboxes so that fewer menus will be needed. Running for extended periods of time with this switch in Eudora.ini is not recommended.
MDNSendAddress	0		Controls whether your return address should be used in the MAIL FROM command for return receipts.  RFC 2298 says that it should be empty in order to prevent mail loops, but some SMTP servers reject that due to bad spam-prevention heuristics.
NetworkOpenTimeout	60		The number of seconds Eudora will wait for a response to opening a connection before it gives up.
NewMailUpdateFrequency	25		Number of initial messages that have to be spooled before the message processing begins.
NoAutoResponseHeaders	errors-to:,list-		Allows for better detecting of mailing list to which you should not auto-respond. As a default, “errors-to:,list-” is the value. Add any other headers that will identify it as a list (hence will not auto-respond via filters).
NoAutoSendPrecedence	list,bulk		When filtering incoming messages with precedence headers of list or bulk, do not automatically create new outgoing messages.
NoSplashScreen	0		If on, the opening splash screen will not be displayed.
Offline	0		Set to 1 to temporarily set Eudora offline; it will not perform automatic timed mail checks when offline.
OfflineLinkAction	0		Eudora displays the Offline Link Dialog if you click on an http: link while offline (not connected to the Internet). That dialog box lets you choose what action should be taken regarding that link the next time Eudora is online: ask you if you want to launch the link, launch it without asking, bookmark the link in your browser, or remind you later. The dialog box now has a checkbox that will make the action you choose the default from then on, which means you won't see the Offline Link Dialog any more. It defaults to 0 = ask, and the other values are 1 = launch, 2 = bookmark, and 3 = remind.
OwnerLok	1		If this is non-zero, an OWNER.LOK file will be created on startup which helps to prevent possible corruption if multiple instances of Eudora are used on the same set of mailboxes.
PasswordOKWordList	lock busy,own it,of memory,assign stream, ush of temp,being unlock,hangup,timeout, not owned,quota,drop name, recognition mode,accessible by others, ,regular file,flock,maillock, few minute,locked		A comma-separated list of words that if found in the response text from an error from the POP PASS command that will not cause the password to be erased (works in conjunction with the BadPasswordString entry above).  POP servers sometimes fail after sending the PASS command for reasons other than your password was incorrect, and this entry allows greater control over when Eudora will decide to ask you again for your password.
PhReturn			A string that is appended to every Ph command before sending to the Ph server. For example, "PhReturn=return all" would return all fields of the records returned by the query, and "PhReturn=type=person" would return all matches to the query with the additional filter that the record is a person.
POPPort	110		Default port number for the POP service (pop3).
PreviewHeaders	To:,Subject:,Cc:		A comma-separated list of headers that should be shown in the preview pane.  The matching is done on a prefix basis, so any header that begins with one of these values will be shown.
PreviewHeadersMaxLines	4		This is designed to keep preview pane headers to a minimum. This is most often used to control large To: or Cc: headers where someone inserts a large number of individual addresses.
PreviewSplitterPos	0		If non-zero, then if a mailbox hasn’t already specified a position for the splitter between the message list and the preview pane, then the splitter will be positioned this many pixels from the top of the mailbox window.
PreviewTableEnd	</table>\r\n		HTML markup for the end of the table that’s used to display the headers in a preview pane.
PreviewTableRowEnd	</td></tr>\r\n		HTML markup for the end of the table row that’s used to display the headers in a preview pane.  Each header appears in a separate row of the table.
PreviewTableRowStart	<tr bgcolor=%s text=%s><td>\r\n		HTML markup for the start of the table row that’s used to display the headers in a preview pane.  Each header appears in a separate row of the table.
PreviewTableStart	<table cellspacing= 0 cellpadding=0 width=100%% bgcolor=%s text=%s>\r\n		HTML markup for the beginning of the table that’s used to display the headers in a preview pane.
PrintHeaders	1		When on (1), printed messages get headers and footers.
ProgressIdle	3		Number of seconds a foreground task continues before the Progress window is shown.  This prevents a distracting flash of the Progress window for a task that may take a long time, but in this instance only takes a short time.
QuoteEnd			The string that gets inserted after the original text of a forwarded message. A new line is added before the string.
QuotePrefix	>		The string that precedes all lines of the original message in a forwarded message
QuoteStart			The string that gets inserted before the original text of a forwarded message. A new line is added after the string.
RasUseExistingConnection	1		When switching from a task from one personality to a task of another personality and the two personalities have different dialup networking connection entries, whether or not the already connected dialup networking connection should be maintained or a new dialup networking connection made.  It may be necessary to turn this setting off (set to zero) if you have personalities that check mail on servers that are behind firewalls, and require that you dial in directly in order to connect to the mail server.
ReadMessageStyleSheet	<STYLE TYPE=""text/css"">\r\ n{font-family = ""%s""}\r\nTT {font-family = ""%s""}\r\nBLOCKQUOTE.CITE {border- left = solid %s}\r\nBLOCKQUOTE.CITE {padding-left = 0.5em}\r\nBLOCKQUOTE.CITE {m argin-left = 0}\r\nBLOCKQUOTE.CITE {margin-top = 0.5em}\r\n		HTML style sheet used for displaying received messages.
ReadReceiptAsk	1		Ask user for read receipts.
ReadReceiptNo	0		Always deny read receipts without prompting.
ReadReceiptYes	0		Always return read receipts without prompting.
ReplyAllAttribution	At %1, %2 you wrote:		Attribution line when a Reply to All is done.
ReplyAttribution	At %1, you wrote:		Attribution line when a Reply is done.
ReplyEnd			The string that gets inserted after the original text of a replied message. A newline is added before the string.
ReplyPrefix	>		The string that precedes all lines of the original message in a replied message
ReplyStart			The string that gets inserted before the original text of a replied message. A newline is added after the string.
ReservedDosNames	aux,com1,com2, com3,com4,con, lpt1,lpt2,lpt3,lpt4, nul,prn		Reserved names of files that will not be used for filenames of attachments.  These filenames are reserved for DOS, and can causes problems in actual files when these names are created.
ReturnAddressFormat	%1 < %2>		Format of the From field in outgoing messages. %1 is the Real name, and %2 is the Return address.
SaveDialupPasswordText			Where your dialup password is saved (in an encrypted format) if you have the Save Password switch turned on.
SavePasswordText			Where your POP password is saved (in an encrypted format) if you have the Save Password switch turned on.
SearchAllmapAccounts	0		Controls whether all of your mailboxes in all IMAP accounts will be looked at when searching, or just the mailboxes in the IMAP account that you start the search in (applies to local mailboxes as well, that is, a search starting in a local mailbox will only search your local mailboxes if this setting is off).
SeenIntro	1		You can make the introduction window return by changing the value to 0.
SendXAttachHeader	0		Controls whether or not the X-Attachment: header should be sent out with outgoing messages that contain attachments.
ShowAttachmentIcons	1		Controls whether or not icons representing attachments should be shown in the body of the message.
ShowMeTheErrors	0		Controls whether or not to show the error dialog box immediately on send/receive errors. By default, errors are listed in the Task Errors window, and that window is brought to the foreground.
ShowProgress	1		Show/hide the Progress window.
ShowProgressInactive	0		If Eudora is not the foreground application, this controls whether the Progress window should be shown or not.
ShowTipOfTheDay	0		Determines whether to display the Tip of the Day when Eudora is launched.
SMTPAuthBanished	CRAM-MD5		It should contain a comma-separated list of authentication schemes whose use is to be disallowed. The security conscious should set it to "LOGIN,PLAIN", as this ensures that your SMTP server password will always be strongly encrypted when it goes over the network. Users of IPSWITCH's Imail SMTP server should set it to "CRAM-MD5" so as to avoid a bug of theirs.
SMTPAuthAllowed	0		Allows you to add authentication to your SMTP server.
SMTPAuthRequired	0		Allows you to require authentication when gaining access to your SMTP server.
SMTPPort	25		Default port number for the SMTP service (smtp).
SMTPRecipientWrap	72		Column at which recipient headers (To: and Cc:) are wrapped when sending a message.
StatBarBlink	0		Controls whether or not the icon shown in the status bar for tasks that are waiting or have errors should blink.
StatBarRunningAnimationRate	125		Controls the speed of the animated icon in the status bar for tasks that are currently running (units in milliseconds between images).
StatBarWaitingAnimationRate	500		Controls the speed of the animated icon in the status bar for tasks that are currently waiting (units in milliseconds between images).
StatBarErrorAnimationRate	250		Controls the speed of the animated icon in the status bar for tasks that currently have errors (units in milliseconds between images).
StatBarGraphWidth	100		The width (in pixels) of the background task progress bar that shows up in the status bar.  Set to zero to prevent the progress bar from being displayed.
StationerySignatureRules	1		Signature precedence is as follows: User's selection; Stationery's signature; Personality's signature. Set this to 0 to put Personality's signature before Stationery's.
StripDuplicateAddresses	1		When replying to a message, controls whether or not duplicate copies of your email address will be removed from the To: and Cc: headers.  This helps to avoid buildup of your email address in email conversations.
SwitchFindKeyAccl	0		If on, Ctrl+F will open the Find Text window, and the Ctrl+Shift+F will open the Find Message window. By default, it’s the opposite.
SwitchPreviewWithTab	1		When on, pressing the <Tab> key in a mailbox will switch focus between the message list and the previewed message.
TabooHeaders	X- UID,Received,Status,X- UIDL,Message,In- Reply,X- Priority,Mime- Version,Content- ,X-Persona,Resent- Message,Referen es,Return,X400,X- 400,Mail- System,Errors-To,X- List,Delivery,Disposi tion,X- Juno,Precedence, X-Attachments,X- MSMail,X-MimeOLE		A comma-separated list of headers (without colons) that should not be shown when the "Show all headers" switch (the "Blah Blah Blah" icon) is off for a message. The matching is done on a prefix basis, so any header that begins with one of these values will not be shown.
TabSpaces	0		If on, then when the Tab key is pressed while the cursor is in the body of the message, spaces are inserted instead of a tab character.
TabStop	8		How many spaces to insert for a <Tab> in the body of a composition message.
TaskErrorKeepAll	0		When set, Eudora will not automatically remove errors from the task error list.
TaskErrorLinesPerRow	3		Number of lines for each error in the Task Errors window.
TaskErrorRemoveFromList	1		Controls whether or not to remove errors from the Task Errors window after seeing the corresponding error dialog box.
TaskMgrWaitTime	20		The number of seconds in which the user has to be idle in Eudora (which is defined as pressing any key or mouse button) before background tasks are processed (see IgnoreIdleOnManualCheck above for an exception case).
TaskStatusGraphCompletedColor	18,106,254		RGB color of the completed portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window.
TaskStatusGraphRemainColor	129,207,254		RGB color of the remaining portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window.
TaskStatusGraphBorderColor	0,0,0		RGB color of the border of the progress bar in the Task Status window.
TaskStatusRecvGraphCompletedColor	18,106,254		RGB color of the completed portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window for receiving mail.
TaskStatusRecvGraphRemainColor	129,207,254		RGB color of the remaining portion of the progress bar in the Task Status window for receiving mail.
TimeZone	TimeZone=xxxnnnyyy		Where xxx, yyy are timezone abbreviations like PST, PDT, CDT, and nnn is the offset in hours WEST of GMT (those that are east of GMT should enter a negative number here). xxx is the timezone during Standard Time and yyy is the timezone during Daylight Savings Time. If you do not change your clocks during Daylight Savings Time, leave yyy blank. Here are some samples: TimeZone=PST8PDT TimeZone=MET-1 If you don’t specify a TimeZone entry, then a Date: header will not be put in outgoing messages, which is fine for most because their mail server will insert the correct Date: header. If you don’t get messages bounced because of a missing Date: header, then leave the TimeZone entry alone.
TocDateLeeway	10		Number of seconds that the date on a mailbox .TOC file can be behind the .MBX file that Eudora will not flag as being out of date. Helpful for network file systems, especially Windows NT Server which seems to have problems correctly time/date stamping files.
ToolbarDisplayFix	0		Setting this to 1 causes the icons to be imaged from a device-independent bitmap to resolve issues with video drivers that cannot display Eudora’s toolbar icons. Setting this to 2 limits the toolbar to the icons that are in the default toolbar.
TypeToSelectSubject	0		When on, typing characters in the summaries of a mailbox window will attempt to match words in the Subject field. (Default behavior is to match the Who field.)
UnreadExpires	5		The number of days after which a message is no longer used to determine if a mailbox has unread messages in it.
URLHelper			The full path of the application used to launch URLs.
URLHighlight	1		Display URLs in blue underline style.
UsePOPCAPA	1		Whether or not Eudora should send the CAPA command to the POP server. Used only to see if the server supports the MANGLE command modifier. See UsePOPMangle.
UsePOPMangle	0		Whether or not Eudora should use the MANGLE modifer to the TOP command in a POP connection. MANGLE can produce some better results for messages that are large, giving a summary for the attachments in the message.
UsePOPSend	0		If UsePOPSend is on, Eudora will send mail using the POP3 extended command XTND XMIT. Since this is an optional command for POP3, many POP3 servers do not support this command (Berkeley's popper, however, does). There are pros and cons to using POP3 to send your mail. It provides a level of security since it requires a username/password pair to send mail messages, unlike SMTP. It is faster than SMTP, especially when checking for new mail at the same time. It doesn't check for valid recipients until the entire message is sent, and some implementations (Berkeley's popper, for example) won't tell you which recipients are invalid and will send the message to the valid recipients anyway.
UseQuickTime	1		If off, Eudora will never attempt to use QuickTime to display images. Useful for situations where QuickTime is causing instability in the system.
UserChangeLex	uchange.tlx		Filename of user-defined list of words to change when spell checking.
UserIgnoreLex	uignore.tlx		Filename of user-defined list of words to ignore when spell checking.
UserSuggestLex	usuggest.tlx		Filename of user-defined list of words to suggest when spell checking.
WarnMapiAutoSend	1		If 1 (on), Eudora provides a warning dialog when a simple MAPI client tries to send messages through Eudora without showing any UI to the user. This was also added to the Tools/Options/MAPI dialog.
WebLinkReminderLaterNum Minutes	360 minutes		When you get a link reminder, if you select Remind Me Later, the minimum wait until the next reminder.
WholeSummaryLabelColor	1		When on, the entire summary of a message that has a label is drawn in that label’s color. When off, only the text in the Label column appears in the label’s color.
WordWrapColumn	76		When the "Word wrap" switch is on, this is the column in which lines in outgoing messages are wrapped.
WordWrapMax	80		When the "Word wrap" switch is on, this is the length at which a line in an outgoing message is considered too long and must be wrapped.
WordWrapOnScreen	0		If this is on (set to non-zero), then the composition window will automatically wrap text on the screen at the number of characters specified in WordWrapColumn, regardless of the width of the window.

Mappings

This is a sample Mappings section. It is not a default for Eudora if you have a missing or empty Mappings section. The Mappings section contains information for mapping between PC file extensions, Macintosh creator and type, and MIME type and subtype for attachment files (in that order). Entries marked "in" work on only incoming messages, and entries marked "out" work on only outgoing messages. Entries marked "both" work on both incoming and outgoing messages.
For a more detailed explanation, see the "MIME and Mappings" section of the online user manual.

out=txt,ttxt,TEXT,text,plain
both=doc,MSWD,,application,msword
in=xls,XCEL,,,
out=xls,XCEL,XLS4,,
both=xlc,XCEL,XLC3,,
both=xlm,XCEL,XLM3,,
both=ppt,PPT3,SLD3,,
both=wp,WPC2,.WP5,application,wordperfect5.1
both=zip,,,application,zip
both=rtf,,,application,rtf
both=ps,,,application,postcript
in=eps,,EPSF,,
out=eps,dPro,EPSF,application,postscript
both=mpg,,,video,mpeg
both=jpg,,,image,jpeg
both=gif,,,image,gif
both=tif,,,image,tiff
both=pct,,PICT,,
both=mac,MPNT,PNTG,,

Window Position

The Window Position section saves the positions of the standard windows (not your mailbox windows and message windows).

Entry					Default Value
CheckSpellingWindowPosition					0,0,0,0
DebugTraceWindowPosition					110,185,635,500
FilterReportWindowPosition					10,10,500,300
FiltersWindowPosition					60,345,580,480
FindWindowPosition					60,345,580,480
InputDialogWindowPosition					50,100,358,450
MailboxesWindowPosition					80,80,565,415
MainWindowPosition					0,0,640,480
NicknamesWindowPosition					50,5,590,475
PhWindowPosition					10,40,630,440
ProgressWindowPosition					0,0,0,0
SignatureWindowPosition					10,60,630,240
TextFileWindowPosition					0,0,600,460

Tool Bar

This section reflects the current settings of the main Eudora toolbar. If you create additional Eudora toolbars, then additional Tool Bar sections will appear in the INI file.

Note: We strongly recommend that you do not change any of the settings in the [Tool Bar] section(s) of the INI file, and that you instead make any changes to any Eudora toolbar from the toolbar customization dialog box (Customize dialog box). This dialog box is accessed by right-clicking anywhere on the toolbar and selecting Customize... from the drop-down menu. For more information, see "Customizing the Main Toolbar" in the online user manual.

Directory Services

The Directory Services section controls the use of the Directory Services window (accessed from Eudora's Tools menu) and its associated databases. For more information on Directory Services, see its dedicated section in the online user manual.

Note: Of the entries listed below, only those marked with an asterisk (*) are user-settable.

Entry		Default Value		Description
OldKeepOnTopConverted				What in pre-4.0 versions of Eudora used to be [Settings] AddressKeepForeground is now KeepOnTop in this section. KeepOnTop saves the check state of the "Keep On Top" check button in the Directory Services window. Eudora uses this entry (OldKeepOnTopConverted) to determine if the AddressKeepForeground entry from a pre-4.0 version of Eudora has been mapped to the current version. When Eudora 4.x is run for the first time, it sets the KeepOnTop entry (described below) equal to the value of AddressKeepForeground. In addition, it also sets this entry equal to 1 so that the next time Eudora is run, it reads the check state from KeepOnTop rather than from AddressKeepForeground.
PanesY*				This entry reflects the height of the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down.
LeftPaneX*				This entry reflects the width of the left pane of the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down.
RightPaneX*				This entry reflects the width of the right pane of the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down.
KeepOnTop*				This entry reflects the check state of the "Keep On Top" check button in the Directory Services window when Eudora was last shut down.
LDAP:ldap.bigfoot.com*				This entry reflects the check state of the LDAP database "ldap.bigfoot.com" when Eudora was last shut down. The check state of other LDAP databases is reflected in similar entries.
Ph:ph.bigfoot.com*				This entry reflects the check state of the Ph database "ph.bigfoot.com" when Eudora was last shut down. The check state of other Ph databases is reflected in similar entries.
Eudora Address Book:Eudora Nicknames*				This entry reflects the check state of the Eudora Address Book database "Eudora Nicknames" when Eudora was last shut down. The check state of other Eudora Address Book databases is reflected in similar entries.
Finger:hostname.domain.com*				This entry reflects the check state of the Finger database "hostname.domain.com" when Eudora was last shut down. The check state of other Finger databases (or daemons) is reflected in similar entries.
DIRSERV-Major				This entry reflects the major version of DirServ.dll that was last registered. Combined with the minor version of this DLL (see the next entry below), Eudora at run time determines whether the DLL is a newer version than the one last registered so that it can register the new COM objects, if any, in the newer DLL.
DIRSERV-Minor				This entry reflects the minor version of DirServ.dll that was last registered. See the description above for DIRSERV-Major.
ISOCK-Major				This entry reflects the major version of ISock.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
ISOCK-Minor				This entry reflects the minor version of ISock.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
EUDORABK-Major				This entry reflects the major version of EudoraBk.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
EUDORABK-Minor				This entry reflects the minor version of EudoraBk.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
LDAP-Major				This entry reflects the major version of Ldap.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
LDAP-Minor				This entry reflects the minor version of Ldap.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
PH-Major				This entry reflects the major version of Ph.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.
PH-Minor				This entry reflects the minor version of Ph.dll that was last registered. A similar description as the one in DIRSERV-Major above applies.

Debug

The Debug section controls aspects of the Eudora log file. The Eudora log file is a handy tool for debugging network connections, especially when using the dialup connection method.

Entry	Default Value	Description
LogFileName	EUDORA.LOG	The name of the log file.
LogFileSize	100	The size (in KB) of the log file that, when reached, will cause the log file to be copied to the file EUDORLOG.OLD and a new log file to be started.
LogLevel	11 (which is bits 1, 2, and 4)	A bit-mapped value telling what type of information to log: Bit 1 (1): Sending of a message Bit 2 (2): Receipt of a message Bit 3 (4): Dialup script navigation commands Bit 4 (8): Alert messages Bit 5 (16): Progress messages Bit 6 (32): All bytes sent Bit 7 (64): All bytes received  Bit 8 (128): Corrupt mailbox TOC file messages Bit 9 (256): Basic EMSAPI translator messages Bit 10 (512): Advanced EMSAPI translator messages

To get the latest EUDORA.INI file settings, click www.eudora.com/techsupport/ini.html:

The EUDORA.INI settings are continuously being updated.


Putting Multiple Users on One PC

To have multiple users on one computer, create shortcuts to the Eudora executable for each user. The mail directories can be named whatever you like, and put anywhere you like, including on floppies or network drives. To tell Eudora which directory to use, specify that directory in the Target field of your shortcut. A new Eudora.ini file will be created once the user launches Eudora.

To have multiple users on one computer, do the following:

1.	For each user, create a shortcut to the Eudora executable file (Eudora.exe).

2.	Right-click on the new shortcut and select Properties.

3.	Click the Shortcut tab.

4.	In the Target field, add the path to the user’s Eudora.ini file.

5.	To start Eudora, users simply double-click on their shortcut. A new Eudora.ini file will be created for each user located in the directory specified in the Target: field.


Customizing the Toolbar

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

The Toolbar is a group of buttons that gives you easy access to your frequently used Eudora commands. You can create buttons for most Eudora commands.

•	To position the toolbar on the monitor, hold down the left mouse button on the bar itself (not on a button) and drag it around until you find a place you like. You can dock it to the top or bottom of the Eudora window or put it anywhere on your desktop.

•	To add buttons to the toolbar, click the right mouse button somewhere on the toolbar, and choose Customize. The Customize Toolbar dialog box appears. Select a Eudora menu from the list on the left, then drag buttons from the list on the right down to the toolbar.

•	To change the placement of a button on the toolbar, hold down the Alt key and drag the button to where you want it.

•	To remove a button from the toolbar, drag the button off of the toolbar.


Toolbar Categories

Toolbar button categories (these are the same as the Eudora menu commands).


Toolbar Buttons

The toolbar buttons available in the selected category. These are generally the commands that are available from that menu item.


Toolbar button description
Description

A description of the last-selected toolbar button.


Fonts and Color

Displays the Font dialog box so that you can change the font, size, style, and color.


Checking Mail Options Window

The Checking Mail Options determine how Eudora checks for and receives incoming mail messages sent to your principal email account, that is your dominant personality.

To display the Checking Mail options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Click Checking Mail. The Checking Mail options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Checking Mail:

Mail Server — This is the name of your incoming-mail server as entered in the Mail Server (Incoming) field of the Getting Started options. See the Getting Started Options Window for more details.

Login Name — This is the login name you entered in the Login Name field of the Getting Started options. See the Getting Started Options Window section for more details.

Check for mail every _ minute(s) — If you enter a number greater than zero in this field, then at regular intervals, Eudora automatically checks your incoming mail server for new mail and transfers to your computer any mail addressed to your primary account. The number you enter here specifies the number of minutes between automatic mail checks. It’s a good idea to set this at no less than 15 minutes. Checking mail more frequently puts an unnecessary drain on your incoming mail server. This option only works when Eudora is running. Entering 0 in this field turns off automatic mail checking.

Don’t check without a network connection—If this is selected, Eudora will not attempt to retrieve mail unless you are connected to a network.

Don’t check when using battery — If this is on and your computer is running on battery power, mail is not automatically checked even if automatic mail-checking is on (that is, the “Check for mail every _ minute(s)” field has a number greater than zero in it).

Send on check — If this is on, any messages that are queued in the Out mailbox are sent when a mail-check is performed, whether the mail check is automatic or manual. If this is off, messages queued in the Out box are not sent during a mail check.

Save password — If this is on, your password is remembered even if you quit and restart Eudora, so you’ll never be prompted to enter it. If this is off, you must enter your password each time you quit and restart Eudora. Only turn this option on if your computer is in a secure place.


Getting Started Options Window

On the Getting Started options window, you can determine the minimum information necessary to send and receive mail. The information here is for your “dominant” personality, which is your principal email account.

 For your convenience, some fields appear in more than one category. For example, your return address appears in both the Getting Started options window and the Incoming Mail options window. Changing an option in one category changes the option in all categories in which it appears.

To display the Getting Started options window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2.	Click Getting Started. The Getting Started options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Getting Started:

Real name—This is the real name assigned to your principal account generally your first and last name. The text you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this account, and identifies to your recipients who the mail is from.

Return address—This is the return email address used in outgoing messages and recipients’ replies, if this address is different from your incoming mail account. The address you enter here is included in the From field of all your outgoing messages from this account, and when a recipient replies to a message from this account, the reply is sent to this address. If you do not enter an address in this field, Eudora uses your incoming mail account as the return address. Incoming mail accounts are usually of the form loginname@incomingmailserver. For example, suppose your incoming mail account is beatrixp@wabbits.myfirm.com but your return address is beatrixp@myfirm.com slightly different. You would then enter beatrixp@myfirm.com in this field.

If you do enter an address in this field, first test the address to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you. If you use an invalid return address, no one will be able to reply to your mail.

Mail Server (Incoming)—This is the name of the incoming-mail server for your principal email account. All incoming messages to your primary account are routed through this server. Use the Incoming Mail options window to specify whether this server uses POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol). A sample server name might be popserver.myfirm.com.

Login Name—This is the name you use to log in to your primary email account, for accounts that require a user login. For example, in the incoming mail account beatrixp@wabbits.myfirm.com, the login name is beatrixp.

SMTP server (outgoing) — This is the name of the outgoing mail server for your principal email account. All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server. If the computer that your primary incoming mail account is on also runs an SMTP server, you can leave this field blank. SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.

Allow authentication— Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail, just like it does for receiving mail. Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication. Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it. The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM-MD5. If CRAM-MD5 is not available, LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used.


Incoming Mail Options Window

The Incoming Mail options determine how Eudora receives incoming messages addressed to your primary email account. The options configure the incoming mail server, whose name is entered in the Mail Server (Incoming) field in the Getting Started Options Window.

To display the Incoming Mail options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Click Incoming Mail. The Incoming Mail options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Incoming Mail:

Server configuration — Specify which email protocol the incoming mail server uses: POP (Post Office Protocol) or IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol). Ask your email administrator which one to use, if you are not sure.

The options in the rest of this window depend on whether you’ve chosen POP or IMAP in this field. Options for both configurations are described below:

When Server configuration = POP:

Leave mail on server — If this is on, Eudora copies incoming messages to your computer and leaves the message on the POP server. If this is off, Eudora transfers incoming messages to your computer and deletes the message from the POP server. For details, see Leaving Mail on the Server and Managing your Mail on a POP Server.

Delete from server after _ day(s) — This option has a check box for turning it on and off and an edit box for specifying the number of days mail that was left on the POP server should be saved before being deleted. It is a good idea not to leave copies of your messages on the POP server indefinitely, as this will create mail storage problems on the server.

Delete from server when emptied from Trash — If this is on, any messages that are deleted from your Trash mailbox are also deleted from the POP server. For details, see Managing your Mail on a POP Server.

Skip messages over _ K in size — If this is on, messages over the specified size are downloaded only in part. These messages include the first few lines, and a statement that says the message is not complete. This can be useful on slow connections.

Offline — If this is on, Eudora won’t attempt to make any connections. This is good to have on if you’re using Eudora on a laptop computer that is not continuously connected.

Authentication style — This specifies which POP account authentication technology to use for this account: Passwords, Kerberos, APOP, or RPA. Ask your email administrator which one to use, if you are not sure. Use RPA for CompuServe.

When Server configuration = IMAP:

IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix — This specifies the mailbox location prefix that IMAP will use when locating your mailboxes on the incoming mail server. An example prefix is /usr/mail. Ask your email administrator what to enter here, if you are not sure.

For new mail, download — These options (you must choose one) let you control the way incoming mail is downloaded from the IMAP server.

Minimal headers only — If this option is on, only a limited set of message headers, and nothing else, is downloaded for each incoming message. (That means the remaining message headers, the message body, and any attachments are not downloaded for the message.)

Full message except attachments over _ K — If this option is on, the full message (full set of message headers and the message body) and any attachments smaller than the specified size are downloaded for each incoming message. Also, any attachments larger than the specified size are not downloaded with the message. To download all of your IMAP attachments, enter a large number in this field.

When I delete a message—These options (you must choose one) let you control the way you want your deleted messages handled.

Mark it as deleted—Select this option to mark your messages on the IMAP for deletion. These messages are not removed from the server until you choose to remove them. See Deleting a Message from the IMAP Server.

Move it to (mailbox)—Select this option to move your deleted messages to a specific mailbox. The default is your Trash mailbox.

When I delete a message—These options (you must choose one) let you control the way you want your deleted messages handled.

Authentication style—This specifies which IMAP account authentication technology to use for this account: Passwords, Kerberos, or CRAM-MD5. Ask your email administrator which one to use if you are not sure.


Sending Mail Options Window

The Sending Mail options determine how Eudora sends your outgoing messages from your primary email account (dominant personality).

To display the Sending Mail options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Click Sending Mail. The Sending Mail options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Sending Mail:

Return address — This is your return email address, if different from your incoming mail account. See Getting Started Options Window for more details.

Domain to add to unqualified addresses — This is the domain name that Eudora automatically adds to an unqualified address in messages sent from your primary account. An unqualified address is an address that doesn’t have an “@” sign followed by a domain name. This can be used to save time when addressing large numbers of messages to users in the same domain.

SMTP server — This is the name of the outgoing mail server for your principal email account. All outgoing messages sent from your primary account are routed through this server. If the computer that your primary incoming mail account is on also runs an SMTP server, you can leave this field blank. SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol.

Immediate send — If this is on, the rightmost button in the toolbar of the message composition window is labeled Send. Clicking this button immediately sends the message to the SMTP server. If this option is off, the button is labeled Queue and clicking it places the message in the Out mailbox marked ready for delivery (Q).

Allow authentication— Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail, just like it does for receiving mail. Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication. Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it. The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM-MD5. If CRAM-MD5 is not available, LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used.

.

Send on check — If this is on, any messages from your primary account that are queued in the Out mailbox are sent when mail is checked for this account, whether the mail-check is automatic or manual.

Select a default Stationery for new messages — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) This is the default stationery to be used in all outgoing messages from your dominant account. Select a stationery file from the drop-down, or select <No Default> for no default stationery. If a stationery file is selected, that file is used when you open new messages from this account (except with the Redirect or Send Again commands). The message toolbar in the composition window is set according to how the stationery message was saved, regardless of how the options below are set. But, you can always change them after you open the message. For more on stationery, see Using Stationery  and Stationery Window .

Select defaults when not using Stationery — (Sponsored and Paid modes only) The values you choose for the following options apply only when you are not using a default stationery file, that is, when the Select a default Stationery for new messages option, above, is set to <No Default>. Otherwise, if you have selected a default stationery file in that drop-down, then the values below are ignored. Instead, Eudora uses their corresponding values that were set when the stationery file was saved. So, for example, if you choose default stationery that uses a custom signature and you set the Default signature drop-down below to your Standard signature, your Standard signature will be ignored and the custom signature will be used.

Default signature — This sets the default signature to be used in all outgoing messages sent from your dominant account. Select a signature from the drop-down, or select <No Default> for no default signature. If a signature is selected, that signature is used on the toolbar of new messages from your primary account. You can always change the signature in a particular outgoing message from the toolbar Signature drop-down. For more on signatures, see Using a Signature and Signatures Window. Default stationery overrides this option (see above).

Word wrap — If this is on, Eudora automatically inserts carriage returns in long lines when a message is sent, creating roughly 76 characters per line. This makes the message legible on the recipient’s computer. It is a good idea not to include your own carriage returns within paragraphs if you have this option on—only use carriage returns to create new paragraphs. We strongly recommend that you leave this option on. Default stationery overrides this option (see above).

Keep copies — If this is on, a copy of each message you send is kept in the Out mailbox. If this option is off, outgoing messages are put in the Trash mailbox after they are sent. Default stationery overrides this option (see above).

May use quoted-printable — If this is on, Eudora uses quoted-printable encoding when necessary, such as when sending messages that contain special characters or long lines of text. If this option is off, quoted-printable encoding is never used. We recommend that you leave this option on. Default stationery overrides this option (see above).

Tabs in body of message — If this is on, pressing the Tab key within the message body inserts a tab. If it is off, pressing the Tab key within the message body moves the cursor to the To field. Default stationery overrides this option (see above).


Replying Options Window

The Replying options determine how replies are created.

To display the Replying options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Replying. The Replying options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Replying:

Map Ctrl+R to “Reply to All” — If this is on, then when you hold down the Ctrl key and press R, a new message is created addressed to all of the recipients of the original message as well as the sender.

Copy original’s priority to reply — If this is on, your replies use the same priority as the original message.

Automatically Fcc to original mailbox — If this is on, replies are automatically copied to the same mailbox that contains the original message with the exception of the In box, whose replies are copied to the Out box.

Include signature on reply — If this is selected, your default signature will be included on all of your replies automatically.

Quote only the selected text—If this is selected, only the text you highlight in a received message will appear on the reply message.

When replying to all — This specifies how to address a reply. If Include yourself is on, when you Reply to all (as described above) your address is left in the address list of the new message and you receive a copy of your own reply. If this option is off (the default), your address is removed from the reply message and you do not receive a copy of the reply.

To determine who you are for the Include yourself option, Eudora uses the “me” nickname. You create the “me” nickname in your Address Book. If you do have a “me” nickname, Eudora uses the contents of the  Login Name, Mail Server, and Return Address from the Getting Started options.

If Put original To: recipients in Cc: field is on (the default is off), the addresses of the original message recipients are moved from the To field to the Cc field of the reply-to-all message. Only the address of the original sender is placed in the To field. If this option is off, all of the addresses are placed in the To field of the reply message.


Attachments Options Window

The Attachments options determine how Eudora sends and receives file attachments.

To display the Attachments options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Attachments. The Attachments options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Attachments:

Encoding method — This specifies what default encoding method to use for attached documents: MIME, BinHex, or Uuencode. To change the method for just the current message, use the Attachment Type drop-down menu in the outgoing message window. For details, see the section “Attaching a File to a Message.”

Put text attachments in body of message — If this is on, Eudora puts any plain-text attachment you send directly within the message body, as if it were typed in manually.

Attachment directory — This specifies what directory to put incoming attachments into. To specify a folder, single-click the folder name. A dialog box appears prompting you to select a folder. The default directory is the Attach sub-directory off of your Eudora directory.

Delete attachments when emptying Trash — If this is on, Eudora automatically deletes an attachment received with a message when that message is deleted from your system, that is, when the message is emptied from the Trash. The attachment must still be in the folder defined as the Attachments Folder. If you want to save an attachment but delete the message, move the attachment to another folder or turn this option off.

Delete automatic attachments — This specifies how to handle attachments to automatically generated messages, such as is created with the Insert System Configuration command.

Never — If this is on, automatic attachments are never deleted from the attachment directory.

After sending message — If this is on, automatic attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are sent.

When message emptied from Trash — If this is on, automatic attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are emptied from the trash.


Fonts Options Window

The Fonts options determine how Eudora displays and prints text. Note that the choices available for each option, and the default, may depend on the fonts installed in your system.

To display the Fonts options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Fonts icon. The Fonts options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Fonts:

Message — These fields list the proportional and fixed-width fonts to be used for displaying the text in your received and composition messages and in the message preview pane in mailbox windows. Also included are the size of each font and the use of a proportional or fixed-width font by default.

Proportional — Specify the proportional font to use in message windows and the preview pane. Spacing is adjusted according to each character’s width.

Fixed-width — Specify the fixed-width font to use in message windows and the preview pane. Each character takes up the same amount of space.

Use proportional font by default — If this option is on, message windows and the preview pane use your specified proportional font by default. If this option is off, message windows and the preview pane use your specified fixed-width font by default.

Size — Specify the size of the font to be used for text in message windows and the preview pane.

Printer — These fields list the font and size to be used when printing any text from Eudora using the Print... command—messages, text files, signature files, and so forth.

Font — Specify the font to use when printing text from Eudora.

Size — Specify the font size to use when printing text from Eudora.

Screen — These fields list the font and size to be used when displaying any Eudora screen text other than that displayed in received and composition messages and the message preview pane. This includes text files, signature files, and message summaries in mailbox windows.

Font — Specify the font to use when displaying all other screen text in Eudora.

Size — Specify the font size to use when displaying all other screen text in Eudora.


Display Options Window

The Display options determine how Eudora displays various objects in the main Eudora window and the category icons in the Options list.

To display the Display options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Display. The Display options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Display:

Show toolbar — If this option is on, the main window toolbar appears (see the section “Customizing the Toolbar).

Show toolbar tips — If this option is on, holding the mouse pointer over a button in the main window toolbar displays a very brief description of that button’s function.

Show cool bars — If this option is on, the main window toolbar buttons have a flat look and only become raised when you position the mouse pointer over the button. If this option is off, the main window toolbar buttons always have a raised look.

Show status bar — If this option is on, Eudora displays a status bar at the bottom of the main window. The status bar provides a brief description of menu items and toolbar buttons.

Show category icons — This option allows you to turn the Category icons in the Options dialog box on and off.

Show MDI task bar — If this option is on, Eudora displays the Eudora taskbar at the bottom of the window work area. This taskbar contains buttons for all open and minimized normal Eudora windows, such as mailboxes, email, and address book. See Using the Eudora Taskbar.


Signatures Window

Use this window to manage and apply signatures.

To open the Signature window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, choose Signatures. Or, if the Signature window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab.

The Signature window displays a single-column list of your signature files.

Note:	You can only select one item at a time in the list; you cannot select multiple items.

If you right-click a signature in the list, a context menu appears with the following commands (the standard Eudora window-management commands appear at the bottom):

•	New — Create a new signature. Eudora prompts you for the name of the new signature, then opens an editing window for you to type the signature text. Save the text with the File menu Save command, or close without saving to discard.

•	Edit — Open an editing window for the selected signature. Double-click a signature as a shortcut for this command. Save your changes with the File menu Save command, or close the window without saving to discard your changes.

•	Delete — Delete the selected signature. Eudora asks you to confirm the deletion. Use the Delete key (Del) as a shortcut for this command.

•	Rename — Rename the selected signature. Use the F2 key as a shortcut for this command, or click the signature item’s name box, then edit the name right in the box.

You can also display the context menu and create a new signature by right-clicking anywhere in an empty Signature window or by right-clicking anywhere off a signature item in a non-empty Signature window.


Viewing Mail Options Window

The Viewing Mail options determine how Eudora displays incoming and outgoing message windows and the message preview pane in mailbox windows.

To display the Viewing Mail options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Viewing Mail. The Viewing Mail options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Viewing Mail:

Message Window — These options determine how Eudora displays received and composition messages.

Use Microsoft’s viewer — If this is off, Eudora displays advanced formatting, graphics, and multimedia in incoming and outgoing messages, using its own built-in viewer. If this is on, Eudora takes full advantage of the Web browser capabilities of Microsoft’s Internet Explorer 4.0 or later by showing Web content right in incoming and outgoing messages or linking to the Internet, without your having to open the Web browser. This option is only available if you have Microsoft’s Internet Explorer version 4.0 or higher installed and available on your system.

Message window width — This specifies the width of new and received message windows (in characters). This option has no effect on what your mail looks like when it is sent. When mail is sent, Eudora wraps at or before 76 columns.

Note:	If you use a proportional font, Eudora sets the window width based on the average width of the characters in the font.

Message window height — This specifies the height of new and received message windows (in lines).

Note:	If the “Zoom windows when opening” option is turned on, received message window heights are automatically adjusted to the height of the message text.

Preview Pane — These options determine the visibility and behavior of the message preview pane that appears at the bottom of mailbox windows. For more information, see Message Preview Pane.

Show message preview pane — If this option is on, Eudora displays the message preview pane in mailbox windows. The preview pane previews a single selected message. A splitter between the preview pane and the message summary list lets you resize the preview pane relative to the list.

Mark previewed messages as read after _ second(s) — If this option is on and the “Show message preview pane” option is turned on, the message currently selected in the mailbox window and previewed in the preview pane is automatically marked as read (blank in the Status column) after the specified number of seconds. If this option is off, a previewed message will not automatically be marked as read. Note: You can use the Shift+Space shortcut to convert a message back and forth between the Unread (•) and Read status.

Automatically open next message — If this is on, deleting or transferring the current message opens the next message in the mailbox, but only if that message is unread.

Zoom windows when opening — If this option is on, new message windows automatically open to their “zoomed” size. The zoomed size is computed on a window-by-window basis. For message windows, zoomed size is just long enough to display all of the message (but no longer than the main window), and as wide as the Message window width setting. Composition windows zoom to the height specified by the Message window height setting.

Allow executables in HTML content—If this is selected, you are able to run programs such as Java™ Applets, JavaScript™, VB Script™, and ActiveX™ Controls that are embedded in an HTML texted message. For security reasons, you may want to leave this option deselected.


Styled Text Options Window

The Styled Text options determine when to use style information in outgoing and incoming messages.

To display the Styled Text options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Styled Text. The Styled Text options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Styled Text:

Show formatting toolbar — If this is on, the formatting toolbar displays by default in new message windows. If this is off, the formatting toolbar is hidden by default in new message windows. This toolbar lets you easily format text styles in new messages.

When sending mail with styled text (HTML) — This specifies what to do with HTML text styles when you send mail. The styles are delivered to your recipients using the HyperText Marking Language (HTML) format. However, the styles your recipient sees depends on how well their email software supports this standard.

HTML is the text formatting standard used in the World Wide Web by Web browsers and newer email applications. HTML allows you to use enriched text, which includes different fonts, color, sizes, bold, and so forth. Also, HTML lets you embed pictures and create bullet lists in the emails you send.

Send plain and styled version in message, Send styled text only, Send plain text only — These options apply only to messages that have some styled content. Plain text messages are always sent as just plain text. If a message has styled text, then these options control which versions of the message are sent: an HTML version, a plain text version, or both an HTML and a plain text version in the same message.

If you send plain and styled text, then your recipient will be able to view your message regardless whether their email program supports HTML viewing. If HTML viewing is not supported, then the message is viewed in plain text; otherwise, it is viewed in HTML.

Ask me each time — If this is on, you are warned when you try to send or queue a message with text styles. And you are given the option to send a plain text version, an HTML version, or both in a single message.

When the body of a message has no styles, but the signature does have styles: Send the signature with styles — If this is selected, a signature with styled text is sent with a message that has no styled text. If this is deselected, then the signature is sent but the text styles are removed.

Note. If selected, the signature becomes part of the message text. However, if an attachment is included with your message, this option turns off.


Spell Checking Options Window

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

These options control the behavior of Eudora’s built-in checker when it performs a spelling check on the body of a message composition window, a text file, or a signature file. You can also change these options from the Spelling Options dialog box, accessed by clicking Options in the Check Spelling dialog box. For more information, see Checking Your Spelling.

To display the Spell Checking options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Spell Checking. The Spell Checking options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Spell Checking:

Ignore capitalized words — The spelling checker ignores words that begin with a capital letter, such as proper nouns.

Ignore words with all capitals — The spelling checker ignores words that contain all capital letters, such as acronyms.

Ignore words with numbers — The spelling checker ignores words that contain numbers.

Ignore words with mixed case — The spelling checker ignores words that contain a mixture of uppercase and lowercase characters.

Report doubled words — The spelling checker reports words that appear twice in sequence in text and identifies them as doubled words.

Suggest words — If this is on, then when the spelling checker encounters an unknown word, it displays Eudora’s suggestions for the correct spelling of the word in the Suggestions field of the Check Spelling dialog box (see Checking Your Spelling ). You can also select any combination of the suggestion options: Phonetic words (off by default), Split words (on by default), Typographic words (on by default).

Note:	If Eudora has no suggestions for the word in its dictionary, then no suggestions are listed.

Check spelling:

Automatically as you type — Turn this on when you want to use the automatic spell checker. Misspelled words are highlighted automatically. For more information see Automatic Spell Checking.

Only when requested — Turn this on when you don’t want to use the automatic spell checker but would rather check your spelling all at once. See Automatic Spell Checking.

Outgoing messages:

Ignore original text — The spelling checker ignores any text that is preceded by a quote mark, which is a right angle-bracket (>) for unstyled text, and an excerpt bar (|) for styled text. Eudora assumes that this text was originally from another message, and therefore does not need to be spell-checked.

Check when message queued/sent —The spelling checker checks the spelling of outgoing messages when you use the Queue or Send commands.

Warn me when I queue/send a message: Without completing the spell check — If this option is on and the Check when message queued/sent option is on, Eudora displays a warning if you attempt to queue or send a message without completing the spell check.


Date Display Options Window

The Date Display Options determine how message dates are displayed in the Date column of mailbox window message summaries.

To display the Date Display options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Date Display. The Date Display options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Date Display:

Display dates using — This specifies what time zone to use to display dates.

Sender’s timezone — If on, messages are displayed with the sender’s time and date, as determined by the sender’s time zone.

Local timezone — If on, messages are displayed with your time and date, based on your local time zone.

Date formats [default: Fixed] — These options and fields specify how to display message dates whether with a fixed or an age-sensitive format and the specific formatting for the selected option. A fixed format means that all dates are displayed under the same formatting rule. An age-sensitive format means that message dates are displayed differently depending on how old the messages are. Formatting is entered in the text fields using the format key at the bottom of the Date Display Options window (discussed further below).

Fixed [defaults: %1 %2 %4] — If this is on, all message dates are displayed using the formatting entered in the edit field, based on the formatting key (see below). The default format (%1%2%4) specifies that all message dates will be in this format: message time followed by message date followed by message time zone (but only if the message did not originate from your local time zone). Example: 02:56PM11/21/97-0800.

Age-sensitive — If this is on, message dates are displayed differently based on the age of the messages. The three age categories are RECENT, OLD, and ANCIENT. The age of a message is measured from the date and time at which the message was composed or sent, based on the sender’s email package, and this depends on your setting for the Display dates using option. RECENT messages are all those that are “younger” than the hours you specify in the Hours to be OLD field. ANCIENT messages are all those that are older than the “expiration time” entered in the Hours to be ANCIENT field. OLD messages are all those whose age falls between that of RECENT and ANCIENT messages: they are older than the number of hours specified in the Hours to be OLD field, but younger than the number of hours specified in the Hours to be ANCIENT field. The date display format for all messages falling in the RECENT, OLD, and ANCIENT categories is determined by your entry in the RECENT format, OLD format, and ANCIENT format fields, respectively.

RECENT format [default: %1] — Your entry in this field determines the format in which the dates of RECENT messages are displayed. RECENT messages are all those younger than the number in the Hours to be OLD field. The default RECENT format of %1 and the default Hours to be OLD of 24 means that all messages from the past 24 hours are displayed with the time.

Hours to be OLD [default: 24] — Your entry in this field determines the point at which RECENT messages become OLD messages. The default entry of 24 hours means that messages become OLD after one day.

OLD format [default: %3] — Your entry in this field determines the format in which the dates of OLD messages are displayed. OLD messages are those that are older than the Hours to be OLD but younger than the Hours to be ANCIENT. The default OLD format of %3, the default Hours to be OLD of 24, and the default Hours to be ANCIENT of 168 means that all messages older than one day and younger than one week are displayed with the day of the week.

Hours to be ANCIENT [default: 168] — Your entry in this field determines the point at which OLD messages become ANCIENT messages. The default entry of 168 hours means that messages become ANCIENT after a week.

ANCIENT format [default: %2] — Your entry in this field determines the format in which the dates of ANCIENT messages are displayed. ANCIENT messages are all those older than the number in the Hours to be ANCIENT field. The default entry of %2 and the default Hours to be ANCIENT of 168 means that all those messages older than a week are displayed with the date.

Format Key — Use the format key to determine how to program entries in the Fixed field and the format fields (RECENT, OLD, and ANCIENT) of this Options window. In each field, enter %1 to stand for the Time, enter %2 to stand for the Date, enter %3 to stand for the Day of the week, and enter %4 to stand for the Time zone, but only if the message did not originate from the local time zone. Separate each entry with a space to improve readability of the display output: for example, %1%2%4.


Labels Options Window

The Labels options determine the title and color of the seven labels that can be used to categorize messages.

To display the Labels options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Labels. The Labels options window appears.

To change a label title, type the new title in the field to the right of the label number. To change a label color, single-click the label number to display the Color dialog box.

Color dialog box

You can select from one of the predefined basic colors or create your own custom colors. To assign a basic color to a label, select the color and click OK. To create a custom color, click Define Custom Colors to display the custom colors palette.

Custom colors palette

To define a custom color, do the following:

1. 	Select one of the 16 custom color boxes.

2. 	Using the mouse pointer, click anywhere on the color palette to select the color hue and saturation. Use the color control bar to the right of the color palette to adjust the color.

3. 	When you are satisfied with the color, click Add to Custom Colors.

4. 	Once you have completed creating the custom colors, select the desired label color and click OK.


Getting Attention Options Window

The Getting Attention options determine what Eudora does when it is running in the background and wants your attention, or when new mail arrives.

To display the Getting Attention options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Getting Attention. The Getting Attention options window appears

Listed below are field descriptions for Getting Attention:

Use an alert dialog box — If this is on, an alert dialog box notifies you when new mail is received.

Open mailbox — If this is on, mailboxes are automatically opened when new mail arrives in them, and the first unread message of the last unread batch of messages is selected.

Play a sound — If this is on, a sound is played when Eudora needs attention. To select a sound (.wav) file, click the button below the Play a sound option (the button is empty by default). The Select sound file dialog box is then displayed, allowing you to select a sound.

Generate filter report — If this is on, a filter report is generated when filters are used. Filter reports are displayed in the Filter Report window, accessed from the Tools menu. Note that this option must be on in order for such reports to be displayed in that window. For more details, see Filter Report Window .


Extra Warnings Options Window

The Extra Warnings options determine whether you are warned before making a possible mistake. Most of the warnings are displayed with an option to stop that warning from being displayed again. You can toggle warnings to be either on or off.

To display the Extra Warnings options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Extra Warnings. The Extra Warnings options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Extra Warnings:

Delete unread mail — If this is on, you are warned if you try to delete mail that is marked unread.

Delete queued mail — If this is on, you are warned if you try to delete mail that is queued to be sent (marked “Q,” or clock icon for timed-queue) in the Out mailbox.

Delete unsent mail — If this is on, you are warned if you try to delete messages that are marked sendable (with a bullet in the Out mailbox) but not yet sent.

Queue a message with no subject — If this is on, you are warned if you try to queue a message that contains no text in the Subject line. It is considered a point of email etiquette to give each message a subject.

Queue a message bigger than _ K [default: 500] — If this is on, you are warned if you try to queue or send a message that is greater in size than the specified number. This number must be between 0 and 1000000 (one million, no commas).

Quit with messages queued to be sent — If this is on, you are warned if you try to quit Eudora while there are still queued messages in your Out mailbox.

Empty the Trash mailbox — If this is on, you are warned if you try to empty the Trash mailbox (one way is with the Special menu Empty Trash command). Once messages are deleted from the Trash, they are completely gone from your system.

Start Eudora and it’s not the default mailer — If this is on, you are warned if you try to start Eudora when it’s not the default mailer. When Eudora is the default mailer, “mailto:” commands open a Eudora message, regardless of what application the command is in.

Switch views for Find — If this is selected, you are warned if you try to perform a Find operation (using the Edit menu Find submenu) while viewing an incoming message using the Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) version 4.0 viewer. The warning indicates that Eudora will switch to a different viewer to complete the Find operation. Eudora uses IE 4.0 as the default viewer if IE 4.0 is installed on your system and the “Use Microsoft’s viewer” option is selected in the Viewing Mail options. See Viewing Mail Options Window .

Launch a program from a message — If this is selected, you are warned if you try to launch a program from a message. For security reasons, you should never launch a program without performing a virus check on the file. Do not launch any program if you do not know sender. Some viruses can infect a file without your knowing it. It is always good to perform regular virus checks using a current virus checking program.


Advanced Network Options Window

These options control some of Eudora’s advanced network functions.

Note: Consult your email administrator before modifying any of these options.

To display the Advanced Network options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Advanced Network. The Advanced Network options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Advanced Network:

Network open timeout _ seconds [default: 60] — This option lets you set the number of seconds before an attempt to make a network connection will time out. For some servers (especially those with heavy loads), the attempt to establish the network connection can take longer than it takes to send data back and forth once the connection has been made. A familiar example: When you are browsing the World Wide Web, you may find that it takes a while to connect to a server, but then, once you have connected to the server, the Web page can seem to download very quickly. This option therefore gives you the ability to set a different (and usually longer) timeout for establishing the network connection than the timeout after the connection has been made (the latter timeout is set via the Network timeout after _ seconds option, below).

Network timeout after _ seconds [default: 60] — This option lets you set the number of seconds before an established network connection will time out. See the discussion above for the Network open timeout _ seconds option.

Network buffer size of _ bytes [default: 4096] — This option lets you set the size, in bytes, of the buffer that Eudora uses to transfer information to and from the server.

Note:	If you are having trouble transferring large messages, the size of this buffer may be decreased.

Cache network info — This option causes Eudora to remember the results of previous database functions when using the Winsock connection method. This speeds up database functions within a single Eudora session.

Unload Winsock DLL after closing socket — If you are using the Trumpet Winsock stack for dialup, select this option  if you like to have your computer dial and hang-up between functions, for example sending and receiving mail.


MAPI Options Window

The MAPI Options control the Eudora MAPI Server. Eudora’s MAPI support allows you to quickly attach documents to email messages directly from the application that created the document. Without MAPI, users must first save the document, remember what folder the document is in, switch to Eudora, and then remember to manually attach the document to the outgoing message.

MAPI streamlines this process dramatically. To email the current, open document from your word processor, select the Send command from your word processor’s File menu. This automatically activates Eudora and attaches a snapshot of the open document to a new composition message.

The MAPI system standardizes how messages are handled by client applications so that each client application does not have to have custom code for each target messaging application. MAPI accomplishes this by providing a standard application program interface used by all MAPI-enabled client applications.

An additional MAPI feature supported by Microsoft Office applications is the ability to add a “routing slip” to a Word, Excel, or PowerPoint document. This routing slip contains a list of email recipients obtained from the MAPI subsystem. Once a document has an embedded routing slip, then it can be semi-automatically routed as an attachment via email to all recipients listed in the routing slip. Once the routing is complete, the annotated document is returned back to the original sender.

See Messaging Application Program Interface (MAPI).

To display the MAPI options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click MAPI. The MAPI options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for MAPI:

Use Eudora MAPI server — If Never is selected, the Eudora MAPI server is off and is never automatically loaded. If When Eudora is running is selected, the Eudora MAPI server is on when Eudora is running. If Always is selected, the Eudora MAPI server is on and is always loaded on startup.

Delete MAPI attachments — If Never is selected, MAPI attachments are never deleted from the attachment directory. If After sending message is selected, MAPI attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are sent. If  When message emptied from Trash is selected, MAPI attachments are deleted from the attachment directory when their corresponding messages are emptied from the Trash.

Send single MAPI file attachment as inline attachment (TXT and HTML files only) — Turn this on when you need to have the MAPI client send a single TXT or HTML file as an attachment with no body text. Eudora turns off the Text As Attachment button in the outgoing message toolbar (if it is on), so that the document is sent to the recipient as inline text in the message body. This allows MAPI clients, such as Internet Explorer, to pass Web pages and other HTML and TXT documents right into the body of the Eudora message. (The Text As Attachment button, if turned on in the outgoing message toolbar, instructs Eudora to attach text files, such as TXT and HTML, to the message rather than incorporating the text into the message as part of the message body. The default state of this button is controlled by the Put text attachments in body of message option in the Attachments options . See the section Using the Composition Window .


Automation Options Window

The Automation options let you control and exchange information with Eudora from other programs that support the Windows Automation Interface, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.

Automation gives you external access to Eudora mail folders, mailboxes, and messages, and to the Eudora application itself. With automation enabled, you can create, delete, and move Eudora mail folders, mailboxes, and messages, as well as get notification of these three operations when they are performed manually. You can also get lists of the subfolders under folders and of the messages within mailboxes.

For more information on the automation feature, visit our Web site (click www.eudora.com/developers) where you can find up-to-date automation SDKs (Software Developer’s Kits) and documentation.

To display the Automation options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Automation. The Automation options window appears.

Listed below is the field description for Automation:

Automation enabled from this machine — If this option is on, you can perform the automation operations described above from the computer on which Eudora is installed.


Auto Configure Options Window

Eudora needs just a few pieces of information in order for you to send and receive mail. Normally you enter this information in the first few windows of the Options windows, but if you like, you can use the Auto Configure options to retrieve these basic settings from an ACAP server. Your email administrator can let you know if such a server is available to you. ACAP, which stands for Application Configuration Access Protocol, is a communications protocol that lets email and other applications store setup data on and retrieve it from a central server.

To display the Auto Configure options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Auto Configure. The Auto Configure options window appears.

Listed below is the field description for Auto Configure:

Server Name — In this field, enter the name of the ACAP server you wish to connect to in order to retrieve the Eudora settings. If you are not sure what to enter here, see your email administrator.

User Name — Enter your user name required for connection to the ACAP server. Your email administrator can provide you this name if you do not know it.

Password — Enter your password required for connection to the ACAP server. See your email administrator for your ACAP password.

Retrieve Settings Now — After you have entered the Server Name for the ACAP server, your user name, and your Password (see above), click this button to retrieve your Eudora settings from the ACAP server. The retrieved settings replace your current Eudora settings.


Kerberos Options Window

These options control the Kerberos authentication system. If your network uses Kerberos for authentication, the appropriate options are provided by your email administrator.

To display the Kerberos options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Kerberos. The Kerberos options window appears.

Listed below is the field description for Kerberos:

Kerberos POP3 port — This is the port that the Kerberos POP server is listening on.

Realm — This is the network realm that the Kerberos server resides in.

Service name [default: rcmd] — This is the type of service that you’re requesting.

Service format [default: %1.%4@%3] — This is the name of the ticket that Eudora requests from the Kerberos server. The formatting key below this field indicates what to enter. Enter %1 to stand for the service name entered in the Service name field; enter %2 to stand for the full domain name of the POP host; enter %3 to stand for the realm entered in the Realm field; enter %4 to stand for the name of the POP host.


Miscellaneous Options Window

The Miscellaneous options determine additional Eudora capabilities that are not categorized with other functions.

To display the Miscellaneous options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Miscellaneous. The Miscellaneous options window appears.

Listed below are the field descriptions for Miscellaneous:

Switch messages with:

Unmodified arrow keys — If this is on and there is an incoming message window open on the screen, the up or left arrow key closes the current message and opens the previous message in the mailbox, and the down or right arrow key closes the current message and opens the next message in the mailbox. If this is on and the Show message preview pane option is on in the Viewing Mail options , and keyboard focus is currently in the preview pane of an open mailbox window, then pressing the unmodified arrow keys changes the view in the preview pane going up or down the message summary list, as appropriate. If the Unmodified arrow keys option is turned off, the arrow keys can be used to move the cursor (insertion point) in messages and the preview pane.

Note:	Even if Unmodified arrow keys is on, the arrow keys do not switch messages if there is an outgoing
message topmost on the screen.

Ctrl+arrow keys — If this is on, you can switch messages by holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the arrow keys. The switching behavior is as described above under the Unmodified arrow keys option. The Ctrl+arrow keystrokes do not work when composition windows are open on the screen.

Alt+arrow keys — If this is on, you can switch messages by holding down the Alt key and pressing the arrow keys. The switching behavior is as described above under the Unmodified arrow keys option. The Alt+arrow keystrokes do work when composition windows are open on the screen.

Empty Trash when exiting — If this is on, the Trash mailbox is emptied when you exit Eudora. If this is off, the Trash is only emptied when you select Empty Trash from the Special menu.

Say OK to alerts after _ second(s) [default: 120] — If this is on, any alerts that announce a problem with the network communication automatically go away after the specified number of seconds. Many network problems are temporary, so this allows Eudora to try the communication again. This is most useful if you have automatic mail-checking enabled for any of your accounts.

Turbo redirect by default — If this is on and you select Redirect To, a redirected message is created with the specified recipient, the message is queued, and the original message is deleted.

Include outdated ‘Return-Receipt-To’ — If this is off, Eudora uses the “Disposition-Notification-To:” header in return receipt requests to request that you be sent a notification when your message appears by the recipient. If this is on, Eudora also sends the “Return-Receipt-To:” header in return receipt requests. This header is understood by some older mail delivery systems, and may return you a receipt when your message is delivered to your recipient’s mailbox. The “Return-Receipt-To:” header cannot give you any information about whether or not your recipient displayed your mail, and is not supported by many newer mail delivery systems.

Automatically expand nicknames — If this is on, nicknames in message headers are replaced with the real addresses when you switch fields.

Auto-save messages every _ minutes—Enter the number of minutes between auto-save intervals. In case of a system shut-down, the messages saved are from the most current auto-save.


Mailboxes Options Window

The Mailboxes options determine how Eudora displays various objects in mailbox window columns. It also allows you to configure Eudora to select and drag message(s) for mailbox transfers.

To display the Mailboxes options window, do the following:

1. 	From the Tools menu, select Options.

2. 	Scroll and click Mailboxes. The Mailboxes options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Mailboxes:

Show Mailbox Columns — These options determine which columns are displayed in mailbox windows. Turn on an option to display that column in all mailbox windows. The options are Status, Priority, Attachment, Label, Sender, Date, Size, Server status, and Subject.

Show mailbox lines — If this option is on, lines are displayed in the message summaries portion of mailbox windows, horizontal lines to separate message summaries, and vertical lines to separate columns.

Close messages with mailbox — If this is on, all opened messages in a mailbox will close automatically when you close the mailbox .

Select newly inserted messages (FUMLUB) — If this is selected, the first message of the most current block of unread messages is highlighted in the Table of Contents window when new messages are added to a mailbox, for example, when receiving new messages as a result of a mail check. FUMLUB means First Unread Message of the Last Unread Block. For example, you may have a series of unread messages in a mailbox scattered throughout your Table of Contents. The first message of the last block of unread messages listed in your Table of Contents is selected.

When dragging in a mailbox: — These options determine how you can move messages from one mailbox to another.

Allow drag and drop transfers — If this is on, you can transfer a message to another mailbox using drag and drop: select one or more messages in a mailbox, drag them to another mailbox and drop them in the target mailbox.

Allow drag-select of messages — If this is on, you can click and drag on adjacent messages to select them as a group in the Table of Contents window. This allows you to transfer a group of messages to a mailbox or to delete them if the “Allow drag and drop transfers” is turned on. The drag-select works only if the drag starts on an unselected (not highlighted) message.


Using PureVoice

QUALCOMM's PureVoice™ Player-Recorder lets you record and send voice messages as attachments to your email. You can also receive and play back voice messages created with PureVoice.

To use PureVoice, you must have a computer running a 32-bit Windows operating system or greater. You must also have a sound card and speakers. To record messages, you must have a built-in or external microphone.

You can send voice messages to anyone in the world who has an email account and access to the Internet. For your recipients to play back your messages, they must be on a Macintosh, 32-bit Windows (Win95/98, Win98, NT 3.51 or NT 4.0), Solaris 2.5 or SCO OpenServer Release 5 UNIX  machine, with a sound card and speakers, and they must have the PureVoice standalone application or plug-in installed. If they want to record a response, they must have a microphone. Your recipients can download PureVoice for free from our Web site (click www.eudora.com/purevoice) or choose the “Attach Site Info” option from the PureVoice Option menu.

Launching PureVoice

To launch the PureVoice plug-in from within Eudora, do the following:

1.	Open a new message in Eudora.

2.	From the Message menu, choose Attach.

3. 	From the Attach submenu, choose PureVoice.

     The PureVoice dialog box displays.

4.  Record your message using the instructions in the PureVoice Help (see

     "Getting Help" below). You can also play back your message and save it to

     a file.

5.  When you are finished recording your message and are ready to send it,

     click the Attach button in the PureVoice dialog box, or select Attach from

     the File menu. The voice message is attached as a voice file to your open

     email message.

Getting Help

PureVoice has extensive online help. To access this help, launch PureVoice as described just above, then go to the Help menu. The Help window displays. Navigate through the extensive online help system.

PureVoice Plug-in Updates and Contact Information

You can download the latest version of the QUALCOMM PureVoice™ Plug-in for Eudora free from our Web site. Click here. If you experience something you think might be a bug in QUALCOMM’s PureVoice,  submit bug reports by clicking here or you can click the “Bug Report” button on the “About PureVoice” window under the PureVoice Help menu.


Attaching a PureVoice File to a Message

You can attach a voice file to your message. However, your recipient must have the PureVoice player/recorder to hear your audio attachment. It is free from our website:  Just click www.eudora.com/purevoice

To attach a PureVoice file to your message, do the following:

1.	Click the PureVoice icon on the toolbar or from the Message menu, choose Attach then PureVoice from the Attach submenu. The PureVoice player/recorder appears in an opened message.

Note. QUALCOMM PureVoice contains its own help program. For detailed information on PureVoice, choose Topics from the Help menu.

2.	To create an audio file, click New, or from the File menu, choose New Recording. If a current recording exists, a dialog box appears asking if you want to discard or save the current recording.

3.	To record your voice, click the Record (red round) button or from the Control menu, choose Record. Speak clearly into the computer’s microphone. Observe the volume indicator in the digital display, and if necessary, adjust the microphone volume/sensitivity control.

4.	When finished recording, click the Stop (square) button or from the Control menu, choose Stop.

5.	To discard this message and start over, just repeat steps 2 through 5.

6.	To attach the voice file, click Attach in the PureVoice window or from the File menu, choose Attach. You may also save the audio message to a file. The PureVoice audio file attaches to your message.

Note:  If your recipient does not have PureVoice, choose Attach Site Info from the Options menu. This tells your recipient where on the Internet he/she can retrieve the PureVoice player/recorder. This includes a file with download instructions.

7.	To close the PureVoice player/recorder, from the File menu, choose Exit or click the x.


Importing Settings to Create a New Account

To set up a newly migrated account from Netscape Messenger™ 4.5, Microsoft Outlook Express™ 5.0, and Outlook ’98™ as an alternate or multiple personality account using the New Account Wizard, do the following:

1.	From the File menu, choose Import. The Import Mail and Addresses window appears (go to step 5). Or from the Tools menu, choose Personalities, or if the Personalities window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab (go to step 2).

2.	In the Personalities window, right-click to display the drop-down context menu. Choose New. The New Account Wizard window, Account Settings, appears.

3.	Select Import settings from an existing email account. Click Next and the next Account Wizard window, Personality Name, appears.

4.	In the Personality Name text box, a default personality name appears. However, you may change the name if you wish. Click Next and the next Account Wizard window, Import Settings, appears.

5.	From Outlook: to import your email messages, in Eudora select Import Mail, and to import your address book entries, select Import Address Book Entries. Go to step 9.

6.	If you want to import your Netscape Messenger address book, select Netscape Navigator and the account you want to migrate. The Import Settings window appears for Netscape.

7.	From Netscape: to import your email messages, in Eudora select Import Mail. To import your address book entries, check the Import Address Book from LDIF file box. LDIF means LDAP Data Interchange Format.

8.	Important. Before you import your Netscape Address Book, you must first save it in LDIF format. To save your address book in LDIF format, do the following:

a. Launch Netscape Communicator.

b. From the Communicator menu, choose Address Book.

c. From the File menu in Netscape Communicator, choose Save. The Save dialog box appears.

d. Name the file while retaining the .ldif extension and save it on your computer.

e. Then, in the Eudora Import Settings window, click Browse to locate the address book file you just saved.

9.	To migrate your email account, click Next. Eudora transfers all settings including personalities, incoming and outgoing server names, real name, return name, and login name.

Note: 	It may take a long time for the migration to occur depending on how much mail, the complexity of your settings, and the size of your address book that you’re importing into Eudora. Also, if during the migration, the process stops because of a corrupt message. You must go into your Netscape Messenger or Microsoft Outlook and delete the corrupt message to resume the migration.

The Success window appears indicating that your migration was successful. Once migration occurs, the settings you are importing are immediate, and your mail is migrated.

Note:	When the migration is occurring, notice in the Mailbox window that a mailbox tree begins to form. For example, you will see the folder “Outlook” and all its mailboxes listed underneath. A plus sign (+) next to the folder name indicates that other folders/mailboxes are contained within this folder.


Linking a Signature and Stationery to a Personality

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

In Eudora, you can link a signature and a stationery to an existing personality via the Account Settings dialog box. For example, if you have a “Business” personality, you can link your “Business” signature and “Business” stationery to this personality. For creating signatures and stationery, refer to Creating a Signature and Creating a Stationery File. Before you can link a signature and stationery to a personality, you need to create them first.

To link a signature and stationery to a personality, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Personalities or select the Personalities tab if grouped in a displayed tabbed window.

2.	Select the personality and right-click to display the drop-down context menu.

3.	From the context menu, choose Properties. The Accounts Settings’ Generic Properties panel for this is selected personality appears.

4.	In the Default Stationery drop-down menu, select the stationery for this personality.

5.	In the Default Signature drop-down menu, select the signature for this personality. Note that if the stationery you just selected has a signature linked to it, this signature overrides the signature selected here.

6.	Click OK. This personality is now linked with the stationery and signature you chose from the drop-down menus.


Creating an Auto-Reply Message

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

You can create an email message that can be sent to people automatically when you are on vacation or away from your computer. This message is called an auto-reply.

To create an auto-reply, do the following:

1.	Write your auto-reply message using Eudora’s Stationery functions. Once the auto-reply message is written, name and save it in stationery. See Creating a Stationery File.

2.	From the Tools menu, choose Filters. The Filters window appears.

3.	In the Match section, choose a header from the Header drop down list. Select a header that matches the header in the messages to whom you want to send your auto-reply. <<Any Recipient>> is the most common for an auto-reply.

For example, to set an auto-reply only to messages sent to your user name, just select <<Any Recipient>> then choose “contains.” In the text box, enter your user name. You can match others as well, but it may cause a large number of emails to be auto-replied.

4.	In the Action section, choose Reply with in the first drop-down list.

5.	In the text box to the right of the first drop-down list, enter the name of the stationery.

6.	Click OK. The stationery message you created will be sent to the people you indicated in this filter.

Important: Remember to delete this filter when you want your auto-reply message to stop.


Adding, Moving, and Removing Toolbar Buttons

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Adding Toolbar Buttons

To add buttons to the main toolbar, do the following:

1.	Right-click anywhere on the toolbar, even on a button, to display the drop-down menu.

2.	From the drop-down menu, choose Customize. The Customize toolbar window appears.
The Customize window contains six tabbed panels: General, Mailboxes, Plugins, Recipients, Stationery, and Personalities. Each of these panels lets you add toolbar buttons for functions related to the tab title.

Note: 	The procedures for adding a toolbar button from each panel are similar.

3.	In each panel, choose an item from the categories list on the left, and the corresponding button icons for that category are shown in the Buttons section on the right.

4.	Click to select one of the button icons and view a description of the button’s function in the Description field at the bottom of the panel. These descriptions also appear in the status bar of the main Eudora window if the bar is currently displayed when you position the mouse pointer over the button icon. In this case, you don’t have to click the button.

Note:	In these button descriptions, any instruction to hold down the Shift key means to do so when you are actually using the button from the toolbar, not when you are adding the button to the toolbar, and not when you are clicking the button in the Customize window to view its description. For example, if you click the New Message button in the main toolbar, a new composition window opens. If you hold down the Shift key and click the New Message button in the main toolbar, the Message Options dialog box appears, allowing you to select options for creating a new message (Personality and Stationery).

5.	Drag the button icon to your desired position on the toolbar.

Note:	If you need help at any time during toolbar customization, click the Help button in the Customize dialog box.

6.	When you are finished adding toolbar buttons, click Close to close the Customize dialog box.

Following are specific instructions for the tabbed panels of the Customize window:

General—The Categories list contains names of menus and submenus. The buttons correspond to commands on these menus and submenus.

Mailboxes—The Mailboxes list shows the same view as your Mailboxes window, accessed by choosing Mailboxes from the Tools menu. To add a toolbar button for a mailbox, click the mailbox and drag the appropriate button to the toolbar. If the mailbox is in a closed folder, double-click the folder icon to open it and display its contents (or click the plus-sign [+] to open the folder), then click the mailbox and drag the desired button to the toolbar. Note that you cannot add a toolbar button for a mail folder.

Plugins—The Plugins list shows installed message and resource plugins. You can add a plug-in button to the toolbar so that just by clicking the button, you launch the plug-in application. Note that if you elected to install QUALCOMM’s PureVoice voice-messaging software plug-in when you installed Eudora, Eudora automatically adds a toolbar button for the PureVoice plug-in at the extreme right of the toolbar. See Plugins (Extended Messaging Services.

Recipients—The Recipients list on the left shows all recipients that are listed on your Quick Recipient List, which is the list of recipients to whom you frequently send mail. See Using the Quick Recipient for more information. The buttons correspond to functions you can perform when addressing and sending mail to recipients on your list: New Message To, Forward To, Redirect To (all on the Message menu), and Insert Recipient (on the Edit menu). If there are no recipients on your Quick Recipient List, the Recipients area of this dialog box panel is empty.

Stationery—The Stationery list shows all of your stationery files. The buttons correspond to stationery-related commands: New Message With, Reply With, and Reply to All With, all under the Message menu. For more information on using stationery, see Using Stationery.

Personalities—The Personalities list shows all of your email accounts, if you use multiple personalities (multiple accounts). The buttons correspond to personality-related commands, such as the Message menu’s Change Personality command. For more information on using multiple personalities, see Using an Alternate E-Mail Account.

Moving a Toolbar Button

To change the placement of a button on the main toolbar, hold down the Alt key and drag the button to where you want it.

Removing a Toolbar Button

To remove a button from the main toolbar, hold down the Alt key and drag the button off of the toolbar.

Adding and Removing Separators

To add a separator line between two toolbar buttons where no line currently exists, first determine which button is farther from the gripper bar when the toolbar is docked. Now hold down the Alt key and carefully drag that button a little bit in the direction opposite the gripper bar. A separator line will be inserted between the two buttons. Be sure to drag the button less than one button-width away from its position; if you overdrag it, you will hop over the adjacent button and reposition the dragged button on the toolbar.

To remove a separator line from between two toolbar buttons, again determine which of the two buttons is farther away from the gripper bar when the toolbar is docked. Now hold down the Alt key and drag that button toward the gripper bar. The separator line is removed. Alternately, you can hold down the Alt key and drag the other button slightly in the direction away from the gripper bar, and that will remove the separator line. Again, be careful not to drag either button too far, or you will reposition it past the adjacent button on the toolbar.


Background Tasks

In Eudora, you can retrieve, send, and compose mail at the same time! While sending and retrieving mail, you can compose a message, access Directory Services to look up addresses, edit stationery and signatures, read mail, and so forth because retrieving and sending mail now occurs in the background.

The Task Status window displays sending and receiving activity as it happens. For example, when you check and send mail simultaneously, the progress of these functions is displayed in the Task Status window. Also, you can send messages from different personalities at the same time. See Task Status Window.

The Background Tasks options found in Options under the Tools menu allow you to set parameters that determine how background tasks behave, and what kind of information you want to see in the Task Status window. In other words, you can configure the behavior of background tasks. Also, you can set the Task Status and/or the Task Error windows to be brought to the front of other windows in Eudora when activity occurs.

In the Background Tasks options window, you can indicate the number of seconds of user inactivity before your newly retrieved mail is actually processed by Eudora. If you have automatic mail checking set up in the Checking Mail options, Eudora will retrieve the mail in the background from the incoming server at those time intervals. But Eudora will not process it until there is no user activity performed on your computer for the amount of seconds you indicate in the Background Tasks options window. An envelope displayed on the status bar, located at the lower right-hand corner of the Eudora window, indicates that there is retrieved mail to be processed, that is, messages to be filtered and placed in mailboxes.

Technical Note. In the background, Eudora retrieves and sends mail; in the foreground, Eudora processes attachments and applies filters.

If you check your mail manually, it is retrieved from the server immediately and delivered to Eudora without waiting for user inactivity. However, if you do a manual check and then perform a task in Eudora while Eudora is retrieving your mail, Eudora will wait for user inactivity before processing your newly retrieved mail. When this occurs, the envelope displays on the status bar until the user inactivity time specified has been reached.

Important: The envelope that displays on the status bar only indicates that mail is waiting to be processed. It does not mean that you have new mail waiting on the server. When your mail is processed, user inactivity time is needed for your mail to be filtered and attachments decoded. Your inactivity allows you to decide when you want your mail processed.

If you click on the envelope, the mail is processed. If you right-click the envelope, a drop-down menu appears. Choose Process All Waiting Tasks to process and deliver all your mail, that is, mail sent or retrieved in the background.  Choose Show Task Status to display the Task Status showing background activity.


Task Status Window

The Task Status window displays background activity: retrieving mail from incoming servers, and sending mail to outgoing servers. Mail can be retrieved and sent from each of your personalities simultaneously. Progress information is described in Background Tasks.

To access and display the Task Status window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Task Status. Or, if the Task Status window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab. The Task Status window appears. Notice the progress indicators on the status bar located at the right-hand bottom of the Eudora window. A progress bar and spinning black and white ball indicate that background tasks are occurring.

On the progress bar or spinning indicator, click to display the Task Status window. Right-click to display the indicator’s drop-down menu.

Choose Stop All Tasks to cancel the tasks currently occurring.

Choose Go offline to disconnect from the server. An alert window appears letting you know that you are offline and cannot connect to the server. This is useful if you are using a laptop computer.

Note: 	Offline does not apply to personalities that use IMAP incoming servers.

Choose Show Task Status to display the Task Status window.

You can see if your sent messages are sent, queued, or processing in your Out mailbox.

Following are field descriptions for columns in the Task Status window.

Task—(default) An icon and its description displays in this column indicating what function Eudora is performing. In the above example, the Send icon appears.

Persona—This column is available only if you have set up more than one personality. If checked, the Personality column displays the personality name for the given task.

Status—(default) Displays a general description of the task’s current status, for example, “Logging into POP server.”

Details—Displays more information of the task’s status including network protocol commands.

Progress—(default) Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks.


Task Error Window

The Task Error window displays an error message as it occurs. In the example below, a password error appears. You can indicate if you want the Task Error window brought to the front when an error occurs. See Background Tasks.

To access and display the Task Status window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Task Errors. Or, if the Task Error window is in a visible tabbed window, click its tab. The Task Error window appears.

Notice the yellow task error icon on the Eudora tool/status bar at the lowerright of the main Eudora window. Click this icon to display the Task Error message.

2.     Click Details to expand the message.

Following are field descriptions for the Task Error details window.

Persona—The personality name associated with this error appears.

Title—The name of the Eudora function when this error occurred.

Status—The name of the system function when this error occurred.

Info—More information on this error appears, if any.

Time—The time and day of this error appears.


Adding a Ph Database

Ph is an online, fully indexed, fast-access white-pages directory service developed and freely distributed by the Computer and Communications Services Office at the University of Illinois at Urbana.

To add a new Ph database, do the following:

1.	In the Protocols list, click the Ph protocol to select it.

2.	Click New Database. Or, just double-click Ph in the Protocols list. The New Database window, General panel, appears.

3.	In the General panel, enter a descriptive name for the Ph server, its Host Name or IP address of the Ph server, and the Port in the respective fields. The default port for Ph is 105. Don’t change this port number unless you know for certain that the port number is not 105.

4.	Select the Attributes tab to display the Attributes panel. The Attributes pane appears.

In the Attributes panel, you can add, edit, or remove attributes that display in the Results List (top-half of left window) and in the Details List (bottom-half of left window).

Results List

In the Results List, the data associated with the Ph attributes you name are displayed in the columns on the left pane of the Directory Services window. You do this by mapping attributes to one of the three special “Present A” field selections: Name, Email(w), and Phone(w). See step 5.

For example, if you want to display the data associated with the Ph attribute “Full_Name” in the column named “Name” in the Results List, add an attribute mapping for “Full_Name” with “Name” selected as the “Present As” value.

Details List

Any attribute name can be renamed before it appears in the Details List. This is done via the Present As field.  Simply replace the text in the Details List with alternate text.

For example, if your Ph server is configured to display an attribute called Full_Name but you want only Name to display, you need to map “Full_Name” to “Name” using the “Present As” field. Therefore, any Ph query you perform on that server would display the “Full_Name” data in the Name column in the Results List.

5.	To add an attribute mapping to the attributes list, click Add. To edit an attribute mapping, click the attribute on the list and click Edit. Edit the attribute name. To remove an attribute mapping, click to select it and then click Remove.

6.	When you are finished making entries or changes, click OK. The attributes are added to or changed in the database.

If you added a new database, the database is added to the Databases list with its checkbox.


Adding a Finger Database

Finger is an Internet directory service similar to Ph.

To add a new Finger database, do the following:

1.	In the Protocols list, click the Finger protocol to select it.

2.	Click New Database. Or, just double-click Finger in the Protocols list. The New Database window, General panel, appears.

3.	In the General panel, enter a descriptive name for the server, the Host Name or IP address of the server, and the Port in the respective fields. The default port for Ph is 79. Don’t change this port number unless you know for certain that the port number is not 79.

4.	To create the new Finger database, click OK. A Finger database is created.


Adding an LDAP Database

LDAP means Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. An LDAP server is a service that provides information about individuals. You can look up virtually anyone on the Internet using public LDAP servers. And furthermore, you can add new LDAP servers to query in Eudora.

To add a new LDAP database, do the following:

1.	In the Protocols list, click the LDAP protocol to select it.

2.	Click New Database. Or, just double-click LDAP in the Protocols list. The New Database window, Network panel, appears.

3.	In the Network panel, enter a descriptive name for the server, the Host Name or IP address of the server, and the Port number in the respective fields. If you select the This server requires me to log on option, new fields appear in which to enter an Account name and a Password. However, most LDAP servers do not require you to log in. Enter values in these fields if you have specific instructions from your LDAP administrator to so do.

4.	Select the Attributes tab to display the Attributes panel.

In the Attributes panel, you can add, edit, or remove attribute mappings using the buttons displayed just below the window. You use the Attribute list to manage how information appears in the query results list and query results details portion of the screen.

5.	To add an attribute mapping, click Add. The Add Attribute list appears.

6.	In the Attribute Name text box, enter the name for the new attribute you wish map, for example, cn for common name. You must know the raw field names for the particular LDAP server you are adding.

Listed are the most common raw LDAP field name attributes.

•	c — Country, expressed in a two-letter country code, such as US (United States), CA (Canada), UK (United Kingdom), FR (France), and so forth.

•	st — State or province, expressed in a two-letter state code, such as, California (CA), Massachusetts (MA), Ontario (ON). and so forth. Also, if a country is considered a “state,” for example, France, then this field can show a city name, such as Paris.

•	l — Location, that is a city, county, and so forth., such as San Diego, Montreal, London, Paris, and so on.

•	mail — Person’s email address. More than one email address may be listed, and more than one search listing may be returned for an individual with multiple email addresses.

•	gn — Also Givenname. The person’s first name and/or middle initial, or any part of the person’s name before the last name, for example, John W, A Raymond, and so forth. Titles are sometimes given, such as Dr., Ms., and so forth.

•	sn — Person’s surname or last name. Suffixes are sometimes given, such as Jr., III, M.D., Esq., and so forth.

•	cn — Person’s common name. This includes the given name: first, middle initial, prefix and the person’s last name including suffixes.

•	o— Organization, which includes companies, universities, non-profit organizations, government agencies, and so forth.

7.	In the Presented As text box, enter the text for the attribute you wish to see displayed on the query results list, or click the down arrow to display some common attribute names.

Note:	Three of the four columns in the query results list window can be assigned to any attribute you wish, but you cannot change the name of the column heading. To change the attribute that is assigned to each column, enter an attribute in the Attribute Name field, such as, cn, sn, gn, and so forth. Then select either Name, Email(w), or Phone(w) in the “Present As” list, which corresponds to the Name, Email, and Phone columns in the Results List. You cannot change what appears in the "Database" column. It always contains the name of the server where the data was found.

For example, if you want to display “cn” in the Name column, “TelephoneNumber” in the Phone column, and “mail” in the Email column, you would set up the attributes like this.

Attribute Name	Present As

cn	Name - select from Present As drop-down list.

TelephoneNumber	Phone(w) - select from Present As drop-down list.

mail	Email(w) - select from Present As drop-down list.

In the Details portion of the Results window, you can assign attribute names to something more readable.

Attribute Name   	Present As

l	Location - select from Present As drop-down list

st	State -select from Present As drop-down list

So instead of displaying "st: Texas, "State: Texas" would display.

In the attribute list, check the only display these attributes box if you want to limit what appears to only those attributes that are mapped.

Note:	In the Present As drop down list, there is a choice called Not Displayed. If you choose “Not Displayed,” you can prevent a particular attribute from being displayed. For example, mapping the c (country) attribute to “Not Displayed” will have “c” removed from the displayed results in the Details List. This is useful if there is an usually long or confusing attribute you don’t want to display in the window.

8.	Select the Search Options tab to display the Search Options panel.

9.	On the Search Options panel, specify the Search timeout by moving the bar indicator. You can adjust the bar indicator for a short to long timeout.

10.	In the Maximum number of matches to return text box, you can select the up arrow to increase or the down arrow to decrease the number of matches you’d like to see displayed. Or select the No Limit option to specify unlimited matches.

11.	In the Search Base text box, you can specify a part of the LDAP server to limit your search. See your LDAP administrator to specify the value in this field. However, the default is usually sufficient.

12.	In the Worldwise Search Filter, you enter a type of search filter to form word queries. cn=*^0* is the default.   The ^0 is substituted for each word to form a set of word queries. The purpose of this filter is to form a term for a word and then (AND) the terms together. Examples are displayed below.

Query: John Smith

Configuration: default (cn=*^0*)

Filter: (& (cn=*John*)(cn=*Smith*) )

Records in which “cn” attributes contain “john” and “smith” are returned. Using the wildcard asterisks (*) before and after “john” and “smith” would return matches such as “Johnathon Smithson.” If you wish to search whole words, remove the wildcard asterisks. The above example would also return records such as "John Dean Smith" and "Smithers Johnson."

Query: John Smith

Configuration: ( | (cn=*^0*)(sn=*^0*)(gn=*^0*)(givenname=*^0*))

Filter:

(&

(|(givenname=*John*)(cn=*John*)(sn=*John*)(gn=*John*))

(|(givenname=*Smith*)(cn=*Smith*)(sn=*Smith*)(gn=*Smith*))

)

The default search filter in this example would possibly return more records than the default because it searches more fields for a substring match of the word.

13.	In the Whole-query Search Filter, you enter a type of search filter to create a term for the whole query. You can set this filter as an alternate (OR) for the worldwise search filter results. Examples are displayed below.

Query: John Smith: whole query search filter

Configuration:

whole word (cn=*^0*)

word-wise (|(cn=*^0*)(sn=*^0*)(gn=*^0*)(givenname=*^0*))

Filter:

(|

 (cn=*John Smith")

 (&

     (|(givenname=*John*)(cn=*John*)(sn=*John*)(gn=*John*))

     (|(givenname=*Smith*)(cn=*Smith*)(sn=*Smith*)(gn=*Smith*))

 )

)

14.	Select the Log tab to display the Log panel.

15.	In the Log panel, specify whether you want to generate log files and if so, how to store them; specify whether you want to enable logs for Protocol interactions and/or a Configuration data load/store.

16.	Enter a Log file name or select one using the Browse button. And if you want new logs to replace the old ones, select the Overwrite existing log file option.

17.	When all your information is entered in the New Database window, click OK and your new LDAP database is created with its checkbox.


Background Tasks Options Window

The Background Tasks allow you to set parameters that determine how background tasks behave, and what kind of information you want to see in the Task Status window. In other words, you can configure the behavior of background tasks. Also, you can set the Task Status and/or the Task Error windows to be brought to the front of other windows in Eudora when activity occurs. See Task Status Window and Task Error Window.

In the Background Tasks options window, you can indicate the number of seconds of user inactivity before your newly retrieved mail is actually processed by Eudora. If you have automatic mail checking set up in the Checking Mail options, Eudora will retrieve the mail in the background from the incoming server at those time intervals. But Eudora will not process it until there is no user activity performed on your computer for the amount of seconds you indicate in the Background Tasks options window. An envelope displayed on the status bar, located at the lower right-hand corner of the Eudora window, indicates that there is retrieved mail to be processed; that is, messages to be filtered and placed in mailboxes.

Technical Note. In the background, Eudora retrieves and sends mail; in the foreground, Eudora processes attachments and applies filters.

 To display the Background Tasks options window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Scroll and click Background Tasks. The Background Tasks options window appears.

Listed below are field descriptions for Background Tasks.

Task Status Columns—These options determine which columns are displayed in the Task Status window. Check the box next to the field whose column you want to display. The options are Task, Persona, Status, Details, and Progress.

Task—Displays an icon with a short description of the tasks’ actions.

Persona—Available only if you have set up more than one personality. If checked, the Personality column displays the personality name for the given task.

Status—Displays a general description of the tasks current status, for example, “Logging into POP server.”

Details—Displays more information of the tasks’ status including network protocol commands.

Progress—Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks.

Wait for _ seconds of idle time before automatically delivering spooled messages—[default: 20 seconds) If Eudora is retrieving mail automatically in the background, the amount of time set in this field indicates the idle time Eudora waits before delivering mail to your mailboxes and folders. For example, if you are composing a message and Eudora is retrieving mail in the background, Eudora will not deliver the mail until you stop typing for the amount of time indicated here. If you set the time for 5 seconds, Eudora delivers your mail if you stop typing for at least 5 seconds. This field is beneficial if you don’t want to be interrupted too frequently while using Eudora. If the number is large in this field, you’ll get fewer interruptions.

Bring error window to front—Check this option to have the Task Error window brought to the front when an error occurs.

Bring task status window to front—Check this option to have the Task Status window brought to the front when a task occurs, for example sending or receiving mail.


What's New in Eudora Email Email 4.3
What's New in Eudora Email 4.3

Welcome to Eudora Email 4.3! Below describes the new features and functions added to Eudora 4.3 for Windows are described below.

•	Introducing Eudora Email in Sponsored Mode. You can now choose to use the full featured version of Eudora for free!

•	Importing from Outlook Express™. You may now import information and settings from Microsoft® Outlook Express 5.0.

•	Super Sorting. You can now sort your messages in a mailbox by more than one sort criteria. Just click one column, then another, then another and so on, the messages will sort by each column in the order they were selected.

•	Group by Subject. You can now sort messages by grouping same subjects together.

•	Link History. Link history tracks and links Internet web site URLs, attachments, and ads that you have clicked in Eudora.


Using Automatic Name Completion

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Similar to the “Finish Address Book Entry” command, Auto-Completion allows you to enter a portion of a name in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields, and Eudora automatically completes the name for you. Just start typing and Eudora attempts to complete the name. If multiple recipients match the text you’ve entered, a list of names from your history file and address book appear in a drop-down name list (provided both the history file and address book are selected in the new Auto-Completion option window explained later in this section). Select the correct name, and the name and email address appear in the field.

The history file consists of names and email addresses of people you have previously sent, forwarded, or replied to messages within Eudora.

The address book consists of the nicknames you have entered for each person in your address book.

For example, you may want to send Barbara a message. Previously, you had to enter her nickname from your address book, or if she wasn’t in your address book, her full email address. By using the auto-completion feature, just enter B in the To field, and Eudora displays a drop-down name list with names beginning with “B” for you to choose from (you can also press [Esc] to prevent the drop-down name list from appearing). If you had typed BA, Eudora would have displayed a drop-down name list with all names beginning with “Ba.” Scroll through the name list, click or press Enter to select the correct name. The name is now entered into the header field.

If you have only a “Barbara” and a “Beth” as names in your address book or history file, Eudora completes the first alphabetical name. So when you type B, “Barbara” would appear first on the list (if Names should appear in alphabetical order is selected in the Auto Completion options window explained later in this section).

The address book icon (open book with tabs) indicates that the name came from your address book, and the history file icon (page with corner bent) indicates that the name came from your history file. If the name is from your history file, both the username and email address appear in the drop-down name list as you type. If the name is from your address book, only the nickname appears in the drop-down name list.

To complete the name in the field, select the correct name from the drop-down list. If you want to add another name in the To field, type a comma (,) after the first recipient’s name. Then you can begin to add another recipients name.

To turn the name auto-completion feature off, go to the Tools menu, choose Options, and then select Auto-completion. Deselect Address Book and History File and click OK.


Finding Messages in Mailboxes

Note. If you are using Eudora in Light mode, you are limited to certain functions when searching for messages.

You can now perform complex searches through messages in all or a selected number of mailboxes or folders. Once your search is complete, you can sort, delete, and view the resulting messages. You can search for a specific piece of information in all your mail or just search for a particular item that matches the criteria you set. Set up the criteria for your search by selecting options from the drop-down lists and by entering text.

To set up criteria for a message search, do the following:

1.	From the Edit menu, choose Find or press [Ctrl] + F. The Find submenu appears.

2.	From the Find submenu, choose Find Messages. The Find Messages dialog box appears.

In the Find Messages dialog box, your mailboxes display along with checkboxes. If the boxes are checked, Eudora will perform a search in these mailboxes according to the criteria you are about to set up. To omit a mailbox from the search, just deselect the box.

If you right-click in the Find Messages window, a context menu appears allowing you to clear all the checkmarks so you can select the mailboxes to search. Choose Clear All to clear the checkmarks; choose Check All to check all the mailboxes.

The top part of the dialog box is where you select and enter criteria for your search. Each search can use up to five “terms” and “conjunctions” as its criteria, connecting them as appropriate. The drop-down and conjunction lists displaying the criteria you can select.

3.	In the drop-down criteria list (Anywhere is the default), choose where in the message you want Eudora to search for text. Following is a description of each option.

Anywhere—Choose this option to search everywhere in the message including all header fields and message body. This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on.

Headers—Choose this option to search only in the header fields of the message. This includes headers that are normally exposed only with the Blah Blah Blah icon button turned on.

Body—Choose this option to search only in the body of the message.

Attachment Name(s)—Choose this option to search only attachment names in the message.

Summary—Choose this option to search text entered in only the header From and Subject: fields of the message.

Status—Choose this option to search for messages by status. A status drop-down options list displays (the default is Unread). You can choose from Unread, Read, Replied, Forwarded, or Redirected. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Priority—Choose this option to search for messages by priority. A priority drop-down options list displays priorities (the default is Highest). You can choose from Highest, High, Normal, Low, or Lowest. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Attachment Count—Choose this option to search the number of attachments joined to each message. A counter appears for you to select the desired number, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Label—Choose this option to search for messages by label. Choose Label, and the labels drop-down options list displays (the default is None). You can choose from the labels you previously set up. The conjunction field defaults to is.

Date—Choose this option to search for messages by date. Once selected, today’s date appears. Click the down arrow to display the current month’s calendar. Using the arrows on the calendar, you can display the preceding or proceeding months and years. Choose the date to or from where you want the search to begin.

Size—Choose this option to search for messages by their file size (in kilobytes). A counter appears for you to select the desired number of kilobytes, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field displays is.

Age—Choose this option to search for messages by age (in days). A counter appears for you to select the desired number of days, or you can type the number in the text box. The conjunction field displays is.

Personality—Choose this option to search for messages by account. A drop-down list displaying your previously set up personalities appears. Select the desired personality.

Mailbox Name—Choose this option to search for messages in a specific mailbox. Enter the name of the mailbox in the text box.

To—Choose this option to search text entered in only the To header field of the message.

From—Choose this option to search text entered in only the From header field of the message.

Subject—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Subject: header field of the message.

CC—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Cc header field of the message.

BCC—Choose this option to search text entered in only the Bcc header field of the message.

Any recipient—Choose this option to search text entered in only the To, Cc, and Bcc header fields of the message.

4.	After you select the option from the drop-down list, select a conjunction to link the first option with the text you will be searching for.

Following is a description of each conjunction option in the drop-drop list.

contains—If the specific item contains the text string, search and display those messages.

contains word—If the specific item contains the exact word, search and display those messages.

does not contain—If the specific item does not contain the text string, search and display those messages.

is—If the specific item is an exact match, search and display those messages.

is not—If the specific item is not an exact match, search and display those messages.

starts with—If the specific item starts with the text string, search and display those messages.

ends with—If the specific item ends with the text string, search and display those messages.

matches regexp—If the specific item matches the regular expressions characters, search and display those messages. Regular Expression is a search string that uses special characters to match text characters. For example, if you are searching for messages sent to you by two people, choose From in the first drop-down options list, then choose matches regexp, then type their usernames between brackets separated by a vertical slash, e.g., (bobclark)|(janedoe) in the text box. Eudora searches and displays all messages from these two people. See Regular Expressions.

For more information, refer to the readme.txt file in your Eudora folder, or click www.robelle.com/library/smugbook/regexpr.html.

Note. Regular Expressions is an advanced and complex method of searching for text. There are several web sites where you can get information on Regular Expressions.

is after/is before (Date only)—If the date is after or before the date displayed, search and display those messages.

is greater than/is less than (Age, Size, Priority, Attachment Count only)—If the specific item is greater than or less than the number indicated, search and display those messages.

5.	Once you have chosen the conjunction, enter the text string in messages you are searching for, or choose a value from the drop down list if one displays. In the text box, you can enter as much text as you want.

If you click Search, Eudora will search through all of your mailboxes for every message that contain the text you specified anywhere in the header portion of the message.

6.	To continue adding a second level of criteria (you can add up to five levels), click More. Choose and enter more criteria to further streamline the search. You can also select Match All or Match Any to include or differentiate the criteria from one level to the other. “Match All” will find messages that match all of the criteria you entered; “Match Any” will find messages that match any of the criteria you entered.

If you click Search, Eudora will search for every message through every mailbox that contains the word you specified anywhere but only if the text you specified is somewhere in the header.

To continue adding a third level or criteria, click More. Choose and enter more criteria to further reduce the search. Click Search to display the messages that contain the criteria you entered.  You can now search further from the results of the search by clicking More to continue entering more criteria.

The messages that fulfill the search criteria appear in the Results window.

The Search feature will not work if you have any text boxes blank. You can click Fewer to reach a level where all text boxes are filled to conduct your search.

To sort the messages, click the column headings to sort by that column. To sort in descending order, click the column header again.

To open a message, select and double-click the message, or right-click to display the context menu. Choose Open Message.

To open the mailbox where this message resides, highlight the message, right-click to display the context menu. Choose Open Mailbox.

To delete a message, highlight the message and press the Delete key, or right-click to display the context menu. Choose Delete Message.


Auto-Completion Options Window

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

The Auto-Completion options determine how you will use the name auto-completion feature to complete names and email addresses in the To, Cc and Bcc fields on the message headers of your outgoing messages. Eudora completes the names by looking for the names in either your history file or address book.

To display the Auto-Completion options window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Scroll and click Auto-Completion. The Auto-Completion options window appears.

  Listed below are the field descriptions for Auto-completion.

Address Book—Select to auto-complete nicknames you’ve previously set up in your address book in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields in the message header. Deselect to not display nicknames from your address book in the drop-down name list.

History File—Select to auto-complete names from your history file in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields in the message header. Deselect to not display names and email addresses from your history file in the drop-down name list.

The history file consists of names and email addresses that appear in the To and Cc, fields in the messages you send, reply to, or forward.

Use drop down list for completion choices—Select to display the drop-down name list when you begin to type a name in the To, Cc, or Bcc fields. Deselect to not display the drop-down name list.

Names should appear in alphabetical order—Select to display names in the drop-down list in alphabetical order. Deselect to display names nonconsecutively.

Add the from lines of replied-to messages—Select to add the name appearing in the From field from a received message that you replied to. This name and email address goes into your history file.

Time to wait before popping up Auto-Completion box (Milliseconds)—Enter the number of milliseconds you want Eudora to wait before displaying the window containing the address book and history file choice entries. The larger the number you enter, the longer the wait. If you enter 0, the window will display immediately.

Maximum number of entries to keep in history:—Enter the number of names you want to keep in your history file at any given time. As you add names, the old entries are removed leaving the amount of names to equal the number entered here.


Automatic Spell Checking

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Automatic spell check is a variation of the present inline spell check feature in Eudora. If automatic spell check is turned on, misspelled words are double-underlined after you press the spacebar after typing the word in the message body. You can correct the word or display a drop-down word list from which to choose the correct word by right-clicking the underlined word.

Before you start using the automatic spell check feature, you must turn this feature on.

To turn the automatic spell check on, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options,

2.	Scroll and select Spell Checking. The Spell Checking options window appears.

3.	Select Automatically as you type.

4.	Click OK. Your automatic spell check should be on.

When you type in your message and misspell a word, the word is immediately underlined after you press the Spacebar.

5.	If you want to choose the correct word from the drop-down word list, right-click and the drop-down word list appears. From the drop-down word list, you can choose Ignore All to ignore the perceived error or Add to add the word to your dictionary. If you add the word, it will not display as a misspelled word in future messages.


Replying with Selected Text

If you receive a message from someone, and you would like to reply to this message by using a selected part of the message, you can do so by just highlighting the text you want to appear in your reply.

To select text to include in a reply, do the following:

1.	In a received message, click and drag to highlight the text you want to include in your reply.

2.	Once the selected text is highlighted, choose Reply from the Message menu or click the Reply icon . The selected text now appears in your message reply.

3.	Add more response, if needed.

4.	To send, click Send (or Queue).


Match Whole Word Only

Normally, Eudora ignores a word if it is a part of a larger word when searching. If you want Eudora to consider the whole word when searching, check the Match whole word only option in the Find dialog box. When this option is checked, Eudora searches for exact matches of the word you entered.


Auto-wrapping Plain Text Messages

This feature allows a received plain text message to adjust to your computer’s display width. When you reply to the message, you will initially be given an excerpt bar to the left of the text. You can still adjust the width of the window and see the original text adjust accordingly. This feature is used only when viewing messages and composing messages that are sent as Replies or Forwards.

An original plain text message with a plain text reply will be sent out as plain text only. The excerpt bar gets converted. Also, if both you and your recipient use Eudora 4.3 or later, format=flowed will be used on all replies.

You can disable this feature by setting the following in your [Settings] section of your Eudora.ini file:

     ConvertFormatFlowedtoExcerpt=0

     InterpretFormatFlowed=0


Auto Name Completion in Directory Services

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

When looking up names in Eudora’s Directory Services, Eudora remembers the name and places it in a directory services history file. So whenever you begin typing a name, a drop-down list of names from your history file displays alphabetically. Just select the desired name from the list, and the name’s information appears.


Suggestions

From time to time, everyone comes up with an idea for something they'd like their software to do differently. This is true of all applications, no less Eudora. If you come across an idea that you think might make a nice enhancement to Eudora, your input is always welcome. Send any suggestions or requests for new features to eudora-suggest@qualcomm.com

You will receive an automated response indicating that your suggestion has been received and forwarded to our engineering staff. Unless additional information is needed, you will not receive a direct response.


Reporting Bugs

If you experience something you think might be a bug in Eudora, report it by sending a message to
win-eudora-bugs@qualcomm.com or choose Report A Bug from the Help menu, Eudora displays a new composition window addressed to Windows Eudora Bugs at Qualcomm. If you are having technical problems with Eudora, just answer the questions in the email message.

You can describe what you did, what happened, what version of Eudora you have, any error messages Eudora gave (the numbers in parentheses ()'s are especially important), what kind of computer you have, which operating system you're using, and anything else you think might be relevant.

You will receive an automated response indicating that your bug report has been received and forwarded to our engineering staff. Unless additional information is needed, you will not receive a direct response.


Remove or Add Excerpt Bars

In an outgoing message, you now have the ability to add or remove excerpt bars right in the message.

To remove excerpt bars in an outgoing message, do the following:

1.	Move the cursor to the paragraph to where you want to delete an excerpt bar or select the paragraph.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Text. The Text submenu appears.

3.	From the Text submenu, choose Remove Quote Level or press the Ctrl key + . (period).

One level of excerpt bar is removed.

To add excerpt bars in an outgoing message, do the following:

1.	Move the cursor to the paragraph to where you want to add an excerpt bar or select the paragraph.

2.	From the Edit menu, choose Text. The Text submenu appears.

3.	From the Text submenu, choose Add Quote Level or press the Ctrl key + > (greater than).

One level of excerpt bar is added.


Changing the Eudora Mode

You can choose one of three operating modes on how you wish to use Eudora. They are as follows:

Paid mode

This mode provides the full-featured Eudora desktop email client without advertising.

Sponsored mode

This mode provides the full-featured Eudora desktop email client at no charge, supported by sponsors' advertising. It includes all of the features that are in the Paid mode.

Light mode

This is an upgrade to the freeware version formerly known as Eudora Light. It includes fewer features than the other modes and a sponsor image or logo, but no advertising.

 If you bought Eudora from a retail store or from a web site, Eudora installs in paid mode. However, if you would like to change the operating mode, for example to sponsored mode, you can do so right in the Eudora program. (Remember to request a refund from QUALCOMM. See the last page of this guide for details.)

To change the Eudora operating mode after you install Eudora 4.3, do the following:

1.	From the Help menu, choose Payment & Registration. The Payment and Registration window appears.

2.	In the Which Eudora is right for you? section:

•	To use Eudora in sponsored mode, click Sponsored Mode (free, with ads). Eudora displays the ad window.

•	To use Eudora in paid mode, click Paid Mode (costs money, no ads). Eudora displays the Eudora web site for you to purchase Eudora.

•	To use Eudora in light mode, click Light Mode (free, fewer features). Eudora changes to light mode by shutting down certain features. The features that will be off are listed in the Light mode dialog box.

3.	In the Keeping Current section:

•	To customize the ads, click Customize the Ads You See. Eudora displays a web site where you can provide information about yourself to help in customizing which ads should be displayed to you.

•	To find the most current version of Eudora, click Find the Latest Versions. The Eudora web site displays where you can retrieve the latest version of Eudora.

You can tell which mode you are in because that button is grayed out.


Link History

(Sponsored and Paid modes only)

Link History is an option on the Tools menu that displays Internet web site URLs and ads that have appeared in Eudora.

To display your link history, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Link History. The Link History dialog box appears.

2.	To view a link in the list, click to highlight it, then click View, or double-click the item. To remove the link from the list, click Remove.

If you right-click in the Link History window, a context menu appears.

Copy—copies the link item to the clipboard.

View—displays the link item’s web site page.

Remove—deletes the link item.

Change Date Display—displays a submenu allowing you to set reminders when to see the link, bookmark the link, or sort the link items by date.

Note. The items in this window expire and do not appear after 30 days.


Registering Eudora

If you are using Eudora in either sponsored or paid mode, you need to register to be eligible for technical support. If you don’t register or use Eudora in light mode, you are not eligible for technical support.

To register your copy of Eudora, do the following:

1.	From the Help menu, choose Payment & Registration. The Payment and Registration window appears.

2.	In the Keeping Current section, click Register with Us. Eudora takes you to Eudora’s
registration web page.

3.	Enter your information, click Submit Registration. An email will be sent to you confirming your registration.


Internet Dialup

The Internet Dialup options determine how Eudora manages your Internet telephone connection.

To display the Internet Dialup options window, do the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options.

2.	Click the Internet Dialup icon. The Internet Dialup options window appears.

Have Eudora connect using Dialup networking—If this is selected, the specified dialup connection (referred to in Windows NT 4.0 as a "phonebook entry") is used when Eudora does any network operation. This option is available only if you have installed the dialup networking services with Windows 95/98 or Windows NT 4.0.

When Eudora established the connection:

Hang-up after receiving and sending—If this is selected, the connection terminates each time mail is retrieved and sent.

Close connection on Exit—If this is selected, the phone connection terminates when you exit Eudora.

Entry:—Use the drop-down list to select a dialup connection in this field. You must have dialup networking set up in Windows.

New—Select to create a new dialup networking entry. See the online user manual for information on creating a dialup networking entry.

Edit—Select to edit the current entry displayed in the Entry field box. For example, you would edit phone number.

Only do automatic mail checks when a network connection is already established— If this is selected, Eudora will do an automatic mail check only if you are connected to a network.


Sorting Messages in Mailboxes

When you check your mail and new messages come into your In box or are filtered into other mailboxes, the new messages are placed in their mailboxes in the order in which they arrive. By default, these new messages appear at the bottom of the message summary list in the mailbox window. Note that this is not necessarily a strict date order, since occasionally messages may arrive out of date order. (The date indicates when the message was sent, not when you receive them.)

Similarly, when you transfer messages to another mailbox, those messages appear at the bottom of the message summary list in that mailbox.

You can sort messages in a mailbox by status, priority, attachment, label, sender, date, size, server status, subject, and group by subject. You can sort these messages in either ascending or descending order one column at a time or by combining several columns in the sort.

Simple Sorting

You can access Eudora’s sort feature to perform a simple sort in three ways:

By clicking the column header you want to sort. For example, if you click the Who column, senders of your messages are sorted in alphabetically order.

By right-clicking anywhere on the column headings. The context menu appears for you to choose a sort criteria for that column. For example, if you choose the item to sort in descending order, the mailbox sorts from top to bottom.

By choosing the Sort from the Edit menu. The Sort submenu appears for you to choose a column heading to sort.

The normal sort order is ascending, for example, with the most current dates at the bottom of the list. If you hold down the Shift key and click the column header, the sorting becomes descending. You can mix ascending and descending sorts when sorting more than one column at a time.

In each column heading, you can choose if that heading has no sort, is sorted in ascending order, or sorted in descending order. Also, you can group subjects together by choosing Group by Subject, which keeps messages with the same subject together all the time.

Messages (including replies) with the same subject, such as a work project are kept together in the mailbox regardless of whether you sort by Date, Sender, and so on. A checkmark next to the Group by Subject option in the context menu indicates that the option is active.

New messages that come into a sorted mailbox will automatically be placed in the correct sorted order. For example, if you have a mailbox sorted by date, and you want all of the messages to be grouped by subject, any new messages will be grouped with other messages containing the same subject in a chronological.

You can also sort message in the Find Messages window when the Results panel is active.

Complex sorting

You can perform complex sorting by holding down the Ctrl key and click one column, then another column, and so on. The columns are sorted in the order you clicked on them. For example, if you click the Subject column first and then the Date column, the subjects in this mailbox sort alphabetically and then chronologically. You will notice numbers in each column header indicating the order of the sort.

To perform a complex sort, you can click two columns or all eight! To cancel the sort, just click on the column that displays 1. All the sort criteria will cancel.


Using_SMTP_Athentication
Using SMTP Authentication

SMTP authentication operates automatically in Eudora.

Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail, just like it does for receiving mail. Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication. Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it. The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM-MD5. If CRAM-MD5 is not available, LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used. Once Eudora discovers that your SMTP server allows authentication and when you send messages, a dialog box appears that prompts you to enter a password.

If for some reason you prefer that Eudora not attempt to login to your SMTP server, you can tell it not to do so by doing the following:

1.	From the Tools menu, choose Options, then Sending Mail. The Sending Mail options window appears.

2.	Turn off the Allow Authentication.

3.	Click OK.

If you turn off the Allow Authentication option, you may not be able to send mail. Please check with your email administrator or ISP if you have any difficulties.


Regular Expressions
Regular Expressions (Sponsored and Paid modes only)

When searching for messages or defining a filter in Eudora, an option you can use is regular expressions. Following is a description of regular expressions and how they are used in Eudora.

  There are two functions in Eudora where you can use regular expressions:

•	Filters window— Located in the drop-down list where you indicate the relationship between a mail header and a piece of text (for example, the “Subject” contains Eudora, “Any Recipient” is joe@xyz.com, and so on). There are two regular expression criteria in that list, namely "matches RegEx" and "matches RegEx (case insensitive)."

•	Find Messages window— Located in the center drop-down list. The option "matches regexp" appears. In the Find Messages window, regexp is not case sensitive.

There are various standard implementations of regular expressions, but Eudora uses the POSIX implementation. Following are symbols that are supported in Eudora.

.	(period) represents any one character.
[ ]	(brackets) contain a set of characters from which a match can be made.  It corresponds to one character in the search string.
\	(backslash) is an escape character which means that the next character will not have a special meaning.
*	(asterisk) is a multiplier.  It will match zero or more of the previous character.  (Note that it's not a wildcard character as in file names.)
?	(question mark) is a multiplier.  It will match zero or one of the previous character.  (Note that it's not a wildcard character as in file names.)
+	(plus) is a multiplier.  It will match one or more of the previous character.
{ }	(squiggly brackets) contain a number which specifies an exact number of the previous character.
[^]	(brackets containing caret and other characters) means any characters except the character(s) after the caret symbol in the brackets.
^	(caret) is the start of the line.
$	(dollar) is the end of the line.
\<	represents the start of a word.
\>	represents the end of a word.
[:alpha:]	represents any alphabetic letter.
[:digit:]	represents any single-digit number.
[:blank:]	represents a space or tab.
|	(pipe) is OR.  It requires that the joined expressions have parentheses around them.
Here are a few examples:

E.*a	matches Eudora, Etcetera, Ea
ho+p	matches hop, hoop, hoooop, but not hp
etc\.	matches etc. but not etc
e.a	matches eta, eda, e1a; it only matches Eta if the matching is case-insensitive
[eE].a	matches eta and Eta
You can find further information on regular expressions on the web, for example the following web site: www.robelle.com/library/smugbook/regexpr.html.


Payment and Registration

Displays the Payment and Registration window where you can change the mode of Eudora you are using and register Eudora.


Link History

Displays the Link History window where you can choose ads and Internet links to open.


Report A Bug

Displays a new composition window addressed to Windows Eudora Bugs at Qualcomm. If you are having technical problems with Eudora, just answer the questions in the email message.


Priority

Specifies the priority of the message as it appears in the mailbox window.


BLAH ,BLAH, BLAH (Outgoing message option)
BLAH, BLAH, BLAH Icon

If this is on, all message headers (and any formatting codes) are displayed.


Size (Outgoing message option)
Font Size Button

Click this button and choose a size from the popup menu to change the selected or current text to that size. Choices are Very Small, Small, Medium, Large, Larger, Very Large, and Humongous.


Typewriter (Outgoing message option)
Typewriter Button

Click this button to change the selected or current text to the fixed-width (typewriter-style) font set in the Fixed-width field of the Message portion of the Fonts Options (Tools:Options:Fonts). Fixed-width fonts are useful for composing and reading aligned text, such as in columns and tables.


Fixed Width (Message option)
Fixed Width Button (FW)

Click this button to convert the entire message text to a fixed-width (typewriter-style) font. Fixed-width fonts are useful for viewing aligned text, such as columns and tables. Note that this option does not edit the message but only changes the view mode while the message is open. Eudora turns the FW button off when you close the message.


Edit the Message
Pencil Button

Click this button to edit the message text. When you are finished editing, select Save from the File menu, or press Ctrl+S, to save your changes. If you close the message without saving changes, Eudora prompts you to save or discard your changes. You cannot edit the message headers: only the message body text. Once you save your changes, you cannot undo the editing, so edit messages with care.


Insert Object (Outgoing message option)
Insert Object Button

Click this button and select Picture... or Horizontal Line from the popup menu to insert a picture or horizontal rule at the current cursor position in the message body. Pictures, once inserted, can be dragged around within the message. A horizontal line is inserted on a line by itself. Note that whether or not your recipient can see the inserted object depends on the viewing capabilities of his or her email package and computer.


Word Wrap (Outgoing message option)
Word Wrap Icon

If this is on, a carriage return is not required at the end of each line. When the message is sent, the text is automatically “wrapped,” meaning that carriage returns are inserted at the end of each line of text, with roughly 76 characters per line.


Trash (Outgoing message option)
Trash Icon

If this is on, the next time Eudora checks the server for mail it also deletes this message from the server.


Fetch (Outgoing message option)
Fetch Icon

If this is on, the next time Eudora checks the server for mail it also downloads this entire message.

You can also turn on the Trash icon so that the message is downloaded then deleted.


Subject (Outgoing message option)
Subject Field

Use this field to change the subject of the message as it appears in the mailbox window. To change the subject, type the new subject in this field and press [Enter].


Signature (Outgoing message option)
Signature popup

The Signature popup menu lets you automatically attach a signature file to the end of the message.

If you have a default signature set, it appears in the Signature popup menu, but you can change it at any time before you send the message.


Attachment Type (Outgoing message option)
Attachment Type popup

The Attachment Type popup menu lets you select what format documents that you attach to outgoing messages are encoded in: Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME), BinHex, or Uuencode.

MIME is best for recipients with MIME.
BinHex is most compatible with old Macintosh mailers and previous versions of Eudora.
Uuencode is best for communicating with older PC or UNIX systems.


Quoted-Printable Encoding (Outgoing message option)
Quoted-Printable Encoding

If this is on, quoted-printable (QP) encoding may be used when sending messages that contain long lines of text or special characters. When on, it is used for all attachments. It is recommended that this button always be on.


Text as Document (Outgoing message option)
Text as Attachment

If this is on, plain text files (ASCII) are attached as normal. If it is off, plain text files are included in the body of the message.


Word Wrap (Outgoing message option)
Word Wrap

If this is on, carriage returns are inserted automatically when the message is sent, at roughly 76 characters per line.

It is a good idea not to include your own carriage returns within paragraphs if you have this option on. Only use carriage returns to create new paragraphs.


Tabs in Body (Outgoing message option)
Tabs in Body

If this is on, when you press the tab key within the message body, a tab is inserted. If it is not on, when you press the tab key within the message body the cursor moves to the To field.


Keep Copy (Outgoing message option)
Keep Copy

If this is on, a copy of each sent message is kept in the Out mailbox (their summaries are marked with an S in the far left column of the Out mailbox window, indicating that they have been sent). These messages are saved until they are deleted or transferred to a different folder.


Return Receipt (Outgoing message option)
Return Receipt

If this is on, your recipients receive a request to notify you that they received the message.

This function does not work in all cases, depending on the email application your recipients are using.


Open Next Message

Opens the next message in the mailbox.


Open Previous Message

Opens the previous message in the mailbox.


New File

Opens a text window so you can create a text file from within Eudora.


Open File

Displays the standard File dialog box so you can find and open a file.


Open Attachment

Opens an attachment in a composition window or a received message, as long as the attachment is highlighted (in a composition window) or the cursor is on the same line as the attachment (in a received message).


Close

Closes the current message or window.

Hold down the Shift key to close all open windows.


Save

Save changes to the topmost window. This applies to message composition windows, signature windows, the Nicknames window, and the Filters window.

Hold down the Shift key to save the changes to all open windows.


Save As

Displays the standard Save As dialog box so that you can save the current message to a plain text file.

If you select several messages they are all saved as one file.


Save As Stationery

Saves the current message to a stationery file.


Send Queued Messages

Sends all queued messages to the mail server.

Hold down the Shift key to display the Mail Transfer Options dialog box.

Queued messages are listed in the Out mailbox with a “Q” in the status column.


Check Mail

Checks your POP or IMAP server for new messages and transfers them to your computer.

Hold down the Shift key to display the Mail Transfer Options dialog box.

If a time appears in parentheses next to this command, it is the next time an automatic mail check will occur.


Print

Prints messages, a text file, a signature file, the Filter Report window, the dialup Navigation Trace window, or the Ph window.


Print Preview

Displays the Print Preview window for messages, a text file, a signature file, the Filter Report window, the dialup Navigation Trace window, or the Ph window.


Print Setup

Displays the standard Windows Print Setup dialog box.


Exit

Exits Eudora. If edited messages or windows are still open, you will be asked to save or discard your changes.

Hold down the Shift key to instruct Eudora that all currently open windows are to automatically reopen at the next startup.


Undo

Reverses the last editing action done on a piece of text (multiple levels).


Redo

Re-performs the last undone action (multiple levels).


Cut

Deletes the selected text and copies it to the clipboard.


Copy

Copies the selected text to the clipboard.

Hold down the Shift key to remove the carriage returns from “wrapped” text prior to copying it to the clipboard.


Paste

Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point in a message or message header.


Paste As Quotation

Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point with quote characters at the beginning of each line to denote quoted text.


Clear

Deletes selected text without copying it to the clipboard.


Plain

Makes the selected text plain.


Bold

Makes the selected text bold.


Italic

Makes the selected text italic.


Underline

Makes the selected text underlined.


Select All

Selects the entire contents of a message or mailbox.


Normal

Converts the selected or current paragraph to normal margin (no indentation).


Indent In

Indents the selected or current paragraph in one level.


Indent Out

Removes one level of indent from the selected or current paragraph.


Left

Makes the selected paragraph aligned to the left.


Right

Makes the selected paragraph aligned to the right.


Center

Makes the selected paragraph aligned to the center.


Bulleted List

Converts the selected or current text to a bulleted list.


Make Hyperlink

Lets you convert any piece of selected text or graphic which hyperlinks to a URL you specify. When your recipient clicks on the text string or picture, he or she is immediately taken to that URL.


Clear Formatting

Clears all formatting from the message: removes all styles. Styled text is sent as plain text.

Clear all the formatting from the selected text or paragraph.


Picture

Inserts a graphic at the current cursor position in the message. Once the picture is inserted, you can drag it to where you want it in the message. Your recipient will see the picture right in the message.


Horizontal Line

Inserts a horizontal rule at the current line level and the drops the text line containing the cursor to the next line down.


Wrap Selection

Inserts carriage returns at the end of each line of the current selection, in the same way Eudora does when it sends mail.

Hold down the Shift key to unwrap the current selection (removes the carriage returns).


Finish Address Book Entry

Completes the partial text of a nickname in a message header field.

Hold down the Shift key to insert the full nickname expansion in the message header field.


Insert Recipient

Inserts the chosen recipient at the insertion point.


Find

Displays the Find submenu so that you can find a character string within one message or messages within mailboxes and folders.


Find Text Again

Finds the next occurrence of the specified text string, beginning with the current message and searching through subsequent messages and mailboxes.


Find Messages

Displays the Find Messages dialog box for you to choose criteria and enter words or numbers for Eudora to search for messages in your mailboxes and folders.


Sort by Status

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by status.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Priority

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by priority.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Attachment

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by attachment.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Label

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by label.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Sender

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by sender.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Date

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by date.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Size

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by size.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Server Status

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by server status.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Sort by Subject

Sorts the message summaries within a mailbox by subject.

To sort in descending order, hold down the Shift key and use a Sort command.


Check Spelling

Checks current message composition windows, text files, and signature files for spelling errors. If a misspelled, unknown, or repeated word is found, the Check Spelling dialog box appears with the word listed in the Unknown field.


Message Plugins

Applies the selected plug-in to the selected message or text.


In (Mailbox menu command)
In

Opens the In mailbox.

All incoming messages are stored in this mailbox until they are filtered, transferred, or deleted.

Note: Try not to keep too many messages in your In box because it can slow down your system’s performance. However, you can transfer messages from your In box to other mailboxes.


Out (Mailbox menu command)
Out

Opens the Out mailbox.

All messages you compose, save, and queue are stored in this mailbox until they are sent. Also, if the Keep copies option in the Sending Mail Options is on, a copy of each outgoing message is  saved in this mailbox.

Note: Try not to keep too many messages in your Out box because it can slow down your system’s performance. However, you can transfer messages from your Out box to other mailboxes.


Trash (Mailbox menu command)
Trash

Opens the Trash mailbox.

All deleted messages are stored in this mailbox until you select Empty Trash from the Special menu. If the Empty Trash when exiting option in the Miscellaneous Options is on, the Trash is automatically emptied when you exit Eudora. Deleting a message from this mailbox permanently deletes the message.

Note: Try not to keep too many messages in your Trash box because it can slow down your system’s performance. Try to delete your Trash box on a regular basis.


Your Mailbox (Mailbox menu command)
Your Mailbox

Opens a mailbox you have created.


New...

Displays the New Mailbox dialog box so that you can create a new mailbox or mailbox folder.


New Message

Opens a new message composition window.


Reply

Generates a reply message to a current incoming message.

To copy the message to yourself, hold down the Shift key while selecting the command.


Reply to All

Generates a reply message addressed to all of the recipients of the selected message.


Forward

Generates a forward message from a current incoming message.


Redirect

Generates a redirect message from a current incoming message.

The address in the From: field of the message header is that of the original sender “by way of” your address.


Send Again

Reformats a message that was returned to you by the mail server so that you can send it again without including all of the return information. A message is typically rejected because of an error in the recipient’s address, although there are many other possible reasons.


New Message To

Opens a new message to the selected recipient.


Forward To

Opens a forwarded message to the selected recipient.


Redirect To

Opens a redirected message to the selected recipient.


New Message With

Opens a new message with the selected stationery file.


Reply With

Opens a reply message with the selected stationery file.


Attach File
Attach File (Send File)

Displays a standard File dialog box so that you can attach a file to a new or current message. Any file can be attached to and sent with a Eudora message.


Send Immediately

Sends the current message to the SMTP server.

You can change this command to “Queue For Delivery” so that your outgoing messages are put in a queue until you send them all at the same time. To do this, turn off Immediate send in the Sending Mail Options.


Queue For Delivery

Saves the current message in the Out mailbox and marks it as Q (queued for delivery). Send your Queued messages by selecting Send Queued Messages from the File menu.

You can change this command to Send Immediately so that your outgoing messages are sent out immediately. To do this, turn on Immediate send in the Sending Mail Options


Change... Queueing

Displays the Change Queuing dialog box so that you can modify the queueing status of an outgoing message.

Use this dialog box to queue the current messages, unqueue messages, or set a time for queued messages to be sent.


Change... Status... Unread

Changes the status of the current messages to unread.


Change... Status... Read

Changes the status of the current messages to read.


Change... Status... Replied

Changes the status of the current messages to replied.


Change... Status... Forwarded

Changes the status of the current messages to forwarded.


Change... Status... Redirected

Changes the status of the current messages to redirected.


Change... Status... Unsendable

Changes the status of the current messages to unsendable.


Change... Status... Sendable

Changes the status of the current messages to sendable.


Change... Status... Queued

Changes the status of the current messages to queued.


Change... Status... Time Queued

Changes the status of the current messages to time queued.


Change... Status... Sent

Changes the status of the current messages to sent.


Change... Status... Unsent

Changes the status of the current messages to unsent.


Change... Priority... Highest

Changes the priority of the current messages to highest.


Change... Priority... High

Changes the priority of the current messages to high.


Change... Priority... Normal

Changes the priority of the current messages to normal.


Change... Priority... Low

Changes the priority of the current messages to low.


Change... Priority... Lowest

Changes the priority of the current messages to lowest.


None (do not change Label)
None

Do not put a label on the current message (take off any existing label).


Change Label

Changes the label of the current messages to the selected label that you have created.


Change... Server Status... Leave

Changes the server status to Leave. The message will stay on the server.


Change... Server Status... Fetch

Changes the server status to Fetch. The message will be transferred from your POP account the next time you check or send mail.


Change... Server Status... Delete

Changes the server status to Delete. The message will be deleted from the server the next time you check or send mail.


Change... Server Status... Fetch then Delete

Changes the server status to Fetch then Delete. The message will be transferred from your POP account, then deleted from the server the next time you check or send mail.


Delete

Transfers the current message to the Trash mailbox, or if your incoming mail server uses IMAP,  marks the current message for deletion from your system and the IMAP server.


UnDelete

Unmarks for deletion a message that has been marked for deletion using the Delete command. If your incoming mail server uses IMAP, then use Delete to mark your messages for deletion. Use UnDelete to unmark them (they will not be deleted), and use Remove Deleted Messages to remove the marked messages from your system and the IMAP server.


Purge Messages

Purges from your system and from the IMAP server all messages that have been marked for deletion.


In (Transfer menu command)
In

Transfers the current message(s) to the In mailbox.


Out (Transfer menu command)
Out

Transfers the current message(s) to the Out mailbox.


Trash (Transfer menu command)
Trash

Transfers the current message(s) to the Trash mailbox.


Your Mailbox (Transfer menu command)
Your Mailbox

Transfers the current message(s) to the mailbox you have created.


New... (Transfer menu command)
New...

Displays the New Mailbox dialog box so that you can create a new mailbox and transfer the current message(s) into it.


Filter Messages

Runs all manual filters on the current messages.

This is the only way that filters designated as Manual in the Filters window can be used.


Filter Report

Opens the Filter Report window, which displays a report of all filtering activity since the last Eudora startup. The Generate filter report option must be turned on in the Getting Attention Options for these reports to be created.


File Browser

Opens the File Browser window, which operates similar (but not identical) to Windows Explorer. It lets you drag files to open composition messages to add them as attachments.


Stationery

Opens the Stationery window, which lets you create, edit, rename, delete, and otherwise manage your stationery files.


Signatures

Opens the Signature window, which lets you create, edit, rename, delete, and otherwise manage your signature files.


Personalities

Opens the Personalities window, which lets you create, edit, delete, and otherwise manage your personalities (email accounts).


Make Address Book Entry...

Creates a single Address Book entry from selected messages or Address Book entries.

If you make an Address Book entry from incoming messages, the addresses in the From fields are used. If you make an Address Book entry from outgoing message, the addresses in the To and Cc fields are used.


Add as Recipient

Adds the highlighted email address(es) to the Quick Recipient list.

To do this, highlight one or more addresses in a message window, then select Add as Recipient.


Remove Recipient

Removes the selected recipient from the Quick Recipient list.


Empty Trash

Permanently deletes messages from the Trash mailbox.

If the Empty Trash when exiting option in the Miscellaneous Options is on, the trash is emptied automatically when you exit Eudora.


Compact Mailboxes

Recovers the unused space from all of your mailboxes.

This used space was created when messages were deleted or transferred from the mailboxes.


Forget Password
Forget Password(s)

Makes Eudora forget that you have already entered your password(s) for this session.

You will be prompted to re-enter password(s) at the next mail check.


Change Password...

Displays the Password change dialog box so that you can change the selected password.

This will only work if you have the necessary software on your server.


Message Plug-ins Settings...

Displays the Message Plug-ins Settings dialog box so that you can setup your message plug-ins.


Filters

Displays the Filters dialog box so that you can create filters that automatically sort your incoming and outgoing mail.


Mailboxes

Displays the Mailboxes window so that you can create, rename, and remove mailboxes and folders.


Address Book

Displays the Address Book so that you can create, edit, or remove entries and their nicknames.

Entries can consist of multiple addresses so that you can create mailing lists.


Directory Services

Displays the Directory Services window so that you can access information by using Ph and finger directory services for example.


New Signature

Displays the New Signature window so that you can add a signature.


Delete Signature

Displays the Delete Signature window so that you can delete a signature.


Standard Signature
Standard

Displays the Standard Signature window so that you can create a standard signature to be included at the end of your outgoing messages.


Signatures

Displays the Signature window so that you can create a signature to include at the end of your outgoing messages.


Options...

Displays the Options dialog box so that you can set Eudora options.


Cascade

Arranges all open windows in a cascade.


Tile Horizontal

Arranges all open windows as horizontal tiles.


Tile Vertical

Arranges all open windows as vertical tiles.


Arrange Icons

Arranges iconified windows along the bottom of the Eudora window.


Send To Back

Sends the active window to the back.


Topics

Displays the online Help contents.


Context Sensitive Help

Displays compact, pop-up help for an item you select or an object at which you point and click.


Insert System Configuration

Inserts detailed information about your system into a composition message. Use this when reporting Eudora bugs.


About Eudora

Opens a window giving detailed information about this version of Eudora and its credits.


Make Filter

Opens the Make Filter window allowing  you to create a simple filter. A message in one of your mailboxes must be selected before you can use this command.


Task Status

Display the Task Status window, which lets you see Eudora checking mail for and sending mail from each of your personalities simultaneously.


Task Error

Display the Task Error window, which lets you see a detail summary of any error that may occur while in Eudora.


Paste Special

Using Paste Special, you can paste copied text as unformatted, Rich Text Format (RTF), Eudora standard, or Hyper Text Markup Language (HTML) text.

Eudora determines the format of the text on the clipboard and displays the available formats in the Paste Special dialog box.

Note. The Paste Link and Display As Icon functions are not available.


Find Text

Displays the Find Text dialog box where you can enter text to search within a message.


Technical Support (menu option)

Displays Eudora’s technical support help page.


Mail Server (Incoming POP/IMAP)

Specifies the name of your account on your incoming server (POP or IMAP) that delivers your email.

For example, if your assigned login name is “justine,” and the name of the computer where you receive email is incoming.qualcomm.com type only incoming.qualcomm.com in this field. (When you enter your server name here, it is made available in the incoming Mail Server field of other Options categories.) Then your full email address is justine@incoming.qualcomm.com.

A POP account is an account on a computer that runs a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3 or POP) server. An IMAP account is an account on a computer that runs an Internet Message Access Protocol server. This is the account to which your email messages are delivered so that Eudora can find them and transfer them to your computer. You must have a POP or IMAP account to be able to receive mail with Eudora.


Real name (Options)
Real name

Specifies your real name.

Enter your name as you want it to appear in the From field of your outgoing mail messages. Your return address is also given in that field.


Mail Server (Incoming)

Enter the full name of the computer that receives your incoming mail.

For example, if your assigned login name is “justine,” and the name of the computer where you receive email is incoming.qualcomm.com type only incoming.qualcomm.com in this field. (When you enter your server name here, it is made available in the incoming Mail Server field of other Options categories.) Then your full email address is justine@incoming.qualcomm.com.

Your incoming server is either a POP or IMAP server. A POP account is an account on a computer that runs a Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3 or POP) server. An IMAP account is an account on a computer that runs an Internet Message Access Protocol server. This is the account to which your email messages are delivered so that Eudora can find them and transfer them to your computer. You must have a POP or IMAP account to be able to receive mail with Eudora.

Most likely, you receive your mail from a POP server; however, if you are using Eudora in an organization, please check with you system administrator to see what kind of server you are using for your incoming mail.


Login Name

Enter the name you use to log in to your primary email account. This is often the text that appears before the at sign (@) in your email address.

Example: For the account beatrixp@qualcomm.com, the login name is beatrixp.


Return address (Options)
Return address

Specifies a return address if it is different than your incoming account.

If you enter an address in this field, first test the address to be sure that mail sent to it is indeed delivered to you. If you use an invalid return address, no one can reply to your mail.


 SMTP server (Outgoing)

This is the name of the server where you send your messages to. The name of this server is SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol).

Enter the name of your SMTP server if it is different from the computer that is running your incoming server. You do not need a login name on this server, but you must have access to it through your network.


Launch a program from a message

If this is selected, you are warned if you try to launch a program from a message. For security reasons, you should never launch a program without performing a virus check on the file. Do not launch any program if you do not know sender. Some viruses can infect a file without you knowing it. It is always good to perform regular virus checks using a current virus checking program.


Check for mail every _ minutes (Checking Mail Options)
Check for mail every _ minutes

Specifies how often Eudora checks the incoming server(s) for new mail. It's a good idea to set this to at least 15 minutes. Checking mail more frequently puts an unnecessary drain on your incoming server.


Don't check when using battery (Checking Mail Options)
Don’t check when using battery

If this option is on and your computer is running on battery power, mail is not automatically checked even if automatic mail-checking is on (that is, even if the Check for mail every _ minutes field has a number other than 0 in it).


Send on check (Checking Mail Options)
Send on check

If this is checked, any messages that are queued (Q) in the Out mailbox are sent when Eudora checks the incoming server for new mail.


Save password (Checking Mail Options)
Save password

If this is checked, your password is stored in Eudora and you never have to enter it again, even if you exit Eudora and restart.

Only use this option if your computer is in a secure place.


Leave mail on server (Options)
Leave mail on server

If this is checked, incoming messages are transferred to your computer and also left on the server. (Normally your mail is transferred, then deleted from the incoming server.)


Delete from server after _ days (Incoming Mail Options)
Delete from server after _ days

This option has a checkbox for turning it on and off and an edit box for specifying the number of days mail that was left on the incoming server should be saved before being deleted. It's a good idea not to leave copies of your messages on the incoming server indefinitely, as this will create mail storage problems on the server.


POP (Incoming Mail Options)
POP

Select POP if the incoming mail server for this account uses the POP Internet-mail protocol (Post Office Protocol).


IMAP (Incoming Mail Options)
IMAP

Select IMAP if the incoming mail server for this account uses the IMAP Internet-mail protocol (Internet Message Access Protocol).


Download Options (IMAP)

Listed are options you can choose when downloading email.


Minimal Headers Only (IMAP)

If this setting is on, only a limited set of message headers is downloaded from the IMAP server for each incoming message. If this setting is off, the full set of message headers is downloaded for each incoming message.


Skip Attachments over _ K

If this setting is on and a number is entered in the edit box, then any attachment larger than the specified size will not be downloaded with the message. If this setting is off, all attachments are downloaded regardless of size.


Skip messages over _ K in size
Skip messages over _ K in size/Full message except attachments over _ in size

If this setting is on and a number is entered in the edit box, then any message larger than the specified size will not be downloaded. If this setting is off, all messages are downloaded regardless of size. If you enter 0 in the text box, all attachments regardless of size are retrieved.


IMAP Mailbox Location Prefix

This specifies the mailbox location prefix that IMAP will use when locating your personal mailboxes on the incoming mail server. An example prefix is /usr/mail. Ask your email administrator what to enter here, if you are not sure.


Delete from server when emptied from Trash (Incoming Mail Options)
Delete from server when emptied from Trash

If this is checked, all messages that you have deleted from your trash mailbox are also deleted from the server.

This only applies to messages that were transferred to your computer under the Leave mail on server option. Normally Eudora deletes a message from the server immediately after the message is transferred.


Authentication Style (Checking Mail Options)
Authentication Style

Specifies the authentication style. Ask your email administrator which one is being used at your site. To get mail from a CompuServe incoming server, choose RPA as the authentication style.

For POP, you can use Passwords, Kerberos, APOP, or RPA.

For IMAP, you can use Passwords or CRAM-MD5.


Domain to add to unqualified names (Options)
 Domain to add to unqualified names

Specifies a domain to be added to unqualified names.

An unqualified name is one that doesn't have an "@" sign followed by a domain name. If you address a message to someone without including their domain name, Eudora automatically adds this domain to that address. This setting can be used as a time-saving device when addressing large numbers of messages to users who reside in the same domain.


Immediate send (Sending Mail Options)
Immediate send

If this is checked, all send options are set to Send Immediately.

If this is not checked, messages are saved in the Out mailbox and marked “Q” (queued for delivery).

Send options include the rightmost button in the icon bar of the message composition window and the Send Immediately option in the Message menu.


Select a default stationery (Sending Mail Options)
Select a default stationery

Select a stationery file to use as the default for all your outgoing messages from your main account, or choose <No Default> for no default stationery.

Once you select a stationery, new messages are created with that stationery and will include the toolbar settings for the stationery.

If there is no stationery selected, new messages are created with toolbar settings based on the options selected below the stationery pop-up.


Default signature (Sending Mail Options)
Default signature

Select a signature file to use as the default for all your outgoing messages from your main account (when you are not using stationery), or choose <No Default> for no default signature. You can always change the signature for a particular message by selecting a signature from the Signature pop-up menu on the message toolbar. Your signature is automatically attached to the end of outgoing messages.


Word wrap (Sending Mail Options)
Word wrap

If this is checked, carriage returns are inserted automatically when the message is sent, at roughly 76 characters per line.

It is a good idea not to include your own carriage returns within paragraphs if you have this option on. Only use carriage returns to create new paragraphs.


May use Quoted-Printable (Sending Mail Options)
May use Quoted-Printable

If this is checked, Eudora uses quoted-printable encoding when necessary, such as when messages that contain long lines of text or special characters are sent.

If this is not checked, quoted-printable encoding is never used.


Keep copies (Sending Mail Options)
Keep copies

If this is checked, a copy of each message you send is saved in the Out mailbox and marked √.

If this is not checked, Eudora moves outgoing messages to the Trash mailbox after they are sent.


Tabs in body of message (Sending Mail Options)
Tabs in body of message

If this is checked, when you press the tab key within the message body, a tab is inserted.

If this is not checked, when you press the tab key within the message body the cursor moves to the To field.


Encoding Method (Attchments Options)
Encoding Method

These options specify what encoding method should be used with attached files.


MIME (Attchments Options)
MIME

If this is checked, documents attached to outgoing messages are encoded in MIME.

MIME is best for recipients with MIME.


BinHex (Attchments Options)
BinHex

If this is checked, documents attached to outgoing messages are encoded in BinHex.

BinHex is best for recipients with old Macintosh mailers and previous versions of Eudora.


Uuencode (Attchments Options)
Uuencode

If this is checked, documents attached to outgoing messages are encoded in Uuencode Data Fork.

Uuencode is best for communicating with older PC or UNIX systems.


Put text attachments in body of message (Attachments Options)
Put text attachments in body of message

If this is checked, Eudora puts any plain-text attachment you send directly in the message body as if it were typed in manually. If this is unchecked, the plain-text attachment is sent as an attachment file.


Attachment Directory (Attachments Options)

Specifies what directory your incoming attachments will be put in.

To change the directory, single-click on the directory name button (the default is blank). A dialog box appears allowing you to select the attachment destination directory.

If you do not select an attachment directory, attachments are placed in your Eudora directory.


Delete attachments when emptying Trash (Attachments Options)
Delete attachments when emptying Trash

If this is checked, attachments are deleted when their corresponding messages are deleted from the Trash (or the Trash is emptied).

The attachment must be in the directory defined as the Attachments Directory.

If you want to save an attachment but delete the message, move the attachment to another directory or leave this option off.


Never (Attchments Options)
Delete automatic attachments: Never

If this is checked, automatic attachments are never deleted automatically.

Automatic attachments are attachments to automatically generated messages, such as with the Insert System Configuration command.


After sending message (Attchments Options)
Delete automatic attachments: After sending message

If this is checked, automatic attachments are deleted automatically after the corresponding message is sent.

Automatic attachments are attachments to automatically generated messages, such as with the Insert System Configuration command.


When message emptied from Trash (Attchments Options)
Delete automatic attachments: When message emptied from Trash

If this is checked, automatic attachments are deleted when their corresponding messages are deleted from the Trash (or the Trash is emptied).

Automatic attachments are attachments to automatically generated messages, such as with the Insert System Configuration command.


Screen Font (Fonts Options)
Screen Font

Specifies the font and point size to be used for displaying the text of your Eudora messages and mailbox windows.

To change the selection, click on this button. The Font dialog box appears so that you can select a new font and size.


Printer Font (Fonts Options)
Printer Font

Specifies the font and point size to be used when printing messages using the Print command.

To change the selection, click on this button. The Font dialog box appears so that you can select a new font and size.


Proportional (Fonts & Display Options)
Proportional

Specifies the proportional font to use in message windows and in the message preview pane in mailbox windows.


Fixed-width (Fonts Options)
Fixed-width

Specifies the fixed-width font to use in message windows and in the message preview pane in mailbox windows.


Use proportional as default (Fonts Options)
Use proportional font by default

If this is checked, your specified proportional font is used to display text in message windows and the message preview pane. If this is unchecked, your specified fixed-width font is used to display this text.


Size (Fonts Options)
Size

Specifies the size of the font to be used for text in message windows and the message preview pane.


Size (printer) (Fonts Options)
Size (printer)

Specifies the size of the font to use when printing text from Eudora.


Font (screen) (Fonts Options)
Font (screen)

Specifies the font to use when displaying all Eudora screen text other than that in message windows and the message preview pane.


Size (screen) (Fonts Options)
Size (screen)

Specifies the size of the font to use when displaying all Eudora screen text other than that in message windows and the message preview pane


Show cool bars (Display Options)
Show cool bars

If this is checked, the main window toolbar buttons have a flat look and only become raised when you position the mouse pointer over the button. If this is unchecked, the main window toolbar buttons always appear raised.


Show toolbar (Display Options)
Show toolbar

If this is checked, the main window toolbar appears.


Show MDI task bar (Display Options)
Show MDI task bar

If this is checked, Eudora displays the Eudora taskbar at the bottom of the window work area. This taskbar contains buttons for all open and minimized normal Eudora windows. Click the buttons on the taskbar to activate the indicated window. The Eudora taskbar functions similarly to the Microsoft Windows 95 and NT taskbars, but the Eudora taskbar cannot be moved and cannot be separately resized.


Use Microsoft Viewer (Viewing Mail Options)
Use Microsoft viewer

If this is unchecked, Eudora displays advanced formatting, graphics, and multimedia in incoming and outgoing messages using its own built-in viewer. If this is checked, Eudora takes full advantage of the Web browser capabilities of Microsoft's Internet Explorer 3.0 or 4.0 by showing Web content right in incoming and outgoing messages or linking to the Internet, without your having to open the Web browser. This option is only available if you have Microsoft's Internet Explorer version 3.0 or higher installed and available on your system.


Show message preview pane (Viewing Mail Options)
Show message preview pane

If this is checked, Eudora displays the message preview pane in mailbox windows. The preview pane previews a single selected message. A splitter between the preview pane and the message summary list lets you resize the preview pane relative to the list.


Mark previewed messages as read after _ second(s) (Viewing Mail Options)
Mark previewed messages as read after _ second(s)

If this is checked and the Show message preview pane option is checked, the message currently selected in the mailbox window and previewed in the preview pane is automatically marked as read (blank in the Status column) after the specified number of seconds. If this is unchecked, a previewed message will not be automatically marked as read. To return a message to the Unread status (bullet in the Status column) after it has been marked as read, press Shift+Space. Press again to return to read status.


Zoom windows when opening (Viewing Mail Options)
Zoom windows when opening

If this option is on, new message windows automatically open to their "zoomed" size. The zoomed size is computed on a window-by-window basis. For message windows, zoomed size is just long enough to display all of the message (but no longer than the main window), and as wide as the Message window width setting. Composition windows zoom to the height specified by the Message window height setting.


Show toolbar tips (Display Options)
Show toolbar tips

If this is checked, holding the mouse pointer over a button in the main window toolbar displays a very brief description of that button's function.


Show status bar (Display Options)
Show status bar

If this is checked, a status bar appears at the bottom of the main window. The status bar provides a brief description of menu items and toolbar buttons.


Show category icons (Display Options)
Show category icons

If this is checked, the Options categories are presented with icons and the name.

If this is not checked, the categories are presented with just the name.


Show attachment icons (Viewing Mail Options)
Show attachment icons

If this is checked, the icon for an attachment appears, along with the attachment name, in the body of incoming message windows and the message preview pane in mailbox windows. If this is unchecked, only the attachment's name appears in incoming messages and the preview pane.


Labels (Labels Options)
Labels

The Labels options define the title and color of the seven labels that can be used to categorize messages. To change a label title, type the new title in the field to the right of the label number. To change a label color, single-click on the label number to display the Color dialog box.

In the Color Dialog, you can select from one of the pre-defined Basic Colors or create your own Custom Colors. To assign a basic color to a label, select the color and click OK. To create a custom color, click the Define Custom Colors button to display the custom colors palette.

To define a custom color, select one of the 16 custom color boxes. Using the mouse pointer, click anywhere on the color palette to select the color Hue and Saturation. Use the color control bar to the right of the color palette to adjust the color. When you are satisfied with the color, click the Add to Custom Colors button. Once you have completed creating the custom colors, select the desired label color and click OK.


Use an alert dialog box (Getting Attention Options)
Use an alert dialog box

If this is checked, an alert dialog box notifies you when you have new mail.


Open mailbox (Getting Attention Options)
Open mailbox

If this is checked, mailboxes are opened when new mail is received, and the first unread message is highlighted.


Play a sound (Getting Attention Options)
Play a sound

If this is checked, Eudora plays the sound when new mail arrives.

To select a sound (.wav) file, click on the Play a sound button. The Select Sound File dialog box appears so that you can select a sound.


Select Sound File (Getting Attention Options)
Select Sound File

Specifies the sound file to be played when new mail arrives.

To select a sound (.wav) file, click on this button. The Select Sound File dialog box appears so that you can select a sound.


Generate Filter Report (Getting Attention Options)
Generate Filter Report

If this is checked, a Filter Report is generated with information about filtered messages.


Delete unread mail (Extra Warnings Options)
Delete unread mail

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to delete unread mail.


Delete queued mail (Extra Warnings Options)
Delete queued mail

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to delete queued mail.


Delete unsent mail (Extra Warnings Options)
Delete unsent mail

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to delete unsent mail.


Queue a message with no subject (Extra Warnings Options)
Queue a message with no subject

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to queue a message with no subject.


Ask me each time

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to queue a message with styled text.


Quit with messages queued to be sent (Extra Warnings Options)
Quit with messages queued to be sent

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to quit with messages queued to be sent.


Queue a message bigger than _ K (Extra Warnings Options)
Queue a message bigger than _ K

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to queue a message bigger than the specified size.


Empty the Trash mailbox (Extra Warnings Options)
Empty the Trash mailbox

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to empty the Trash mailbox.


Start Eudora and it's not the default mailer (Extra Warnings Options)
Start Eudora and it's not the default mailer

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when you try to start Eudora and it’s not the default email application.


Switch views for Find (Extra Warnings Options)
Switch views for Find

If this is checked, you are warned if you try to perform a Find operation (using the Edit menu Find submenu) while viewing an incoming message using Microsoft's Internet Explorer version 3.0 viewer. The warning indicates that Eudora will switch to a different viewer to complete the Find operation. Eudora uses Internet Explorer (IE) 3.0 as the default viewer if IE 3.0 is installed and available on your system and the Use Microsoft's viewer option is checked in the Viewing Mail Options.


Map Ctrl+R to "Reply to All" (Replying Options)
Map Ctrl+R to "Reply to All"

If this is checked, when you type Ctrl-r a reply message is created addressed to all the recipients of the selected message The change is reflected on the Message menu.


Copy original's priority to reply (Replying Options)
Copy original's priority to reply

If this is checked, when you do a Reply the reply has the same priority as the original message.


Automatically FCC to original mailbox (Replying Options)
Automatically FCC to original mailbox

If this is checked, replies are automatically copied to the mailbox the original message is in.


When Replying to all (Replying Options)
When Replying to all

These options specify how a reply message will be generated.


Include yourself (Replying Options)
Include yourself

If this (and Reply to all) is checked, when you do a Reply the reply includes your address so that you receive a copy of your own reply.

If this is not checked, the reply does not include your address and you do not receive a copy. (Unless you have checked Keep copies of outgoing mail in the Sending Mail category.)

To determine who you are for the Include yourself option, Eudora uses the “me” nickname. You create the “me” nickname in your Address Book. If you do have a “me” nickname, Eudora uses the contents of the  Login Name, Mail Server, and Return Address from the Getting Started options.


Put original To: recipients in Cc: field (Replying Options)
Put original To: recipients in Cc: field

If this (and Reply to all) is checked, when you do a Reply the reply includes the addresses of the original message recipients in the Cc: field. The To: field contains only the address of the original sender.


Show Mailbox Columns: Status (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Status

If this is checked, the Status column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Priority (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Priority

If this is checked, the Priority column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Attachment (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Attachment

If this is checked, the Attachment column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Label (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Label

If this is checked, the Label column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Sender (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Sender

If this is checked, the Sender column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Date (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Date

If this is checked, the Date column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Size (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Size

If this is checked, the Size column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Server status (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Server status

If this is checked, the Server status column appears in Mailbox windows.


Show Mailbox Columns: Subject (Display Options)
Show Mailbox Columns: Subject

If this is checked, the Subject column appears in Mailbox windows.


Ignore capitalized words (Spell Checking Options)
Ignore capitalized words

If this is checked, words that start with capital letters, such as proper nouns, are ignored.


Ignore words with numbers (Spell Checking Options)
Ignore words with numbers

If this is checked, words that contain numbers are ignored.


Ignore words with mixed case (Spell Checking Options)
Ignore words with mixed case

If this is checked, words that contain both upper and lower case characters are ignored.


Report doubled words (Spell Checking Options)
Report doubled words

If this is checked, words that appear twice in sequence in text are reported and identified as doubled words.


Ignore words with all capitals (Spell Checking Options)
Ignore words with all capitals

If this is checked, the spelling checker ignores words that contain all capital letters, such as acronyms.


Suggest word (Spell Checking Options)
Suggest Words

If this is checked, then when the spelling checker encounters an unknown word, it displays Eudora's suggestions for the correct spelling of the word in the Suggestions field of the Check Spelling dialog box. You can also select any combination of the suggestion options: Phonetic words, Split words, Typographic words. Note that if Eudora has no suggestions in its dictionary for the word, then no suggestions are listed.


Ignore Original Text (Spell Checking Options)
Ignore Original Text

If this is checked, quoted text (preceded by “>” or “|” ) is ignored. Eudora assumes that this text was originally from another message, and therefore does not need to be checked.


Check when message queue/send selected (Spell Checking Options)
Check when message queue/send selected

If this is checked, the spelling in a message is checked when you queue or send the message.


Without completing the spell check (Spell Checking Options)
Warn me when I queue/send a message without completing the spell check

If this is checked, a warning dialog box appears when a message is queued or sent without a complete spell check.


Display dates using Sender's timezone (Date Display Options)
Display dates using Sender’s timezone

If this is checked, messages are displayed with the sender’s time and date, as determined by the sender’s time zone.


Display dates using Local's timezone (Date Display Options)
Display dates using Local timezone

If this is checked, messages are displayed with your time and date based on your time zone.


Date Formats: Fixed (Date Display Options)
Date formats: Fixed

If this is checked, all messages are displayed with the time and date as specified by the formatting you enter in this field. See the formatting key in the Options panel.


Date formats: Age-sensitive (Date Display Options)
Date formats: Age-sensitive

If this is checked, all messages are displayed with times and dates as specified by your entries in the fields related to RECENT, OLD, and ANCIENT times. The hours determining these times are specified in the Hours to be OLD and Hours to be Ancient fields. See the formatting key in the Options panel.


RECENT format (Date Display Options)
RECENT format

Enter the formatting you wish to use to display dates and times of the most recent messages. See the formatting key in the Options panel.


Hours to be OLD (Date Display Options)
Hours to be OLD

Enter the number of hours at which messages are to be considered old. The number of hours is measured from the current system time. This number is the cutoff point between RECENT and OLD messages.


Hours to be ANCIENT (Date Display Options)
Hours to be ANCIENT

Enter the number of hours at which messages are to be considered ancient. The number of hours is measured from the current system time. This number is the cutoff point between OLD and ANCIENT messages.


OLD format (Date Display Options)
OLD format

Enter the formatting you with to use to display dates and times of messages considered OLD. OLD messages are determined by the number in the Hours to be OLD field. See the formatting key in the Options panel.


ANCIENT format (Date Display Options)
ANCIENT format

Enter the formatting you with to use to display dates and times of messages considered ANCIENT. ANCIENT messages are determined by the number in the Hours to be ANCIENT field. See the formatting key in the Options panel.


Switch messages with (Miscellaneous Options)
Switch messages with

These options specify what keys can be used to quickly open and close message windows.


Unmodified arrow keys (Miscellaneous Options)
Unmodified arrow keys

If this is checked, the keyboard arrow keys can be used to close the current message and open the next or previous message in the mailbox.

The up or left arrow key opens the previous message; the down or right arrow key opens the next message. If this option is off, the arrow keys can be used to move the caret in messages.

Even if Unmodified arrow keys is on, the arrow keys do not switch messages if there is a message composition window topmost on the screen.


Ctrl+arrow keys (Miscellaneous Options)
Ctrl+arrow keys

If this is checked, you can switch between open messages by holding down the [Ctrl] key and then pressing the arrow keys.


Alt+arrow keys (Miscellaneous Options)
Alt+arrow keys

If this is checked, you can switch between open messages by holding down the [Alt] key and then pressing the arrow keys.


Close messages with mailbox (Miscellaneous Options)
Close messages with mailbox

If this is checked, all open messages are closed when you close the mailbox they are in.


Empty Trash when exiting (Miscellaneous Options)
Empty Trash when exiting

If this is checked, the Trash mailbox is emptied every time you exit Eudora.

If this is not checked, the Trash is only emptied when you select Empty Trash from the Special menu.

If you want to remove some messages from the Trash mailbox but don't want to empty it entirely, highlight the summaries you want to delete and select Delete from the Message menu. The selected messages are deleted.


Say OK to alerts after _ seconds (Miscellaneous Options)
Say OK to alerts after _ seconds

If this is checked and a number of seconds is specified, any notices of network problems are dismissed after the specified number of seconds.

If this is not checked, notices are left in place and Eudora cannot try the communication again until you dismiss the alert.


Turbo redirect by default (Miscellaneous Options)
Turbo redirect by default

If this is checked, a Redirect to Recipient command does the following:

Opens a redirected message to the selected recipient

Queues the new message

Deletes the original message

To turn this option on or off (regardless of this setting), hold down the [Shift] key while selecting a redirect recipient.


Allow Drag and Drop Transfers (Miscellaneous Options)
Allow Drag and Drop Transfers

If this is checked, you are able to “drag and drop” messages among mailboxes.


Intercept Netscape mailto URLs (Miscellaneous Options)
Intercept Netscape mailto URLs

If this is checked, when you click on a mailto URL in Netscape (a email address link) a new Eudora message is opened for that address.


Include outdated `Return-Receipt-To' (Miscellaneous Options)
Include outdated ‘Return-Receipt-To’

If this is off, Eudora uses the “Disposition-Notification-To:” header in return receipt requests to request that you be sent a notification when your message appears by the recipient. If this is on, Eudora also sends the “Return-Receipt-To:” header in return receipt requests. This header is understood by some older mail delivery systems, and may return you a receipt when your message is delivered to your recipient’s mailbox. The “Return-Receipt-To:” header cannot give you any information about whether or not your recipient displayed your mail, and is not supported by many newer mail delivery systems.


Include outdated `Return-Receipt-To' (Miscellaneous Options)
Automatically expand nicknames

If this is checked, when you enter nicknames into message address fields the entire address(es) of the nickname is entered into the field, not just the nickname.


Server Name (ACAP)

This is the ACAP server name to which you wish to connect to retrieve the pre-configured Eudora settings. If the ACAP server name is not displayed in this field, contact your administrator or postmaster.


User Name (ACAP)

Enter your user name. With your user name and password, you can access the ACAP server to retrieve your preconfigured Eudora settings. Your system administrator or postmaster will provide this user name to you if your settings are available on an ACAP server.


Password (ACAP)

Enter your password. With your user name and password, you can access the ACAP server to retrieve your preconfigured Eudora settings. Your system administrator or postmaster will provide this password to you if your settings are available on an ACAP server.


Retrieve Settings Now

Click this button to retrieve you preconfigured settings. The preconfigured settings will replace the settings you now have on Eudora.


Use asynchronous Winsock calls for (Advanced Network Options)
Use asynchronous Winsock calls for

These options specify how Winsock calls are made using a TCP/IP stack. If you're experiencing trouble with your Winsock connection, make sure both of these options are off.


All non-database functions (Advanced Network Options)
All non-database functions

Specifies asynchronous Winsock calls for all non-database functions.

There are two methods of making Winsock calls using TCP/IP stacks, blocking and asynchronous. Because of the ability to handle error conditions more gracefully, asynchronous is the preferred method when using Eudora. However, some TCP/IP stacks do not handle asynchronous calls correctly. If you're experiencing trouble with your Winsock connection, make sure both of these options are off.


Database functions (Advanced Network Options)
Database functions

Specifies asynchronous Winsock calls for database functions.

There are two methods of making Winsock calls using TCP/IP stacks, blocking and asynchronous. Because of the ability to handle error conditions more gracefully, asynchronous is the preferred method when using Eudora. However, some TCP/IP stacks do not handle asynchronous calls correctly. If you're experiencing trouble with your Winsock connection, make sure both of these options are off.


Network Open timeout _ seconds (Advanced Network Options)
Network open timeout _ seconds

Specifies the number of seconds before a network connection will time out.


Network timeout after _ seconds (Advanced Network Options)
Network timeout after _ seconds

Specifies the number of seconds before a network connection will time out.


Network buffer size of _ bytes (Advanced Network Options)
Network buffer size of _ bytes

Specifies the size of the buffer that Eudora uses to transfer information to and from the server.

If you are having trouble transferring large messages, the size of this buffer may be decreased.


Cache network info (Advanced Network Options)
Cache network info

If this is checked, Eudora remembers the results of previous database functions when using the Winsock connection method.

This speeds up database functions within a single Eudora session.


Unload Winsock DLL after closing socket(Advanced Network Options)
Unload Winsock DLL after closing socket

If you are using the Trumpet Winsock stack for dial-up, select this option if you like to have your computer dial and hang-up between functions, for example sending and receiving mail.


Entry

Use the drop-down menu to select a dial-up connection in this field. You must have dial-up networking set up in Windows.


Username (Advanced Network Options)
Username

This specifies the username to be used with the auto connection.


Save password (Advanced Network Options)
Save password

If this is on, the password for the auto connection is saved in Eudora so that you do not have to re-enter it after exiting Eudora.

If you select Forget Password(s) from the Special menu, you will be prompted for the password the first time you try to check mail.


Use Eudora MAPI server (MAPI Options)
Use Eudora MAPI server

These options specify when the Eudora MAPI server should run.


Use Eudora MAPI Server: Never (MAPI Options)
Use Eudora MAPI Server: Never

If this is checked, the Eudora MAPI server is off and is never automatically opened.


Use Eudora MAPI Server: Always (MAPI Options)
Use Eudora MAPI Server: Always

If this is checked, the Eudora MAPI server is on and is always opened on startup.


Use Eudora MAPI Server: When Eudora is running (MAPI Options)
Use Eudora MAPI Server: When Eudora is running

If this is checked, the Eudora MAPI server is on when Eudora is running.


Delete MAPI attachments (MAPI Options)
Delete MAPI attachments

These options specify when MAPI attachments should be deleted.


Delete MAPI attachments: Never (MAPI Options)
Delete MAPI attachments: Never

If this is checked, MAPI attachments are never deleted.

MAPI attachments are copied into the Attach directory (or a directory you have specified) when they are sent. If you want to save them, use this option.


Delete MAPI attachments: After sending message (MAPI Options)
Delete MAPI attachments: After sending message

If this is checked, MAPI attachments are deleted after their corresponding messages are sent.

MAPI attachments are copied into the Attach directory (or a directory you have specified) when they are sent. If you do not want to save them, use this option.


Delete MAPI attachments: When message is emptied from trash (MAPI Options)
Delete MAPI attachments: When message is emptied from trash

If this is checked, MAPI attachments are deleted after their corresponding messages are emptied from the trash.

MAPI attachments are copied into the Attach directory (or a directory you have specified) when they are sent. If you do not want to save them after their corresponding messages have been deleted, use this option.


Kerberos POP3 port (Kerberos Options)
Kerberos POP3 port

Specifies the port that the Kerberos POP server is listening on.


Realm (Kerberos Options)
Realm

Specifies the network realm that the Kerberos server resides in.


Service name (Kerberos Options)
Service name

Specifies the type of service that you're requesting.


Service format (Kerberos Options)
Service format

Specifies the name of the ticket that Eudora requests from the Kerberos server.


Discard style information (Styled Text Options)
Discard style information

If this is checked, no text style information will be sent with messages.


Add Details

After setting up your filter information, click this button to both create your filter and also open the Filters window so that you can add additional information to your new filter and make it more powerful or just change it. The filter is added to the bottom of your filters list and is immediately available in the form in which it was set up in the Make Filter dialog box. Any changes you make in the Filters window must be saved before they become effective.


Offline

Turn this on if you don’t want Eudora to make any connections. This is good to have on if you’re using Eudora on a laptop computer that is not continuously connected.


Message window height

This specifies the height of new and received message windows (in lines).

Note:	If the Zoom windows when opening option is turned on, received message window heights are automatically adjusted to the height of the message text.


Automatically open next message

If this is on, deleting or transferring the current message opens the next message in the mailbox, but only if that message is unread.


Message window width

This specifies the width of new and received message windows (in characters). This option has no effect on what your mail looks like when it is sent. When mail is sent, Eudora wraps at or before 76 columns.

Note:	If you use a proportional font, Eudora sets the window width based on the average width of the characters in the font.


Show mailbox lines

If this option is on, lines are displayed in the message summaries portion of mailbox windows, horizontal lines to separate message summaries, and vertical lines to separate columns.


Select newly inserted messages (FUMLUB)

If this is selected, the first message of the most current block of unread messages is highlighted in the Table of Contents window when new messages are added to a mailbox, for example, when receiving new messages as a result of a mail check. FUMLUB means First Unread Message of the Last Unread Block. For example, you may have a series of unread messages in a mailbox scattered throughout your Table of Contents. The first message of the last block of unread messages listed in your Table of Contents is selected.


Allow drag select messages

Turn this on to click and drag adjacent messages in the Table of Contents window. This allows you to transfer a group of messages to a mailbox or to delete them if the “Allow drag and drop transfers” is turned on. The drag select works only if the drag starts on an unselected (not highlighted) message.


Show formatting toolbar

Turn this on to display the formatting toolbar by default in new message windows. If this is off, the formatting toolbar is hidden by default in new message windows. This toolbar lets you easily format text styles in new messages.


When sending mail with styled text (HTML)

This specifies what to do with HTML text styles when you send mail. The styles are delivered to your recipients using the HyperText Marking Language (HTML) format. However, the styles your recipient sees depends on how well their email software supports this standard.

HTML is the text formatting standard used in the World Wide Web by Web browsers and newer email applications. HTML allows you use enriched text, which includes different fonts, color, sizes, bold, etc. Also, HTML lets you embed pictures and create bullet lists in the emails you send.

Send plain and styled version in message —  Turn this on to send all text including plain and HTML text styles with your messages.

Send styled text only —  Turn this on to send only HTML text styles with your messages.

Send plain text only — Turn this on to send only plain text, not HTML text styles with your messages.


Send single MAPI file attachment as inline attachment (TXT and HTML files only)

Turn this on when you need to have the MAPI client send a single TXT or HTML file as an attachment with no message body text. Eudora turns off the Text As Attachment button in the outgoing message toolbar (if it is on), so that the document is sent to the recipient as inline text in the message body. This allows MAPI clients, such as Internet Explorer, to pass Web pages and other HTML and TXT documents right into the body of the Eudora message. (The Text As Attachment button, if turned on in the outgoing message toolbar, instructs Eudora to attach text files, such as TXT and HTML, to the message rather than incorporating the text into the message as part of the message body. The default state of this button is controlled by the Put text attachments in body of message option in the Attachments options.


Automation enabled from this machine

Turn this on to perform the automation operations from the computer on which Eudora is installed.

The Automation options let you control and exchange information with Eudora from other programs that support the Windows Automation Interface, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.

Automation gives you external access to Eudora mail folders, mailboxes, and messages, and to the Eudora application itself. With automation enabled, you can create, delete, and move Eudora mail folders, mailboxes, and messages, as well as get notification of these three operations when they are performed manually. You can also get lists of the subfolders under folders and of the messages within mailboxes.


Allow executables in HTLM content

If this is selected, you are able to run programs such as Java Applets, Javascript, VB Script, and Activex Controls that are embedded in an HTML texted message. For security reasons, you may want to leave this option deselected.


Task (Task Status)
Task

Displays an icon with a short description of the tasks’ actions.


Persona (Task Status)

This column is available only if you have set up more than one personality. If checked, the Personality column displays the personality name for the given task.


Status (Task Status)

Displays a general description of the tasks current status, for example, “Logging into POP server.”


Details (Task Status)

Displays more information of the tasks’ status including network protocol commands.


Progress (Task Status)

Displays a progress bar indicating the overall progress of the tasks.


Wait for _ seconds of idle time before automatically delivering spooled messages

If Eudora is retrieving mail automatically in the background, the amount of time set in this field indicates the idle time Eudora waits before delivering mail to your mailboxes and folders. For example, if you are composing a message and Eudora is retrieving mail in the background, Eudora will not deliver the mail until you stop typing for the amount of time indicated here. If the you set the time for 5 seconds, Eudora delivers your mail if you stop typing for at least 5 seconds. This field is beneficial if you don’t want to be interrupted too frequently while using Eudora. If the number is large in this field, you’ll get fewer interruptions.


Bring error window to front

Check this option to have the Task Error window brought to the front when an error occurs.


Bring task status window to front

Check this option to have the Task Status window brought to the front when a task occurs, for example sending or receiving mail.


Connect using Dial-up networking

If this is selected, the specified dialup connection (referred to in Windows NT 4.0 as a "phonebook entry") is used when Eudora does any network operation. This option is available only if you have installed the dial-up networking services with Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0.


Hang up after receiving and sending

If this is selected, the connection terminates each time mail is fetched and sent.


Close connection on Exit

If this is selected, the phone connection terminates when you exit Eudora.


Edit

Select to edit the current entry displayed in the Entry field box. For example, you would edit phone number, etc.


New

Select to create a new dial-up networking entry. See your Windows manual for information on creating a dial-up networking entry.


Show Text Symbols

If this is on, invisible text symbols, such as carriage returns, tabs, spaces, etc. appear in the message, You can see these symbols only in your composition window. They do not appear in the message you send.


Auto Configure

Eudora needs just a few pieces of information in order for you to send and receive mail. Normally you enter this information in the first few windows of the Options windows, but if you like, you can use the Auto Configure options to retrieve these basic settings from an ACAP server. Your email administrator can let you know if such a server is available to you. ACAP, which stands for “Application Configuration Access Protocol,” is a communications protocol that lets email and other applications store setup data on and retrieve it from a central server.


Automation

The Automation options let you control and exchange information with Eudora from other programs that support the Windows Automation Interface, such as Microsoft Visual Basic.

Automation gives you external access to Eudora mail folders, mailboxes, and messages, and to the Eudora application itself. With automation enabled, you can create, delete, and move Eudora mail folders, mailboxes, and messages, as well as get notification of these three operations when they are performed manually. You can also get lists of the subfolders under folders and of the messages within mailboxes.

For more information on the automation feature, visit the Web site www.eudora.com, where you can find up-to-date automation SDKs (Software Developer’s Kits) and documentation.


Background Tasks (tasks columns)

These options determine which columns are displayed in the Task Status window. Check the box next to the field whose column you want to display. The options are Task, Persona, Status, Details, and Progress.


Checking Mail

The Checking Mail Options determine how Eudora checks for and receives incoming mail messages sent to your principal email account; that is your dominant personality.


Date Display

The Date Display Options determine how message dates are displayed in the Date column of mailbox window message summaries.


Extra Warnings

The Extra Warnings options determine whether you are warned before making a possible mistake. Most of the warnings are displayed with an option to stop that warning from being displayed again. You can toggle warnings to be either on or off.


Fonts (message)

These fields list the proportional and fixed-width fonts to be used for displaying the text in your received and composition messages and in the message preview pane in mailbox windows. Also included are the size of each font and the use of proportional or fixed-width font by default.


Fonts (printer)

These fields list the font and size to be used when printing any text from Eudora using the Print... command—messages, text files, signature files, etc.


Kerberos

These options control the Kerberos authentication system. If your network uses Kerberos for authentication, the appropriate options are provided by your email administrator.


Kerberos (server name)
Kerberos (service name)

1% to stand for the service name entered in the Service name field.


Kerberos (POP server)

2% to stand for the full domain name of the POP host.


Kerberos (realm)

3% to stand for the realm entered in the Realm field.


Kerberos (host name)

4% to stand for the name of the POP host.


Labels

The Labels options determine the title and color of the seven labels that can be used to categorize messages.


Mailboxes (show columns)

These options determine which columns are displayed in mailbox windows. Turn on an option to display that column in all mailbox windows. The options are Status, Priority, Attachment, Label, Sender, Date, Size, Server status, and Subject.


Mailboxes (dragging messages)

These options determine how you can move messages from one mailbox to another.


Miscellaneous

The Miscellaneous options determine additional Eudora capabilities that are not categorized with other functions.


Check Spelling (preferences)

These settings determine how you will  use the spell checker in Eudora.


Viewing Mail (Message prefs)

These options determine how Eudora displays received and composition messages.


Viewing Mail (preview pane)

These options determine the visibility and behavior of the message preview pane that appears at the bottom of mailbox windows.


Background Tasks (time)

If Eudora is retrieving mail automatically in the background, the amount of time set in this field indicates the idle time Eudora waits before delivering mail to your mailboxes and folders. For example, if you are composing a message and Eudora is retrieving mail in the background, Eudora will not deliver the mail until you stop typing for the amount of time indicated here. If you set the time for 5 seconds, Eudora delivers your mail if you stop typing for at least 5 seconds. This field is beneficial if you don’t want to be interrupted too frequently while using Eudora. If the number is large in this field, you’ll get fewer interruptions.


Include signature on reply

If you select this option, your default signature will be included in all of your replies automatically.


Send the signature with styles

If you select this option, your signature with styled text is sent with a message that has no styled text. If this is deselected, then the signature is sent but the styles are removed.

Note. If selected, the signature becomes one with the message. However, if an attachment is included with you message, this option turns off.


Automatically as you type

Turn this on when if you want to use the automatic spell checker. Misspelled words are highlighted automatically.


Only when requested

Turn this on when you don’t want to use the automatic spell checker but would rather check your spelling all at once.


Address Book (auto-completion)

Select to auto-complete nicknames you’ve previously set up in your address book in the To:, Cc:, and Bcc: fields in the message header. Deselect to not display nicknames from your address book in the drop-down name list.


History File (auto-completion)

Select to auto-complete names from your history file in the To:, Cc:, and Bcc: fields in the message header. Deselect to not display names and email addresses from your history file in the drop-down name list.

The history file consists of names and email addresses that appear in the To: and Cc:, fields in the messages you send, reply to, or forward.


Use drop down list for completion choices

Select to display the drop-down name list when you begin to type a name in the To:, Cc:, or Bcc: fields. Deselect to not display the drop-down name list.


Names should appear in alphabetical order

Select to display names in the drop-down list in alphabetical order. Deselect to display names non-consecutively.


Add the from lines of replied-to messages

Select to add the name appearing in the From: field from a received message that you replied to. This name and email address goes into your history file.


Time to wait before popping up - Auto-completion box (Milliseconds)

Enter the number of milliseconds you want Eudora to wait before displaying the window containing the address book and history file choice entries. The larger the number you enter, the longer the wait. If you enter 0, the window will display immediately.


Maximum entries to keep in history

Enter the number of names you want to keep in your history file at any given time. As you add names, the old entries are removed leaving the amount of names to equal the number entered here.


Auto-save messages every _ minutes

Enter the number of minutes between auto-save intervals. In case of a system shut-down, the messages saved are from the most current auto-save file.


Allow authentication

Eudora can log in to an SMTP server when sending mail, just like it does for receiving mail. Not all SMTP servers require or allow such authentication. Eudora will attempt authentication to servers that allow it. The preferred SMTP authentication method is CRAM-MD5. If CRAM-MD5 is not available, LOGIN or PLAIN will automatically be used.


Don't check without a network connection

If you select this option, Eudora will not attempt to retrieve mail unless you are connected to a network.